JP7790532B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple pictures are known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts the variable display of pictures. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific combination of pictures, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

The object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play comfortably.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine comprising: launching means for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; display means arranged corresponding to the gaming board and capable of executing a variable display of a plurality of symbols; and effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect during the period during which the variable display is executed. This gaming machine comprises: a first starting ball entry means into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and which triggers the execution of a predetermined lottery based on the game ball entering; a second starting ball entry means different from the first starting ball entry means into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and which triggers the execution of a specific lottery based on the game ball entering; and a second starting ball entry means which, when a gaming ball enters at least the first starting ball entry means, triggers the execution of a specific lottery based on the game ball entering. and a hold display means capable of displaying a number of effect hold images corresponding to the number of times the effect is performed, and the variable displays that can be displayed in the variable display include a first variable display that is executed in response to a game ball entering the first start ball entry means and a second variable display that is executed in response to a game ball entering the second start ball entry means, and this gaming machine is configured so that a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player is more likely to occur thereafter if the result of a specific lottery based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means is a specific advantageous result than if the result of a predetermined lottery based on a game ball entering the first start ball entry means is a specific advantageous result, and the effect execution means can display a predetermined suggestive information image at least in the first variable displays that are displayed multiple times in succession. In a situation where a predetermined suggestive information image is displayed on the display means with predetermined display contents based on a ball entering the second starting ball entry means in a predetermined game state, the game machine is configured to be able to execute the display of a specific effect image corresponding to the second variable display, overlapping with the predetermined suggestive information image, and in a situation where a predetermined suggestive information image is displayed on the display means with predetermined display contents, the game machine is configured to be able to terminate the display of the specific effect image being executed on the display means when a predetermined condition is met, and the display contents of the predetermined suggestive information image can change from the predetermined display contents to a specific display content while the display means is executing the display of the specific effect image, and this game machine is configured to be able to execute the display of the predetermined suggestive information image, overlapping with the second variable display in which the specific effect image is displayed, However, it is configured to be displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of the predetermined variable display of the pattern in the second variable display, it is configured to be drawn and displayed so that when the predetermined suggestive information image and the specific effect image are displayed on the display means, they have different display priorities, it is configured to be able to display a special effect image following the specific effect image after the specific effect image is displayed when a specific condition is met, it is configured so that when a special effect image is displayed, it is more likely to be of higher value to the player than when a special effect image is not displayed after the specific effect image is displayed , and it is configured so that when the predetermined suggestive information image is displayed overlapping with the specific effect image, the display of the predetermined suggestive information image can be maintained for a predetermined period of time.

According to the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a reference embodiment of the present invention. Front view of the game board FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen of a pattern display device. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery A diagram showing a winning/losing table that stores the random number values that result in a jackpot. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an allocation table that stores random number values related to allocation destinations for types of jackpots. Flowchart of timer interrupt processing A flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. A flowchart showing normal processing A flowchart showing the main processing A flowchart showing the game number control process FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the big prize opening. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of opening a large prize opening; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a transition process when the open/close execution mode is ended. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emitting control device. A diagram showing the contents of the sub-side hold information storage area A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold determination process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for generating a reservation; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold shift process. A diagram showing a notice reserved pattern, a normal reserved pattern, and a special reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; A diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states, etc. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device according to a reference embodiment A of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for generating a reservation; A diagram showing a notice reserved pattern, a normal reserved pattern, and a special reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. A diagram showing the flow of pre-reading performance A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the first reservation shift process is performed after it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second reservation shift process is performed after it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area, and then the first reservation shift process is executed, and then it is determined that special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a hold shift process is performed after it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern according to a reference embodiment B of the present invention. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a hold shift process is performed after it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a second reservation shift process is performed after it is determined that special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern according to a reference embodiment C of the present invention. A diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area, and then the effect for consuming the special hold is terminated and the effect for consuming the advance hold is executed. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a reference embodiment D of the present invention; Enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity Enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. An enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that lead to the guideway FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball hits the revolving door. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that fall into the game area. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a reference embodiment E of the present invention. Enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity Enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. An enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that lead to the guideway FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the protrusion. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that fall into the game area. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a reference embodiment F of the present invention; Enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity Enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity An enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a reference embodiment G of the present invention; Enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity Enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity An enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage according to the reference embodiment H of the present invention. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emitting control device. An enlarged front view of the vicinity of the second stage after the rotation of the rotating member. A diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that fall into the game area. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a first embodiment of the present invention; An enlarged front view of the game board showing the vicinity of the lower right game means. Enlarged plan view of the crane from above FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a crane guidance state in which the rotating body is rotated. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the start port guide state when the rotating body is rotated. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an allocation table that stores random number values related to allocation destinations for types of jackpots. Flowchart of timer interrupt processing FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the open prize. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special game execution process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emitting control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; A diagram showing the symbol display device, the variable winning device, and the open winning device before the special game is executed. FIG. 10 shows the symbol display device, the variable winning device, and the open winning device when a special game is being played. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view of the game board in the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the reference embodiment J of the present invention. A diagram showing the state of the crane guidance when the moving body is moved A diagram showing the starting gate guidance state after moving the moving body. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special game execution process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emitting control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view of the game board in the vicinity of the lower right game means according to the reference form K of the present invention. A diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the crane by the rotation distribution means. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the opening start hole by the rotation distribution means. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a special game execution process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emitting control device. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a reference embodiment L of the present invention; An enlarged front view of the game board showing the vicinity of the lower right game means. Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine A flowchart showing normal processing A diagram showing the opening amount of the opening and closing door of the operation winning device FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning process for an actuation port according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for generating a reservation; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a hold shift process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect occurs; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a performance; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect is consumed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance reservation information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reservation area. FIG. 10 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area before the occurrence of the pre-reading effect after advance reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when notice-reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserve area after a pre-reading effect occurs. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the second sub-side reserved area when no pre-reading performance is occurring. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect occurs according to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a presentation pattern. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect is consumed; A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when notice-reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserve area after a pre-reading effect occurs. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a process for determining an effect pattern according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect is consumed; A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area after advance notice reserved information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserved area and after a pre-reading effect occurs.

[Reference form]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a reference embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 1 is a type of gaming machine. As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 1, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the front (front side) of the outer frame 11.

The gaming machine main body 12 comprises an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable around one of the left and right sides as the support side; a front door frame 121 arranged in front of the inner frame and supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward around one of the left and right sides as the support side; and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame and supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable backward around one of the left and right sides as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is equipped with a locking device (not shown) located at its rotating tip. This locking device has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened relative to the outer frame 11, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 121 so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame. These locked states are released by using an unlocking key to unlock the cylinder lock 13, which is exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 1.

The front door frame 121 has a substantially elliptical window portion 122 that is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 123 that is fitted into the window portion 122. In this embodiment, the window panel 123 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but it may also be made of synthetic resin or the like and be colorless and transparent.
The front door frame 121 also includes an indicator lamp section 124 provided above the window section 122 as part of a light-emitting means composed of various lamp sections etc. provided around the window section 122, speaker sections 125 provided on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp section 124 and which output sound effects etc. according to the game situation, and an upper bulge section 14 and a lower bulge section 15 provided below the window section 122.

The upper bulging portion 14 and the lower bulging portion 15 are arranged side by side one above the other and are both provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulge 14 has an upper tray 141 provided inside so as to open upward. The upper tray 141 has the function of temporarily storing game balls dispensed by a dispensing device 48 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and guiding the game balls to the game ball launching mechanism 49 (see FIG. 4) while aligning them in a row.
The lower bulge 15 also has a lower tray 151 provided on the inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 151 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 141.

Furthermore, the front door frame 121 is equipped with a launch handle 16 serving as a launching means, located to the right of the lower tray 151. This launch handle 16 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 1 to launch game balls from the game ball launching mechanism 49 located below the inner frame toward the play area located above the inner frame. By changing the amount of rotation of the launch handle 16, the launch strength of the game balls launched toward the play area, i.e., the momentum of the launch, can be changed.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
2, the game board 2 has an inner rail portion 21 and an outer rail portion 22 attached to its surface and is mounted on an inner frame. The above-mentioned play area is formed on the game board 2 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22. Almost the entire play area can be seen from the front through the window portion 122.
The inner rail portion 21 and the outer rail portion 22 form a guide rail 23 for game balls to the game area, and this guide rail 23 guides the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 49 when the player rotates the launch handle 16 to the top of the game area.

The guide rail 23 is formed so that its exit is located on one side of the play area and faces the center of the top of the play area. Therefore, the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the play area shifts from the side where the exit of the guide rail 23 is located to the opposite side as the player rotates the launch handle 16 more. In this reference form, the exit of the guide rail 23 is located on the left side of the play area.

The game board 2 has multiple large and small openings in the play area that are formed by router processing to penetrate the game balls in the front-to-back direction. Each opening on the game board 2 has a general winning opening 24, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry means) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry means) 26, a variable winning device 27, and an outlet 28. The game board 2 also has through gates 31 on the left and right sides of the center, a main display device 32 on the upper right, and a variable display unit 33 in the center. The game board 2 also has numerous nails NL planted in the play area to appropriately disperse or adjust the direction in which the game balls fall, as well as various other components (gimmicks) such as windmills.

Each of the various winning openings, namely the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and the variable winning device 27, is equipped with detection sensors 301-304 (see Figure 4) that detect the entry of game balls. These detection sensors 301-304 are arranged on the back side of the gaming board 2. Specifically, the general winning opening 24 is equipped with detection sensor 301, the upper operating opening 25 is equipped with detection sensor 302, the lower operating opening 26 is equipped with detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27 is equipped with detection sensor 304. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-304. Note that the detection sensors 301-304 may be any type capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls; for example, electromagnetic induction proximity sensors may be used.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 will pay out 10 prize balls if a ball lands in the general winning opening 24. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 3 prize balls if a ball lands in the upper operating opening 25 and if a ball lands in the lower operating opening 26. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 15 prize balls if a ball lands in the variable winning device 27. Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each operating opening 25, 26 may be different.

The outlet 28 is located at the bottom of the game area of the game board 2. Game balls that do not enter any of the various winning holes are discharged from the game area through this outlet 28. The outlet 28 also has a detection sensor 305 (see Figure 4) that detects game balls entering, and this detection sensor 305 is located on the back side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters the outlet 28, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, unlike when a ball enters any of the various winning holes.

Each through gate 31 is equipped with a detection sensor 306 (see Figure 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 306 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters a through gate 31, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning slots.

Here, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a game ball being discharged from the game area after passing through an opening, but also a game ball continuing to flow down the game area without being discharged after passing through an opening. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish it from a game ball entering the outlet 28, a game ball entering the various winning openings will also be referred to as "winning." Furthermore, a ball entering the through gate 31 refers to a game ball continuing to flow down the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area without being discharged. A ball entering this through gate 31 will also be referred to as "winning," just like a ball entering the various winning openings.

The upper actuation port 25 and the lower actuation port 26 are installed on the game board 2 as a unit acting as an actuation port device. Each actuation port 25, 26 opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the play area to enter, and are arranged side by side vertically with the upper actuation port 25 positioned at the top and the lower actuation port 26 positioned at the bottom. The lower actuation port 26 has an electric device 261 serving as a guide piece (support piece) made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric role device 261 is connected to an electric role device drive unit 262 mounted on the back side of the game board 2. This electric role device 261 is driven by the electric role device drive unit 262 to be set in either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state, the upper ends of the electric role device 261 are brought close to each other in the left-right direction, thereby closing the lower operating port 26. In the open state, the upper ends of the electric role device 261 are moved apart in the left-right direction, thereby opening the lower operating port 26.

Here, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the distance between the top end of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25 is narrower than the width of one game ball. Also, when the electric device 261 is set to the open state, the distance between the top end of the electric device 261 and the upper operating port 25 is wider than the width of one game ball. Therefore, when the electric device 261 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 26, but when it is set to the open state, the game ball can enter the lower operating port 26.

In addition, instead of the closed and open states described above, the electric device 261 may be configured to switch between a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26 (a state in which game balls can enter, unlike the closed state), and a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26. Furthermore, the lower actuation port 26 may be configured to perform such switching by displacing the lower actuation port 26 rather than by setting the electric device 261. In this configuration, the lower actuation port 26 need not be equipped with the electric device 261.

The variable winning device 27 is equipped with a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing the large winning opening 271, and a variable winning drive unit 273 that drives the opening/closing door 272.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotation amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the variable winning device 27.

Here, the game board 2 is provided with a cover 29 provided so as to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27. This cover 29 is provided with a transparent panel 291 formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 27 can be seen from the front side, and an opaque panel 292 provided around this transparent panel 291 and formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 27 from the front through the transparent panel 291 and the window portion 122.

The big prize opening 271 is located in an opening formed in the gaming area by router processing, penetrating it in the front-to-rear direction. As mentioned above, this big prize opening 271 is equipped with a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of gaming balls. Based on the detection results, the pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the special prize opening 271. The opening/closing door 272 has a closed state in which it advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2, thereby closing the opening of the special prize opening 271, and an open state in which it retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 and is buried in the game board 2, thereby opening the opening of the special prize opening 271.
The variable winning drive unit 273 drives the opening/closing door 272 to set the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot enter, but when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in an internal lottery and the mode is transitioned to, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which game balls can enter.
The open/close execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the open/close door 272 is set to an open state, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 271. In the open/close execution mode, the period from when the open/close door 272 is set to an open state until when it is set to a closed state again is called one round of play.

The main display device 32 has a main display section 34 and a display section 35 for gadgets, and is configured by arranging multiple display devices such as a segment display in which multiple segment light-emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, and a dot display.
The main display device 32 is provided on the game board 2 so as to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on its front side. In other words, the main display device 32 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the window panel 123. The distance between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123 is narrower than the width of one game ball. This prevents the pachinko machine 1 from dropping game balls between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 prevents game balls from dropping in front of the main display device 32.

The main display unit 34 includes a first result display unit 341 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the upper operating port 25, and a second result display unit 342 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winning at the lower operating port 26 (see Figure 4). The main display unit 34 may further include a round display unit for indicating the number of rounds played in the open/close execution mode when the open/close execution mode is activated (or when the open/close execution mode is activated).

The first result display unit 341 executes a varying display of the image triggered by a winning entry into the upper operating port 25, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the upper operating port 25 as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display unit 341 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 342 executes a varying display of the image triggered by a winning entry into the lower operating port 26, and displays the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 26 as a result of stopping the varying display. If the result of this internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display unit 342 displays a predetermined stopping result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode.

The device display unit 35 displays the changing patterns triggered by winning at each through gate 31, and displays the results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning at each through gate 31 as the result of stopping the changing display. If the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a transition to the electric role open state, the device display unit 35 displays the predetermined stop result. The pachinko machine 1 then transitions to the electric role open state. In this electric role open state, the electric device 261 provided in the lower operating port 26 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In this embodiment, the main display unit 34 and the gambling device display unit 35 are configured with segment displays, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix. Furthermore, the images displayed on the main display unit 34 and the gambling device display unit 35 may be configured to display multiple types of letters, multiple types of symbols, multiple types of characters, or multiple types of colors that can be switched between.

The variable display unit 33 is equipped with a pattern display device 36 that variably displays (variably displays or switches between) patterns, which are a type of picture. The variable display unit 33 also has a center frame 37 that is arranged to surround the pattern display device 36. The upper part of this center frame 37 is arranged to bulge toward the window panel 123 provided on its front side. This prevents game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and is configured to prevent inconvenience such as a decrease in visibility of the display screen G due to falling game balls.

The symbol display device 36 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display. This symbol display device 36 starts displaying a variable symbol based on a winning combination in the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. That is, when the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display in the first result display section 341 of the main display section 34 and when the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display in the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display accordingly.
The pattern display device 36 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or other display device.

The center frame 37 includes a first hold lamp unit 371 provided in the lower left area of the pattern display device 36, a second hold lamp unit 372 provided in the lower right area of the pattern display device 36, and a third hold lamp unit 373 provided in the upper area of the pattern display device 36.

The first reserve lamp unit 371 is a unit that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This first reserve lamp unit 371 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the first result display unit 341 and the pattern display device 36.
The second reserve lamp unit 372 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower operating port 26, and lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. This second reserve lamp unit 372 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the changing display of the second result display unit 342 and the symbol display device 36.
The third reserve lamp unit 373 is a part that displays the number of reserved game balls that have entered each through gate 31, and lights up according to the number of reserved balls. This third reserve lamp unit 373 can reserve up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the device display unit 35.
Each of the hold lamp sections 371 to 373 may have other configurations, such as being displayed as an image on a part of the pattern display device 36 described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in Fig. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is divided into three display areas, and each display area displays, from left to right, a left symbol column Z1, a middle symbol column Z2, and a right symbol column Z3. Each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging eight types of symbols consisting of the numbers "1" to "8" in ascending order from bottom to top, with "1" following "8". In Fig. 3, the center line of each display area is indicated by a dashed line.

The symbol display device 36 executes a game-round effect on the display screen G by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment) based on the winning of the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. This game-round effect switches from a variable display to a static display in the order of left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2, and finally ends with the predetermined symbols statically displayed on the pay line L.
That is, a game round refers to the period from when the main display unit 34 and the symbol display unit 36 start to display a variable display based on winnings at the respective operating ports 25, 26 until a predetermined stop result is displayed.

The manner in which the patterns are displayed in the pattern display device 36 is not limited to this and can be any manner. For example, the number of pattern rows, the scrolling direction of each pattern row, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, instead of the pattern consisting of numbers only, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of pictures and numbers, or may be pictures only.

<Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in Figure 4, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 4, an audio/light emitting control device 5, and a display control device 6, which are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 1 also has a payout control device 46 and a power/launch control device 47, which are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control to cause the payout device 48 described above to pay out game balls. The power/launch control device 47 executes launch control to cause the game ball launching mechanism 49 described above to launch game balls.

The main control device 4 is equipped with a main control board 41 that handles the main control of the game (main control), and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 4 also has a board box that houses the main control board 41 and other components. This board box may be equipped with a trace means that leaves a trace when it is opened, or a trace structure that leaves a trace when it is opened. Specifically, the trace means may be configured such that the board box is formed by joining multiple case bodies, and that joining sections (crimped sections) that require destruction of specific locations when the case bodies are separated, or a seal sticker that spans the boundaries between multiple case bodies, leaving a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the adhesive object when peeled off, may be attached. Furthermore, the trace structure may be configured such that an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42. The MPU 42 is a chip-integrated device that includes, in addition to the ROM 43 and RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that serves as a random number generator.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and RAM 44 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of the other control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a win/lose table storage area 431, an allocation table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433. These areas will be described in detail later.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 43 is executed, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 44 has various areas such as a counter area 441, a reserved ball storage area 442, and an electric role reserved area 443. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45 provided in the main control unit 4 and to multiple detection sensors 301-306. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45, the payout control unit 46, and the sound and light control unit 5. The output port of the MPU 42 is also connected to the electric role drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric role 261 of the lower operating port 26, the variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27, the main display unit 34, and the role display unit 35.

The main control board 41 also has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 controls the operation of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the variable prize drive unit 273 to open and close the large prize opening 271. In each game, the MPU 42 controls the display of the main display unit 34 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at each operating opening 25, 26. Furthermore, the MPU 42 controls the display of the role display unit 35 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at each through gate 31.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply and launch control device 47, which has the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 V DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 47. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301 to 306 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the various winning ports of the general winning port 24, the upper operating port 25, the lower operating port 26, and the variable winning device 27, as well as the outlet port 28 and each through gate 31. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306, the MPU 42 performs winning determinations (ball entry determinations) for the various winning ports, the outlet port 28, and each through gate 31. The MPU 42 also performs an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control to have the payout device 48 pay out prize balls and loan balls (game balls loaned to players during play) based on commands (control instructions) sent from the main control device 4.

The power supply and firing control device 47 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) at, for example, an amusement facility. The power supply and firing control device 47 generates the operating power required for the main control board 41, payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. The power supply and firing control device 47 is also equipped with a power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4, even in the event of a power outage in which the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The power supply and launch control device 47 also executes launch control, causing the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feed device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail, and a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail toward the guide rail 23. When predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply and launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid, causing the game balls to be launched.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in the MPU of the main control device>
FIG. 5 shows the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 42 performs internal lotteries and the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 to determine whether a jackpot occurs, the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the type of jackpot that occurs when a jackpot occurs, and the reach random number counter C3 to determine whether a reach display is to be generated. The MPU 42 also uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable type counter CS to determine the display duration on the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36. The MPU 42 also uses the electric role release counter C4 to determine whether the electric role 261 of the lower operating port 26 is to be in an electric role release state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter area 441 (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 44.

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching its maximum value. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 44. Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 are stored in a reserved ball storage area 442 (see Figure 4) provided as acquired information storage means in RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Furthermore, of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric role release counter C4 is stored in an electric role reserve area 443 (see Figure 4) of RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters each through gate 31.

The reserved ball storage area 442 includes a reserved area Ra for the first result display section, a reserved area Rb for the second result display section, and an execution area AE.

The first result display reserve area Ra, provided as the first acquired information storage means, comprises four storage areas, the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 has a storage capacity large enough to store a set of values from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 stores the set of values from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserve information in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 in chronological order as game balls enter the upper actuation port 25. Specifically, when multiple consecutive wins occur in the upper actuation port 25, the MPU 42 stores the reserve information in chronological order in the first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4.

In this way, the first result display holding area Ra has four memory areas, so that up to four winning game balls can be held in the upper operating port 25. The first result display holding area Ra also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved balls stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
In addition, the number of reserved items related to the upper operating port 25 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be any number such as two, three, five or more, or may be single.

The second result display reserve area Rb, provided as the second acquired information storage means, comprises four storage areas: the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 has a storage capacity large enough to store a set of values from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 stores the set of values from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reserve information in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 in chronological order as game balls enter the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, when multiple consecutive wins occur in the lower actuation port 26, the MPU 42 stores the reserve information in chronological order in the first area Rb1 → second area Rb2 → third area Rb3 → fourth area Rb4.

In this way, the second result display holding area Rb has four memory areas, so that up to four winning game balls can be held in the lower operating port 26. The second result display holding area Rb also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved balls stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
The number of reserved items related to the lower operating port 26 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be single.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the pending information stored in the memory area of the first result display unit pending area Ra or the second result display unit pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each result display unit 341, 342.

The electric winnings holding area 443 has four memory areas, similar to the first result display holding area Ra and the second result display holding area Rb. Therefore, up to four winning game balls can be held in each through gate 31.
The number of reserved items for each through gate 31 is not limited to four and can be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or it can be single.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
Each counter will be described in detail below.
First, we will explain the electric role release counter C4. The electric role release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching a maximum value of 250, it returns to 0.
The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in an electric role holding area 443 of a RAM 44 via a lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters each through gate 31.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (electric role release lottery) to determine whether or not to put the electric role 261 of the lower operating port 26 into an electric role release state based on the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443.

The pachinko machine 1 has multiple support modes that differ in the frequency with which the electric device 261 is set to the open state, thereby allowing game balls to enter the lower operating port 26. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261 is set to the open state relatively rarely, and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency guide state) in which the electric device 261 is set to the open state relatively frequently.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role release state in the electric role release lottery is the same (for example, 4/5 in both). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role release state is won, the electric role 261 is set to the open state more often, and the opening time for each electric role 261 is set to the open state is longer. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric role 261 to the closed state between each opening in a single electric role release state is shorter than the opening time for each single opening. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum waiting time (the duration of one variable display on the role display unit 35) between the end of the electric role release lottery and the next electric role release lottery is shorter.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to land in the lower actuation port 26 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the player rotates the launch handle 16 to a medium amount and hits the ball to the left, thereby shifting the position of the gaming ball at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center, thereby increasing the probability of the gaming ball landing in the upper actuation port 25 rather than the lower actuation port 26. In the high frequency support mode, the player rotates the launch handle 16 to the maximum amount and hits the ball to the right, thereby shifting the position of the gaming ball at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby increasing the probability of the gaming ball landing in the lower actuation port 26 rather than the upper actuation port 25.
When a winning ball is detected in the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game without losing too many game balls.

In this way, in this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a left-hand hitting route (first path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the upper actuation port 25 but makes it harder for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26, and a right-hand hitting route (second path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the lower actuation port 26 but makes it harder for game balls to enter the upper actuation port 25.

The configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role release state in the electric role release lottery compared to the low-frequency support mode. Also, for example, by providing multiple types of retention times, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to make it easier to select a short retention time compared to the low-frequency support mode, or to shorten the average selected retention time. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric role 261 is set to the release state, the release time, and the retention time, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to relatively increase the frequency with which the electric role 261 is set to the open state compared to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, we will explain the jackpot random number counter C1. For example, each time the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching a maximum value of 599, it returns to 0, making it a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599. Furthermore, each time the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one loop, it reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as its initial value. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, just like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25, and is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the lower actuation port 26.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a win/lose table that stores the random number values that will result in a big win.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that will result in a jackpot is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, which is provided as a win/loss information group storage means, as shown in Figure 6.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has two winning/losing lottery modes: a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a jackpot, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a jackpot. The winning/losing table includes a winning/losing table for the low probability mode (low probability winning/losing information group) shown in Figure 6(a) and a winning/losing table for the high probability mode (high probability winning/losing information group) shown in Figure 6(b).
The MPU 42 compares these winning/losing tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur.

These winning/losing tables have the results (winning/losing results) of the lottery for multiple jackpots, including "jackpot win,""special losing result," and "normal losing result."
Specifically, in a gaming state in which the winning/losing table for the low probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the jackpot, there are two random number values that result in a "jackpot win," as shown in Figure 6(a).
In contrast, in a gaming state in which the high-probability mode hit/miss table is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, as shown in Figure 6(b), the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" are 21. Here, the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" stored in the low-probability mode hit/miss table are included in the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" stored in the high-probability mode hit/miss table.

The values and numbers of random numbers stored in each hit/miss table are arbitrary, as long as the high probability mode has a higher probability of "winning the jackpot" compared to the low probability mode. Furthermore, the value of the random number that results in a "jackpot win" stored in the hit/miss table for the high probability mode does not have to include the value of the random number that results in a "jackpot win" stored in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode, and may include a portion of the value of the random number that results in a "jackpot win" stored in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode.

In addition, in each win/lose lottery mode, any random number value other than the "jackpot win" will result in a loss and not a jackpot.
Here, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of failure results: a "special failure result (small win result)" and a "normal failure result." These failure results have in common that neither triggers a transition to the win/lose lottery mode or the support mode. However, they differ in that the "special failure result" triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal failure result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 29.
The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer when a gaming ball enters the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper operating port 25, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the lower operating port 26.
Then, when a jackpot occurs, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (allocation lottery) for the type of the jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an allocation table that stores random number values related to allocation destinations for each type of jackpot.
The random number values relating to the allocation destinations of the types of jackpots are stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area 432 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43 provided as allocation information group storage means, as shown in FIG. 7. The allocation table includes a first allocation table (first allocation information group) shown in FIG. 7(a) and a second allocation table (second allocation information group) shown in FIG. 7(b).
The MPU 42 compares these distribution tables with the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery for determining the type of big win.

The first allocation table is a table that is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the reserve area Ra for the first result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning the upper operating port 25.
7(a), the first allocation table allocates a plurality of allocation results, including "low probability result (special allocation result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit few-round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", "explicit few-round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to few rounds)", and "most favorable result (special allocation result corresponding to high probability)". Specifically, in the first allocation table, of the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is allocated to "low probability result", "10 to 14" is allocated to "non-explicit few-round high probability result", "15 to 19" is allocated to "explicit few-round high probability result", and "20 to 29" is allocated to "most favorable result".

The second allocation table is a table that is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the reserve area Rb for the second result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning the lower operating port 26.
7B, the second allocation table allocates two allocation results, a "low probability result" and a "most favorable result." Specifically, in the second allocation table, of the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are allocated to the "low probability result," and "10 to 29" are allocated to the "most favorable result."

The respective allocation results differ in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win/lose lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed; (2) Support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed; (3) Opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 27 in the opening/closing execution mode.

First, the difference between the winning/losing lottery modes (1) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the win/loss lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."
The "non-explicit few-round high probability result,""explicit few-round high probability result," and "most favorable result" are allocation results in which the win/loss lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before the open/close execution mode ends. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This high frequency support mode transitions to the low frequency support mode when the number of times of play reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" is an allocation result that maintains the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode was the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode will continue at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."
The "high probability result with fewer rounds" and the "most favorable result" are allocation results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This high frequency support mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."

The differences in the manner in which the variable winning device 27 is controlled to open and close in the opening and closing execution mode (3) will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching a maximum value of 238.
The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserve area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the upper actuation port 25, and is stored in the reserve area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 44 when a gaming ball enters the lower actuation port 26.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the winning/losing lottery results in a "normal miss result" rather than a "jackpot win."
Specifically, when the win/loss lottery does not result in a "jackpot win" but in a "normal miss result," the MPU 42 compares the reach table with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display, and generates the reach display if the lottery determines that the reach display should be generated. The reach table is a table that stores random number values related to the generation of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 (see FIG. 4).

Here, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "most favorable result," the pattern display device 36 will stop and display, as the stop result, a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers on the valid line L. Also, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in a "low probability result," the pattern display device 36 will stop and display, as the stop result, a combination of symbols having the same even numbers on the valid line L. Furthermore, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result," or if the win/loss lottery results in a "special loss result" without a "jackpot win," the pattern display device 36 will stop and display, as the stop result, a combination of special symbols having different numbers (e.g., "3, 4, 1") that would not be selected in the case of a "normal loss result" in the win/loss lottery, rather than a combination of symbols having the same numbers.

The reach display occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 when a combination of symbols with the same numbers is finally displayed (when the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in a "most favorable result" or "low probability result"). Furthermore, the reach display does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 when a special combination of symbols is finally displayed (when the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in a "non-disclosed low-round high probability result" or "disclosed low-round high probability result" or the distribution lottery results in a "special loss result" without a "jackpot win").

The reach display mode is such that some of the multiple pattern sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 (for example, pattern sequence Z1 and pattern sequence Z3) are displayed stopped on the valid line L, thereby displaying the same pattern combination to suggest the stopping result, and in this state, the remaining pattern sequences (for example, pattern sequence Z2) are displayed in a variable manner.
Therefore, by generating a reach display, the pachinko machine 1 can make the player hope that after the variable display starts on the pattern display device 36 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player will have won the jackpot in the win/lose lottery and will have been allocated to a low probability result or a most favorable result in the allocation lottery.

The reach display format is not limited to this; some symbol rows may be displayed statically, while the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, with predetermined characters or the like displayed as animation in the background, or each symbol row may be displayed in a reduced size or hidden, with predetermined characters or the like displayed as animation across almost the entire display screen G.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has an expectation effect as a type of variable display on the symbol display device 36. An expectation effect is an effect that makes the player hopeful that they may have won the jackpot in the win/loss lottery after the variable display starts on the symbol display device 36 and before the specified stop result is displayed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of expectation effects: the reach display mentioned above and the preview display.

The advance notice display is an expected effect that makes it easier for an effect to occur when the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" or when the winning/losing lottery results in a "special miss" rather than a "jackpot win" than when the winning/losing lottery results in a "normal miss" rather than a "jackpot win." Instead of making the effect more likely to occur, this advance notice display may make it easier to select an effect with a low appearance rate, or these may be combined.
The lottery as to whether or not to generate a reach display is executed by the main control device 4, whereas the lottery as to whether or not to generate a preview display is executed by the audio and light emitting control device 5.

The mode of the advance notice display is such that, among the plurality of symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, all of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, a portion of the symbol sequences (for example, the symbol sequence Z1) is displayed stationary on the activated line L and then a plurality of symbol sequences (for example, the symbol sequences Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner, or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G. This advance notice display occurs both when a reach display is generated and when a reach display is not generated, but is set to occur more easily when a reach display is generated than when a reach display is not generated.
The preview display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, or the shape of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed.

Finally, we will explain the fluctuation type counter CS. The fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198, for example, by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching a maximum value of 198, it returns to 0.
The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and each time it is updated it is stored in the lottery counter buffer.
Then, based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer, the MPU 42 determines the display duration of the pattern on the main display unit 34 and the display duration of the pattern on the pattern display device 36. These display durations will be described in detail later.

<Regarding various processes executed by the main control device>
The MPU 42 of the main control device 4 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for progressing the game, as well as main processing that starts when the power is turned on. The timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described below in order.
In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 42 also executes NMI interrupt processing which is activated by input of a power outage signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 42 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105 as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes a read process for the multiple detection sensors 301-306. In this read process, the MPU 42 reads the status of the multiple detection sensors 301-306, determines the status, and stores it in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. If the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensors 301-304 corresponding to the various winning ports have detected the winning of a game ball, it sets a prize ball command for issuing a payout instruction for the prize balls and transmits this set command to the payout control device 46. For example, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the variable winning device 27 has detected the winning of a game ball, it transmits a prize ball command for issuing a payout instruction for the specific unit number of 15 prize balls to the payout control device 46.
In addition, the payout control device 46 performs payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command sent from the MPU 42.

In step S102, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the random number initial value counter CINI has reached its maximum value when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value, it clears the random number initial value counter CINI by returning it to 0.

In step S103, the MPU 42 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4 by adding 1 to each of them, and stores the updated values in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the MPU 42 clears the values of the counters C1 to C4 by resetting them to 0.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for through play. In this winning process for through play, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 306 corresponding to each through gate 31 has detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 42 stores the value of the electric role opening counter C4 updated in step S103 in the electric role reserve area 443. In addition, the MPU 42 sets a command for turning on the third reserve lamp unit 373 and transmits this set command to the sound and light emission control device 5.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the third reserve lamp unit 373 based on a command sent from the MPU 42. As described above, the maximum number of game balls that have entered each through gate 31 is four, and the third reserve lamp unit 373 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the operating port.
The winning process for the operating port will be explained in detail below.

<Winning process for operating port>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 42 executes steps S201 to S208 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 42 determines whether a game ball has entered the upper actuation port 25 (start entry) by determining whether the detection sensor 302 corresponding to the upper actuation port 25 has detected the entry of a game ball. If the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that a game ball has entered the upper actuation port 25, in step S202, it determines the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display holding area Ra and sets this reserved number as the first start reserve memory number RaN in a specified memory area in the first result display holding area Ra. The MPU 42 then executes the processing from step S205 onwards.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that a game ball has not entered the upper operating port 25, it determines in step S203 whether the detection sensor 303 corresponding to the lower operating port 26 has detected the entry of a game ball, thereby determining whether a game ball has entered the lower operating port 26 (initial entry).
If the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that a gaming ball has not entered the lower actuation port 26, it terminates the winning process for the actuation port. If the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that a gaming ball has entered the lower actuation port 26, it determines in step S204 the number of reserved balls stored in the second result display holding area Rb, and sets this reserved number as the second start reserved memory number RbN in a predetermined memory area in the second result display holding area Rb. The MPU 42 then executes the processes from step S205 onward.

After executing the processing of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 42 determines in step S205 whether the start-pending memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this reference embodiment).
If the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is not less than the upper limit, it ends the winning process for the operating port. Also, if the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit, it updates the value of the start pending memory number N by adding 1 to it in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 42 stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing as reserved information in the first free memory area in the result display section reserved area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the start reserved memory number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 42 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, it stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing as pending information in the first free memory area of the first result display unit reserve area Ra, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 42 sets the first start pending memory number RaN to "3" in step S202, it stores the pending information in the fourth area Ra4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206, which is "4".

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 42 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, it stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing as pending information in the first free memory area of the second result display unit reserve area Rb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 42 sets the second start pending memory number RbN to "3" in step S204, it stores the pending information in the fourth area Rb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206, which is "4."

In step S208, if the MPU 42 has set the first start hold memory number RaN in step S202, it sets a first hold generation command for recognizing that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, and transmits this set first hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This first hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25. The first hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 lights up the first reserved lamp unit 371 and executes a predetermined process based on the first reserved command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the upper operating port 25 is four, and the first reserved lamp unit 371 lights up the number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Also, in step S208, if the MPU 42 has set the second start hold memory number RbN in step S204, it sets a second hold generation command for recognizing that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, and transmits this set second hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This second hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the second result display section hold area Rb based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. The second hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 lights up the second reserved lamp unit 372 and executes a predetermined process based on the second reserved generation command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the lower actuation port 26 is four, and the second reserved lamp unit 372 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the normal process.
The MPU 42 executes a main process (described below) that starts when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is the main process for progressing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314, as shown in Figure 10. Specifically, the MPU 42 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at 4 msec intervals, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps depending on the determination result of step S308.

In step S301, the MPU 42 executes timer interrupt processing, prize-winning processing for the operating port, or external output processing for sending commands set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. In this external output processing, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a prize ball command has been set, and if it determines that a prize ball command has been set, sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 46. Also, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether a command for a presentation, such as a command corresponding to a presentation for a game round or a command corresponding to a presentation for the open/close execution mode, has been set, and if it determines that a command for a presentation has been set, sends the command for that presentation to the sound and light emission control device 5.

In step S302, the MPU 42 updates the fluctuation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a specified area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS, it clears the value of the fluctuation type counter CS by returning it to 0.

In step S303, the MPU 42 executes a game round control process for progressing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 42 executes a win/lose lottery and an allocation lottery, and also determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 36 and the main display unit 34.
In step S304, the MPU 42 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state. In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes a transition process to each game state such as an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode.
The game number control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 42 executes a demo display execution determination process. In this demo display execution determination process, the MPU 42 determines whether a predetermined start waiting period (e.g., 30 seconds) for starting a demo has elapsed after a game has ended without a new game being started, and if it determines that the start waiting period has elapsed, it sets a demo command for starting a demo display. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the demo command set in step S305 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command sent from the MPU 42.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 seconds and the interval between repeated executions of the process of step S305 is 4 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and determines that the start waiting period has elapsed when it reaches 7,500 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary; for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Furthermore, if a new game session is started while the MPU 42 is counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, the MPU 42 resets the count value.

In step S306, the MPU 42 executes an electric role support process to control the drive of the electric role 261 provided in the lower operating port 26. In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes an electric role release lottery based on the value of the electric role release counter C4 stored in the electric role reserve area 443 of the RAM 44, and if the electric role release lottery is won, executes the opening and closing process of the electric role 261. The MPU 42 also executes display control of the role display unit 35 to display the result of the electric role release lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 42 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 42 causes the power supply and launch control device 47 to execute launch control to launch a game ball based on the player's rotation of the launch handle 16. Specifically, the power supply and launch control device 47 causes the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 at a predetermined cycle (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a launch intensity that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 16. Furthermore, when predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply and launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 42 determines whether a power outage flag has been set in the power outage flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 44. This power outage flag is set in the RAM 44 when a power outage signal is input from the power outage monitoring board 45 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 42. The power outage monitoring board 45 outputs this power outage signal when it confirms the occurrence of a power outage. Note that this power outage flag is cleared the next time the main processing is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by assigning 1 to a predetermined area such as RAM 44, and clears various flags by assigning 0 to the flag. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets a power outage flag by assigning 1 to the power outage flag storage area of RAM 44, and clears the power outage flag by assigning 0 to the power outage flag storage area of RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is set, it executes power outage processing from step S312 onwards without executing processing from step S309 onwards. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 42 prohibits timer interrupt processing from occurring. In step S313, the MPU 42 calculates and saves a RAM judgment value (a checksum of RAM 44). In step S314, the MPU 42 prohibits access to RAM 44. Thereafter, the MPU 42 continues the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is not set, it determines in step S309 whether the timing has come to execute the next normal processing, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this reference embodiment) has elapsed since the current normal processing started.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is not yet time to execute the next normal process, that is, if remaining time has occurred, it updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S310 and updates the fluctuation type counter CS in step S311. Note that the MPU 42 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal processing, i.e., if there is no remaining time, it executes step S301 again to start the next normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main processing.
In the main processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 42 executes a startup process when the power is turned on. In this startup process, the MPU 42 waits for a predetermined time (e.g., about 500 msec) after the power is turned on to wait for the sub-side control board (e.g., the control board of the audio/light emitting control device 5) to become operable.

In step S402, the MPU 42 determines whether the permission/prohibition period of 1 second has elapsed. If the MPU 42 determines in step S402 that 1 second has not elapsed, it repeats the processing of step S402. If the MPU 42 determines in step S402 that 1 second has elapsed, it executes the processing from step S403 onwards.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether 1 second has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 second has elapsed when the count reaches 10,000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission/prohibition period is arbitrary; for example, the permission/prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 42 permits access to the RAM 44.
In step S404, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply/launch control device 47 is turned on.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, it executes the processes in and after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not on, it determines in step S405 whether a power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is not set, it executes the processes in and after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is set, it calculates a RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 42 determines whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal or not, thereby confirming the validity of the data stored in the RAM 44. Specifically, the MPU 42 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value saved in step S313 (processing during power outage) of the normal processing, and if they match, determines that the RAM determination value is normal, and if they do not match, determines that the RAM determination value is abnormal.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, it executes the processes in and after step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal, it clears the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44 in step S408.

The validity of the data stored in RAM 44 may be determined by a method other than checking the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, the validity of the data stored in RAM 44 may be confirmed by writing a keyword to a specified area of RAM 44 during power outage processing and then determining whether this keyword was written correctly during main processing.

As described above, if the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, if it determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is not set, or if it determines in step S407 that the RAM judgment value is not normal, it executes the processing from step S409 onwards.
Specifically, the MPU 42 clears the work area of the RAM 44 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 44 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, when the amusement facility opens for business, the manager of the amusement facility can initialize the data stored in RAM 44 by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the RAM erase switch. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 will initialize the data stored in RAM 44 if the power outage monitoring board 45 does not confirm the occurrence of a power outage or if the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the processing of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 42 sends an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the audio and light emission control device 5) in step S411, and in step S412 allows the timer interrupt processing to occur and proceeds to the normal processing described above.
In addition, by receiving the initial command sent in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 41 is proceeding normally and performs its own initialization.

<Game Play Control Processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game play control process.
In the game play control process, the MPU 42 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode. If the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 terminates the game round control process without executing the processes in step S502 and thereafter. Therefore, if the MPU 42 determines that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 does not start the game round regardless of whether or not the MPU 42 has detected the entry of a game ball into each of the actuation ports 25, 26.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not the device is in the opening and closing execution mode by referring to the opening and closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44. This also applies to the following processes. The MPU 42 sets the opening and closing execution mode flag when the device transitions to the opening and closing execution mode, and clears the opening and closing execution mode flag when the opening and closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, it determines in step S502 whether the main display unit 34 is displaying a variable value, i.e., whether a game is in progress.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 34 is not displaying a variable value, it executes processing for starting a game round in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 34 is performing a variable display, it executes the game round progression process in steps S506 to S509.

First, the game start processing of steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 42 determines the number of reserved items stored in the first result display area Ra and the number of reserved items stored in the second result display area Rb, and determines whether the total number CRN of these reserved items is equal to or less than 0. If the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is equal to or less than 0, it terminates the game play control process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not equal to or less than "0," it executes a data setting process in step S504 to set the reserved information stored in the first result display reserve area Ra or the second result display reserve area Rb for consumption of a game round. Thereafter, in step S505, the MPU 42 executes a fluctuation start process to start a variable display on the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36 to consume a game round, and ends the game round control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 42 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 42 determines whether the second start pending memory count RbN in the reserve area Rb for the second result display unit, which was set in step S204 of the winning process for the activation port, is equal to or less than 0. If the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory count RbN is equal to or less than 0, it executes data setting processing for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606, and if the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory count RbN is not equal to or less than 0, it executes data setting processing for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611.

In this way, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit for consumption of game rounds, and a data setting process for the second result display unit that sets the reserved information stored in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit for consumption of game rounds.
Then, if the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0," it executes the data setting process for the second result display unit without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. In other words, if the MPU 42 determines that there is pending information stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb based on the winning of a game ball through the lower actuation port 26, it preferentially sets the pending information stored in the second result display unit pending area Rb for consumption of game rounds, regardless of whether there is pending information stored in the first result display unit pending area Ra based on the winning of a game ball through the upper actuation port 25.

First, the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending memory number RaN in the first result display section pending area Ra to update it.
In step S603, the MPU 42 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display unit pending area Ra. This data shift process shifts the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 sequentially toward the first area Ra1. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display unit flag stored in RAM 44. This second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which main display unit 34, the first result display unit 341 or the second result display unit 342, is to start a variable display when a game round is completed. In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display unit flag, which indicates that when a game round is completed, the first result display unit 341 is to start a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25.

In step S606, the MPU 42 sets a first shift command for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the first shift command set in step S606 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5. This first shift command includes information for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed for the reserved information stored in the first result display unit reserved area Ra based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 changes the lighting state of the first reserve lamp unit 371 and also executes a predetermined process based on the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the sound and light emitting control device 5 reduces the number of lit first reserve lamp units 371 as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending memory number RbN in the second result display section pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 42 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display section pending area Rb. This data shift process shifts the pending information stored in each of areas Rb1 to Rb4 sequentially toward the first area Rb1. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the pending information in the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, the pending information in the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and the pending information in the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 44. In this step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display unit flag, which indicates that the second result display unit 342 will begin to display a variable value based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26 as a game round is played.

In step S611, the MPU 42 sets a second shift command for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed. Thereafter, the MPU 42 terminates the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the second shift command set in step S611 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5. This second shift command includes information for recognizing that a shift of reserved information has been executed for the reserved information stored in the second result display reserve area Rb based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 changes the lighting state of the second reserve lamp unit 372 and also executes a predetermined process based on the second shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later. Specifically, the sound and light emitting control device 5 reduces the number of lit second reserve lamp units 372 as the number of reserved game balls that have entered the lower actuation port 26 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process.
In the fluctuation start processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high probability mode, then in step S702 it reads out the win/loss table for the low probability mode (see Figure 6(a)) from the win/loss table memory area 431 of ROM 43, and if it determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, then in step S703 it reads out the win/loss table for the high probability mode (see Figure 6(b)) from the win/loss table memory area 431 of ROM 43.

After executing the processing of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 42 executes a win/lose determination process in step S704. In this win/lose determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result) by comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win/lose table read out in step S702 or step S703. As mentioned above, the win/lose result is either a "jackpot win," a "special loss result," or a "normal loss result," and this is the same whether the win/lose lottery mode is low probability mode or high probability mode.

In step S705, the MPU 42 determines whether the result determined in step S704 is a "jackpot win." If the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S706 onward; if the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S712 onward.

First, the process (the process from step S706 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 42 determines whether the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in RAM 44, this indicates that the first result display unit 341 will begin to display a variable value based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and therefore in step S707, the first allocation table (see Figure 7(a)) is read from the allocation table memory area 432 of ROM 43.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in RAM 44, this indicates that the second result display unit 342 will begin to display a variable value based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26, and therefore in step S708, the second allocation table (see Figure 7(b)) is read from the allocation table memory area 432 of ROM 43.

After executing the processing of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 42 executes the allocation determination process in step S709. In this allocation determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the allocation lottery (allocation result) by comparing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the allocation table read in step S707 or step S708.

In step S710, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for a jackpot result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be ultimately stopped and displayed in the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34 according to the allocation result determined in step S709, and stores the determined information in RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the pattern to be ultimately stopped and displayed in the main display section 34 by comparing the allocation result determined in step S709 with a stop result table for a jackpot result stored in advance in ROM 43. This stop result table for a jackpot result specifies different patterns to be stopped and displayed in the main display section 34 for each allocation result.

In step S711, the MPU 42 sets a flag corresponding to the allocation result determined in step S709 in the RAM 44. Specifically, if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result," it sets a low probability result flag; if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is an "unspecified low round high probability result," it sets a unspecified low round high probability result flag; if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is an "explicit low round high probability result," it sets a specified low round high probability result flag; and if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "most advantageous result," it sets a most advantageous result flag. Thereafter, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S716 onwards.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines the allocation result by referring to these flags.

Next, the process (the process from step S712 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result determined in step S704 is a "special losing result."
If MPU42 determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is a "special miss result," it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and if it determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is not a "special miss result," it executes the processing from step S715 onwards.

In step S713, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a special losing result. In this stop result setting process for a special losing result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed in the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and stores the determined information in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed in the main display section 34 by referring to a stop result table for a special losing result stored in advance in the ROM 43. The pattern of the symbols set in this stop result table for a special losing result is different from the pattern of the symbols set in the stop result table for a jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 42 sets a special loss flag in the RAM 44.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" by referring to this special losing flag.

In response to this, in step S715, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a normal loss result. In this stop result setting process for a normal loss result, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be ultimately displayed in the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and stores the determined information in RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the symbols to be ultimately displayed in the main display section 34 by referencing a stop result table for a normal loss result that is pre-stored in ROM 43. The pattern of symbols set in this stop result table for a normal loss result differs from the pattern of symbols set in the stop result table for a jackpot result and the stop result table for a special loss result.

After executing any one of the processes in steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 42 executes a process for setting the display duration (display duration period) in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 acquires the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 44 .

Furthermore, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a reach display will occur on the symbol display device 36. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will occur if the allocation result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most favorable result," or if the win/loss result determined in step S704 is a "normal loss result" and the reach occurrence lottery is won. As described above, the MPU 42 executes the reach occurrence lottery by comparing the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

When the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the reach table memory area 433 of the ROM 43, and sets the determined display duration in the display duration counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.
In contrast, when the MPU 42 determines that a reach display will not occur, it determines the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS obtained from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the display duration table for non-reach occurrence stored in the reach table memory area 433 of the ROM 43, and sets the determined display duration in the display duration counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.

Specifically, the display duration table for when reach does not occur is set so that the display duration shortens as the number of reserved items increases. Therefore, the display duration when the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 is consumed is set so that the display duration shortens as the number of reserved items related to the upper actuation port 25 increases. And the display duration when the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 is consumed is set so that the display duration shortens as the number of reserved items related to the lower actuation port 26 increases. Furthermore, the display duration table for when reach does not occur is set so that the display duration shortens when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode compared to when it is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of reserved items is the same, the display duration in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

The non-reach display duration table may be set to the opposite relationship to that described above, such that the display duration increases as the number of reserved items increases, or may be configured not to change depending on the number of reserved items or support mode. Separate display duration tables may also be set for the win/fail result and the allocation result.

In step S717, the MPU 42 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the variation command and type command set in step S717 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 executes a predetermined process based on the variation command and the type command sent from the MPU 42. This process will be described in detail later.

The variation command includes information regarding the display duration time, and does not include information regarding whether or not a reach display will occur.
As described above, the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence and the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach non-occurrence are different from each other.
Therefore, even if the information on whether or not a reach display will occur is not included in the variation command, it is possible for the audio and light emitting control device 5, which is the sub-control device, to determine whether or not a reach display will occur based on information related to the display duration. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information on whether or not a reach display will occur.

The type command includes information related to the win/loss result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the win/loss result, such as a "jackpot win," a "special loss result," and a "normal loss result." The type command also includes information related to the allocation result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the "low probability result,""non-explicit low round high probability result,""explicit low round high probability result," and "most advantageous result," such as information related to the allocation result.
In the following description, the win/loss result and the allocation result are collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 42 determines whether the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, and based on the determination result, starts a variable display on the main display unit 34. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the variable start process.
Specifically, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 44, this indicates that the first result display unit 341 should start displaying a changing value based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25 when a game round is played, and so the MPU 42 causes the first result display unit 341 to start displaying a changing value.
In contrast, when the MPU 42 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 44, this indicates that the second result display unit 342 should start displaying a changing value based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 when a game round is played, and so the MPU 42 starts displaying a changing value in the second result display unit 342.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process, the game round progression process in steps S506 to S509 will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 42 determines whether the main display unit 34 is displaying a changing image, and if it determines that the main display unit 34 is displaying a changing image, it executes processing for progressing the game round in steps S506 to S509.

In step S506, the MPU 42 determines whether the display duration time set in step S716 of the variation start processing has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the value set in the display duration time counter in RAM 44 has become "0" or less. Note that the value of this display duration time counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration time has not elapsed, it executes variable display processing in step S507. In this variable display processing, the MPU 42 updates the display on the main display unit 34 during the variable display. The MPU 42 then terminates the game play control processing.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed, it executes a variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 42 identifies information (information related to the image to be finally displayed as a stopped image on the main display unit 34) stored in the RAM 44 in any of steps S710, S713, and S715 of the variation start process executed when starting a variable display on the main display unit 34. Then, at the end of a game round, the MPU 42 executes display control on the main display unit 34 so that an image corresponding to this identified information is displayed on the main display unit 34 during the variable display.

Here, the image that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the gaming facility or the like can check the game result by visually checking the main display unit 34 at the end of a game round. This allows the manager of the gaming facility or the like to easily check whether or not fraudulent activity is being committed, for example, by attempting to make the pachinko machine 1 behave in the same way as if a jackpot had been won in a lottery.
Furthermore, the main display unit 34 has a smaller display area than the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, and the pictures displayed in a stopped state on the main display unit 34 are harder for the player to recognize than the sequence of symbols Z1 to Z3 displayed in a stopped state on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Therefore, when a round of play ends, the player will determine whether or not they have won a jackpot by checking the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 rather than the main display unit 34, which can increase the attention paid to the display screen G.

In step S509, the MPU 42 sets a fluctuation end command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the game number control processing.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 executes processing to end the presentation of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. Here, the sound and light emitting control device 5 may be configured to end the presentation of the game round independently without needing to receive the variation end command.

<Game status transition processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode.
If it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it executes the processes in step S802 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it executes the processes from step S811 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S802 onward) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable display has ended on the main display unit 34. If the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display unit 34 has not ended, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the winning/losing result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win" or a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the pass/fail result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in RAM 44 and then executes the processing from step S804 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result does not correspond to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/loss result is a "normal miss result"), it terminates the game state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," then in step S805 it sets "2" to the opening/closing counter SOC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter that allows the MPU 42 to determine the total number of times the large winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27 is opened and closed when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not a "special miss result," i.e., that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it determines in step S806 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is a low-round, high-probability result, then in step S807 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "2." Also, if the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is not a low-round, high-probability result, i.e., if it determines that the allocation result is a "low-probability result" or a "most advantageous result," then in step S808 it sets the round counter RC to "15." This round counter RC is a counter that the MPU 42 uses to determine the number of rounds of play when transitioning to the open/close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has multiple opening/closing execution modes with different termination conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds-defined mode to which it enters when the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," and a number-of-opening/closing-defined mode to which it enters when the win/loss result is a "special loss result."

The round count mode ends when a predetermined number of rounds have been played, where the number of rounds corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number-defined mode ends when the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or when a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 271. Here, the total number of times the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number-defined mode does not end when the number of rounds of play has been reached.

The pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening 271 once per round of play. One round of play continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again by meeting one of the following two conditions:
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of game balls entering the large prize slot 271 has reached a predetermined upper limit.

After executing any one of steps S805, S807, and S808, the MPU 42 sets "1000" as the opening wait time (wait period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 in step S809. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the opening wait time is 2 seconds. Note that the opening wait time is not limited to this and can be any value.

In this way, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets the waiting time for opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of game result. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player perceives them as similar. Also, for example, the waiting time for the opening may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result of a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" than for a game result other than these.

In step S810, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. The MPU 42 then terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information about the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the open/close execution mode based on the opening command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process, which will be described in detail later.

Next, the process (the process from step S811 onwards) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 42 executes the big prize opening/closing process.

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the big prize opening.
In the special prize opening opening/closing process, the MPU 42 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 42 determines whether the big prize opening 271 is open or not.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is not open, it executes the processing from step S902 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is open, it executes the processes from step S906 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S902 onward) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is not open will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, it terminates the big prize opening opening/closing process.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that at least one of the values of the opening/closing counter SOC and the round counter RC is not less than "0", it determines in step S903 whether the value of the timer counter T is less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the big prize opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes a process of opening the big prize opening in step S904.
The process of opening the big prize slot in step S904 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big prize opening process.
In the special prize opening process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1001 to S1007 as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning result is a "special losing result," it sets the winning counter PC in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "8" in step S1002, and sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003. As mentioned above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 seconds.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the winning result is not a "special losing result," it sets the winning counter PC to "8" in step S1004, and determines in step S1005 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is a high probability result in a small number of rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the allocation result is not a low-round high-probability result, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 42 executes the opening execution processing of the special prize opening 271 in step S1007. In this opening execution processing, the MPU 42 sets the opening/closing door 272 to an open state by executing drive control of the variable prize opening drive unit 273. The MPU 42 then terminates the special prize opening opening processing.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 specifies the upper limit on the total number of game balls that can enter the large winning slot 271. In this embodiment, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to the same value ("8" in this embodiment) when it determines in step S1001 that the winning result is a "special losing result" and when it determines that the winning result is not a "special losing result," but different values may also be set in the winning counter PC.

The value set in timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 also specifies the maximum duration time from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 42 sets two different maximum duration times by setting timer counter T to "85" or "15,000." Specifically, the MPU 42 sets a long-term mode (long-term mode) in which the maximum duration time is set to 30 seconds, and a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the maximum duration time is set to 0.17 seconds, which is shorter than the long-term mode.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 excites the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds, thereby causing the game ball launching mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Also, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to "8", thereby setting the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 271 to eight.
Therefore, since the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the game ball launch period, it is easy to get the upper limit of eight game balls to enter the large prize opening 271.
In contrast, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls that can enter the large prize opening 271 and the game ball launch cycle (more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle), so it is difficult to get a game ball to enter the large prize opening 271. However, depending on the timing, it is possible to get about one game ball to enter the large prize opening 271.

Returning to the explanation of the big prize opening/closing process, the process from step S905 onwards will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the special prize opening process in step S904, the MPU 42 sets an opening command in step S905. Furthermore, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S905 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the special prize opening opening and closing process.
Based on the open command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the open state, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process from step S906 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is open will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than 0. That is, the MPU 42 determines whether the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the special prize opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S907.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S918.

First, the process (the process from step S907 onwards) when it is determined in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" by the MPU 42 will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a prize has been won in the special prize opening 271. The determination of whether or not a prize has been won in the special prize opening 271 is made based on the detection result of the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the special prize opening 271.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that no win has occurred in the special prize opening 271, it ends the special prize opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that a win has occurred in the big win slot 271, it updates the value of the win counter PC by subtracting 1 from the value in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the prize counter PC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the prize counter PC is not equal to or less than "0", it ends the big prize opening opening process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0," it executes a closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 273 to set the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state.

In step S911, the MPU 42 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the close command set in step S911 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
Based on the close command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 272 has been set to the closed state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S913 onwards.
In step S913, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value.

In step S914, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0," then in step S915, the MPU 42 sets the value of the timer counter T to "500." Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 specifies the open waiting time from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state, to when it is set to the closed state and then when it is set to the open state again. In this reference embodiment, the open waiting time is 1 second. This open waiting time is the same regardless of the type or progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes in and after step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 42 sets "2000" in the timer counter T as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. As described above, the value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and can be any value.

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, as with the waiting time for the opening, i.e., the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player perceives them as similar. Also, for example, the waiting time for the ending may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result of a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" than for a game result other than these.

In step S917, the MPU 42 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the big prize opening opening and closing processing.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the end of the opening and closing execution mode based on the ending command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, the process (the process from step S918 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 42 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 42 sets a close command in the same manner as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the result is not a "special miss result," that is, if it determines that the result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S921 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," it executes the processing from step S923 onwards.

First, the process (processing from step S921 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the winning/losing result is not a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 42 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC.

In step S922, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-mentioned processing from S916 onwards.

Next, the processing (processing from step S923 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S912 or step S920 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result" will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the open/close counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0", it executes the above-described processing from S916 onwards.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process, the process from step S812 onwards will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the large prize opening/closing process in step S811, the MPU 42 determines in step S812 whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", then in step S813 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0," then in step S814, it clears the open/close execution mode in progress flag stored in the RAM 44, and then executes transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition processing.
The transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends will be described in detail below.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.
In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 executes steps S1101 to S1112 as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result," it executes the processing from step S1102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high-probability result," it executes the processing from step S1105 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S1102 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicitly few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1103, the MPU 42 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 44.
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In step S1104, the MPU 42 sets the high probability mode flag in RAM 44. If the high probability mode flag is already set in RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/loss lottery mode to high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win." The MPU 42 then ends the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode.

When the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed, the MPU 42 clears the flags set in RAM 44 according to the allocation results (low probability result flag, non-explicit few rounds high probability result flag, explicit few rounds high probability result flag, and most favorable result flag) and the special loss flag. Also, in step S701 of the aforementioned fluctuation start process, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in RAM 44.

Next, the processing (processing from step S1105 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the allocation result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few-round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1105, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1106 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1108 onwards.

First, the process (processing from step S1106 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is an "unspecified few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 42 determines whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44, it executes the processes from step S1103 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 44, it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 44 in step S1107. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/loss lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win." Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the processing (processing from step S1108 onwards) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the allocation result is not an "unspecified few rounds high probability result" will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 42 determines whether the allocation result is a "low probability result."

If MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the allocation result is not a "low probability result" (if it determines that the win/loss result is a "special loss result"), it terminates the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the allocation result is a "low probability result," it executes the processes from step S1109 onwards.

In step S1109, the MPU 42 clears the high-probability mode flag. This causes the MPU 42 to set the win/loss lottery mode to low-probability mode. This low-probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result becomes anything other than a "low-probability result."

In step S1110, the MPU 42 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1111, the MPU 42 sets the value of the number of games counter provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "100".
In step S1112, the MPU 42 sets the number of times limit flag in the RAM 44. If the number of times limit flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number of times limit flag is set, the high frequency support mode continues until 100 games have been played, which is the termination reference number set in the game number counter. When 100 games have been played, the MPU 42 clears the high frequency support flag and the number of times limit flag. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 42 executes these processes as electric support processes in step S306 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is a "most favorable result" or a "high probability result with an explicit few rounds," the game state will transition to high probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., the round count specified mode) regardless of the current game state. The high probability mode and high frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

Also, if the current support mode is high-frequency support mode and the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win," and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is an "unspecified few-round high-probability result," the game state will transition to high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., the round-number-specified mode). The high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In contrast, if the current support mode is low-frequency support mode and the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win," and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is an "unspecified few-round high-probability result," the game state will transition to high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., round-number-specified mode). The high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."

In addition, if the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation result in the allocation lottery is a "low probability result," the game state will transition to low probability mode and high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode (i.e., round count mode) regardless of the current game state. Low probability mode will continue at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win," and high frequency support mode will transition to low frequency support mode if 100 game rounds have been played without a "jackpot win" in the win/loss lottery.

In addition, if the result of the lottery is not a "jackpot win," that is, if the result of the lottery is a "special miss" or "normal miss," the game state will not change.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
19, the audio and light emission control device 5 includes an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. The MPU 52 is an element that combines the ROM 53 and the RAM 54 as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like, all on one chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed, and requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 54 has various areas, such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543. These areas will be described in detail later.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main control device 4 .
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits the commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.

Figure 20 shows the contents of the sub-side hold information storage area.
As shown in Figure 20, the sub-side reservation information storage area 543 has a first sub-side reservation area SRa, a second sub-side reservation area SRb, and an execution area SAE.

The first sub-side hold area SRa, provided as the first sub-side acquired information storage means, comprises four storage areas: first area SRa1 to fourth area SRa4. Each of areas SRa1 to SRa4 has a storage capacity large enough to store normal hold information for generating a normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold. The normal hold information for generating a normal hold and the advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores normal hold information or advance hold information as sub-side hold information in each area SRa1 to SRa4 in chronological order in response to the reception of the first hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the first hold generation command sent from the MPU 42, it stores the sub-side hold information in chronological order in the first area SRa1 → second area SRa2 → third area SRa3 → fourth area SRa4.

As such, the first sub-side reserve area SRa has four memory areas, so up to four pieces of sub-side reserve information based on the first reserve generation command can be reserved. The first sub-side reserve area SRa also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved items stored in each of areas SRa1 to SRa4.

The second sub-side hold area SRb, which is provided as the second sub-side acquired information storage means, has four storage areas: a first area SRb1 to a fourth area SRb4. Each of areas SRb1 to SRb4 has a storage capacity large enough to store normal hold information for generating a normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold. The normal hold information for generating a normal hold and the advance notice hold information for generating an advance notice hold will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores normal hold information or advance hold information as sub-side hold information in each of areas SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in response to the reception of the second hold generation command. Specifically, when the MPU 52 receives the second hold generation command sent from the MPU 42, it stores the sub-side hold information in chronological order in the first area SRb1 → second area SRb2 → third area SRb3 → fourth area SRb4.

As such, the second sub-side reserve area SRb has four memory areas, so up to four pieces of sub-side reserve information based on the second reserve generation command can be reserved. The second sub-side reserve area SRb also has a memory area for writing the number of reserved items stored in each of areas SRb1 to SRb4.

The execution area SAE is an area for moving the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa or the second sub-side reserved area SRb when starting the variable display of the pattern display device 36.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device.
21, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video RAM 67. The MPU 62 is a chip-integrated device that includes not only the program ROM 63 and the work RAM 64, but also a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. The MPU 62, VDP 65, character ROM 66, and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes the commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 5 and performs predetermined calculations based on these commands to control the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 controls the VDP 65 by generating commands for the VDP 65.

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information.

The VDP 65 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 36. Because the VDP 65 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual function is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. Based on the contents of the commands generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs to be displayed on the design display device 36. The character ROM 66 stores bitmap image data of various designs, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 36, and the display contents of the pattern display device 36 can be changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 67.

The video RAM 67 includes a development buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69 .
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates one frame of drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. Note that one frame of drawing data refers to data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Here, the frame buffer 69 has multiple frame areas 691 and 692. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 has a first frame area 691 and a second frame area 692.

Each frame area 691, 692 is set to a capacity sufficient to store one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each frame area 691, 692 includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to the dots (pixels) of the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a memory capacity sufficient to store data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, each unit area uses a full-color system, allowing 256 colors to be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each RGB color, for a total memory capacity of at least 3 bytes.

While drawing data created in one frame area (e.g., first frame area 691) is being used to draw on the pattern display device 36, the VDP 65 creates the next drawing data to be used in the other frame area (e.g., second frame area 692). In other words, the frame buffer 69 employs a double-buffer system.

The VDP 65 also generates image signals corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and outputs the image signals to the pattern display device 36. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691, 692 to be output. The VDP 65 converts this drawing data into gradation data by adjusting the resolution using a scaler (not shown) so that it corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36. The VDP 65 then generates image signals corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the gradation data, and outputs the image signals to the pattern display device 36.

<Regarding timer interrupt processing executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the audio and light emission control device.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a timer interrupt process to progress the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2001 to S2006 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 52 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 52 receives a command from the MPU 42, it stores the command in the RAM 54. Specifically, the RAM 54 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands sent from the MPU 42, and the MPU 52 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order in which they were sent from the MPU 42. The MPU 52 reads the commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they were stored.

In step S2002, the MPU 52 executes a reservation determination process based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the reservation determination process, the MPU 52 determines the occurrence of a reservation symbol, the shift of a reservation symbol, etc. This reservation determination process will be described in detail later.
In step S2003, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining effects based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the process for determining effects, the MPU 52 determines effects for the game round, effects for the open/close execution mode, etc. This process for determining effects will be described in detail later.
In step S2004, the MPU 52 executes a performance execution process based on the contents of the hold determination process in step S2002 and the performance determination process in step S2003. Specifically, in the performance execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and executes audio control of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2005, the MPU 52 executes a demo display execution process based on the demo command sent from the MPU 42. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 52 executes a demo display when a predetermined waiting period for starting a demo (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after a game has ended without a new game being started. Specifically, in the demo display execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control for the various lamp units 124 and audio control for the speaker unit 125.

In step S2006, a command transmission process is executed to transmit the commands set in the hold determination process in step S2002 and the effect determination process in step S2003 to the display control device 6. In this command transmission process, the MPU 52 determines whether it is time to transmit the various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 to the display control device 6, and if it determines that it is time to transmit the various commands to the display control device 6, it transmits the commands to the display control device 6. The MPU 52 then terminates the timer interrupt process.

<Regarding the hold determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating the hold determination process.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a reservation determination process to generate a reservation pattern, shift the reservation pattern, etc. In this reservation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2101 to S2104 as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a hold generation command (first hold generation command or second hold generation command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that it has not received a hold generation command, it executes the processes in and after step S2103.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that it has received a hold generation command, it executes a hold generation process in step S2102. In this hold generation process, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command. This hold generation process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S2102, or if it is determined in step S2101 that a hold generation command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2103 and onward.
In step S2103, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a pending shift command (first shift command or second shift command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that the hold shift command has not been received, it ends the hold determination process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that it has received a hold shift command, it executes hold shift processing in step S2104. In this hold shift processing, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold shift command. This hold shift processing will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the hold occurrence processing.

<Holding process>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the reservation generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 as shown in Fig. 24. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first hold generation command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S2202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. Thereafter, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onward.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S2203 it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb and sets that number as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 in step S2204.

In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for advance notice reservation. In this lottery process for advance notice reservation, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not advance notice reservation will occur.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, the advance notice hold is a hold that executes an advance notice display that changes the type of reserved image, etc., to notify the player of the expected degree of the hold, or an advance notice display that generates a pre-reading effect to notify the player of the expected degree of the hold by utilizing the effect of the number of games based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold.

The advance notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, returns to 0. The advance notice pending occurrence counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a advance notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation lottery was won in step S2205 (whether or not an advance notice reservation should be made).
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of the above-mentioned step S2004.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first available storage area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side reserve area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208. In this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes processing to generate a normal hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution processing of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

After executing the advance hold generation process of step S2207 or the normal hold generation process of step S2208, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. The MPU 52 then stores the hold display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the hold display generation command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of a notice hold or a normal hold on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the notice hold image or normal hold image on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or normal hold.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the reserved shift process.
As described above, the MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes the hold shift process in step S2104 of the hold determination process. In this hold shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2301 to S2308 as shown in Fig. 25. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold area based on the contents of the hold shift command.

In step S2301, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2301 that it has received a first shift command, it executes data setting processing for the first sub-side reserve area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304, and if it determines in step S2301 that it has not received a first shift command (if it determines that it has received a second shift command), it executes data setting processing for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307.

First, the data setting process for the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304 will be described.
In step S2302, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in the first sub-side pending area SRa to update it.
In step S2303, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S2304, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 sequentially to the first area SRa1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRa4 to the third area SRa3.

Next, the data setting process for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307 will be described.
In step S2305, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in the second sub-side pending area SRb to update it.
In step S2306, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reservation information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S2307, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side reserved area SRb. This data shift process sequentially shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 to the first area SRb1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRb4 to the third area SRb3.

After executing the processing of step S2304 or step S2307, the MPU 52 sets a hold display shift command in step S2308. Then, the MPU 52 stores the hold display shift command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the hold display shift command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display shift command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the display screen G.

FIG. 26 shows the preview reserved pattern and the normal reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in Figure 26, the MPU 62 displays on the display screen G pedestals B11 to B14 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa, pedestals B21 to B24 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and an execution pedestal AB provided between pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE.

The first holding lamp unit 371 is provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa. On the other hand, the bases B11 to B14 are provided from right to left to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa.
The second holding lamp units 372 are provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb. Similarly, the bases B21 to B24 are provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb.

The bases B11 to B14, the bases B21 to B24, and the execution base AB notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or a normal hold by placing a notice hold pattern or a normal hold pattern thereon.
Specifically, when MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance hold image, on the bases B11 to B14.

In addition, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white spherical image, which is a normal hold image, on the bases B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance hold image, on the bases B21 to B24.

Furthermore, when the MPU 62 determines that normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the execution base AB.
When the MPU 62 determines that advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, it places a flashing white sphere pattern, which is an advance notice hold pattern, on the execution base AB.

26, the MPU 62 places regular reserved symbols on the bases B11 and B12, places a notice reserved symbol on the base B13, and places a regular reserved symbol on the execution base AB. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 places a regular reserved symbol on the base B21. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 does not place symbols on the bases B14, B22 to B24.
In this embodiment, the images of the normal hold and the notice hold are different from each other, but they may be the same. Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the bases B11 to B14, the bases B21 to B24, and the execution base AB on the display screen G, but it is not necessary to display each base on the display screen G.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a performance determination process to execute a performance for a game round, a performance for an open/close execution mode, etc. In this performance determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in FIG.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42 have been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has not received any command, it executes the processes in and after step S2409.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has received each command, it determines in step S2402 whether the game result is a ``most advantageous result'' or a ``low probability result'' based on the content of the type command.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the gaming result is a "most advantageous result" or a "low probability result," it executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of gaming result in step S2403. In this symbol determination process, if the MPU 52 determines that the gaming result is a "most advantageous result," it determines information regarding a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally displayed on the active line L; if the MPU 52 determines that the gaming result is a "low probability result," it determines information regarding a combination of symbols having the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally displayed on the active line L. Note that the odd and even numbers are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result," then in step S2404 it determines whether the game result is a "normal miss result" or not based on the content of the type command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is not a "normal loss result," i.e., if the game result is one of a "special loss result," a "non-indicated low-round high-probability result," or a "indicated low-round high-probability result," it executes a common symbol determination process in step S2405. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information regarding a special symbol combination as the stop result to be ultimately displayed on the pay line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 determines a special symbol combination (e.g., "3, 4, 1") having different numbers that would not be selected in the case of a "normal loss result" in the lottery, rather than a symbol combination having the same number. Note that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is a "normal miss result," it executes a pattern determination process for a normal miss in step S2406. In this pattern determination process for a normal miss, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information relating to the combination of symbols in the reach display as a stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L. The combination of symbols in the reach display is determined randomly by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will not occur, it determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the combinations of symbols described above as a stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines, by lottery or the like, a combination of symbols different from any of a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols in a reach display.

After executing any one of the processes in step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern in step S2407. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to display a preview.

In addition, based on the selected effect pattern, the MPU 52 performs the effect execution process of step S2004 described above, in which it controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and also controls the sound of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command that includes information related to the stop result determined in any one of the processes in steps S2403, S2405, and S2406. The MPU 52 then stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. These fluctuation start command and the stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 36 based on the variable display start command and stop result command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 starts the variable display and then finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the active line L.

After executing the process of step S2408, or if it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2409 and subsequent steps.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether or not an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processes in and after step S2413.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that an opening command has been received, then in step S2410 it determines the type of game result based on the contents of the opening command.

In step S2411, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining an effect for the open/close execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2410. In the process for determining an effect for the open/close execution mode, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2410 that the game result is a "special miss result" or a "non-expressed few-round high-probability result," it selects effect A as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "expressed few-round high-probability result," it selects effect B as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "most advantageous result," it selects effect C or effect D as the effect for the open/close execution mode. Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "low-probability result," it selects effect D as the effect for the open/close execution mode.
The duration of effects A and B corresponds to the time required to open and close the large prize opening 271 twice in a short time in the opening and closing execution mode. The duration of effects C and D corresponds to the time required to open and close the large prize opening 271 15 times in a long time in the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, based on the selection result of effects A to D, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 during the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S2412, the MPU 52 sets an open/close execution mode command that includes information related to the effects for the open/close execution mode selected in step S2411. The MPU 52 then stores the open/close execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This open/close execution mode command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the open/close execution mode command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the open/close execution mode effect on the pattern display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the open/close execution mode effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the process of step S2412, or if it is determined in step S2409 that an opening command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2413 and subsequent steps.
In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processing. In the other processing, the MPU 52 executes processing for progressing the effects for the open/close execution mode, for example, based on the open command, close command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 42. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the effect determination processing.

<Relationship between game results and game status, etc.>
The relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be explained below.
Fig. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states, etc. Specifically, Fig. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results excluding "normal miss results" and game states, etc., with game results arranged in columns and game states, etc. arranged in rows.
As shown in Figure 28, the pachinko machine 1 has, as game results excluding the "normal miss result", the win/loss results of the "jackpot win" and the "special miss result", and the allocation results of the "non-explicit low-round high-probability result", the "explicit low-round high-probability result", the "most advantageous result", and the "low-probability result".

Here, the "special losing result" is the game result that is selected when the winning/losing lottery does not result in a "jackpot win" (symbol × in the figure), as shown in the second column of the table in Figure 28. Also, the allocation result is the game result that is selected when the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" (symbol ○ in the figure).
The following describes the relationship between game results, excluding "normal miss results," and game states, etc. In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the relationship between game results and game states, etc. as follows, but the combinations of game results and game states, etc., the content of game results, and the content of game states, etc. are arbitrary.

In the "special losing result", the opening/closing execution mode is switched to the opening/closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening and closing of the big prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. Also, in the "special losing result", the winning/losing lottery mode is not switched.
In the "non-disclosed few rounds high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number specified mode in which rounds are played with a maximum of two times, and the opening/closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short time. Also, in the "non-disclosed few rounds high probability result", the winning/losing lottery mode shifts to a high probability mode.
In this way, although the "special miss result" and the "non-disclosed short round high probability result" have different types of opening and closing execution modes, they have in common that the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in the case of a "special miss result" or an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", the stop result will be a special combination of symbols, and the effect for the open/close execution mode will be effect A. Furthermore, in the case of a "special miss result" or an "unspecified few rounds high probability result", the support mode will not be switched to. Furthermore, in the game round after the open/close execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 will not display an image on the display screen G indicating that it is in the high probability mode.

Therefore, by checking the stop result or the effects for the open/close execution mode, the player cannot know whether the game result is a "special miss result" or a "non-disclosed few-round high probability result." In other words, even if the allocation lottery results in a "non-disclosed few-round high probability result" and the game transitions to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 36 will disguise the game as if the game had not transitioned to the win/lose lottery mode in the game round after the open/close execution mode ends.
Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game while predicting whether or not the win/lose lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the opening/closing execution mode transitions to a round number specified mode in which round play is played with a maximum of two times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the win/lose lottery mode transitions to a high probability mode. Also, in the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the stopping result is a special combination of symbols, and the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode is Presentation B. Also, in the "expressed few rounds high probability result", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 displays an image on the display screen G indicating that it is in the high probability mode.
Therefore, by checking the stop result and the effects for the opening and closing execution mode, the player can understand that the game result is an "explicit few-round high-probability result."

In the case of the "most favorable result" and the "low probability result", the opening and closing execution mode switches to a round number specified mode in which rounds of play are played with a maximum of 15 times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long-term manner.
Here, in the "most favorable result," the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers, the win/lose lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the presentation for the open/close execution mode becomes presentation C or presentation D. Specifically, if the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers, the presentation for the open/close execution mode becomes presentation C, and if the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same even numbers, the presentation for the open/close execution mode becomes presentation D.
Furthermore, in the case of a "low probability result," the stopping result will be a combination of symbols having the same even numbers, the winning/losing lottery mode will shift to a low probability mode, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode will be effect D. Furthermore, in the case of a "most advantageous result" and a "low probability result," the support mode will shift to a high frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the stopped result is a combination of symbols with the same odd number and the effect for the open/close execution mode is effect C, the player can tell that the game result is the "most advantageous result." However, if the stopped result is a combination of symbols with the same even number, the player cannot tell whether the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" by checking the stopped result or the effect for the open/close execution mode.

Then, in the game round after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the final effect for the opening and closing execution mode is effect D, the symbol display device 36 will not display an image on the display screen G indicating that it is a high probability mode.

Specifically, the symbol display device 36 does not display an image on the display screen G clearly indicating that the high probability mode is in effect, but instead displays an image on the display screen G informing players that the high frequency support mode will transition to low frequency support mode when the number of play times reaches a reference number for ending the mode (specifically, 100 play times). In other words, even if the allocation lottery results in the "most advantageous result," the symbol display device 36 will disguise the game result as a "low probability result" in the play times after the end of the open/close execution mode if the final effect for the open/close execution mode is effect D.

If the allocation result is the "most favorable result," the symbol display device 36 will not result in a "jackpot win" in the win/lose lottery, and after 100 games have been played, will display an image on the display screen G indicating that the game is in high probability mode. In other words, the symbol display device 36 will cancel the disguise that was applied, making it appear as if the game result was a "low probability result."

[Modification of the Reference Embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, but includes modifications and improvements within the scope of achieving the object of the present invention.
(1) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the jackpot opening 271 once per round of play. However, the pachinko machine 1 may open and close the jackpot opening 271 multiple times per round of play.
(2) In this reference embodiment, after the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed or when the total number of game balls entering the large prize opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit number. In contrast, for example, the upper limit number may be varied depending on the upper limit duration, and the condition for setting the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again is arbitrary.

(3) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to an open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state again when the total number of game balls entering the large prize opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit of eight. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the upper limit to any number other than eight. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set a different upper limit depending on the allocation results. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set a different upper limit for each round during one opening/closing execution mode.

(4) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again when the total number of game balls entering the special prize opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to include an end trigger opening that sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state when a game ball enters the special prize opening, and to allow a ball to enter the end trigger opening after a predetermined time has elapsed.
(5) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the door 272 to the open state, and then sets the door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the door 272 to the open state, and then set the door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined time has elapsed since a prize was won in the special prize opening 271.

(6) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the door 272 to the open state, and then sets the door 272 to the closed state again. In contrast, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the door 272 to the open state, and then proceed to the next round of play without setting the door 272 to the closed state again.
(7) In the present embodiment, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set to be shorter than the ball launch cycle. In contrast, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode may be set to be equal to or longer than the ball launch cycle, but equal to or shorter than n times the ball launch cycle (n = 1, 2, or 3).

(8) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 had two types of opening/closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 had an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is played twice with a short-time upper limit duration, and an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is played 15 times with a long-time upper limit duration. In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 may have opening/closing execution modes that differ in the type of upper limit duration or the number of times round games are played. Furthermore, instead of being configured to set multiple types of opening/closing execution modes by varying the type of upper limit duration, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to set multiple types of opening/closing execution modes by varying the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 272, such as half open or fully open. Furthermore, the type of upper limit duration may be set so that although it appears to the player to be the same, the exact upper limit duration is different.

(9) In this reference embodiment, the game results and the effects for the open/close execution mode were preset to correspond one-to-one. In contrast, for example, the effects for the open/close execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from multiple types of effects without corresponding to the game results, or may be set by selecting from multiple types of effects by lottery or the selection rate may vary depending on the game results.

(10) In this reference form, when the game result is either a "special losing result," "non-disclosed low-round high-probability result," or "disclosed low-round high-probability result," the MPU 52 determines information related to a special symbol combination as the stop result to be finally displayed on the pay line L, and this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result. Alternatively, the MPU 52 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result, making it difficult for the player to determine which game result it is.

(11) In this embodiment, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 to determine whether a jackpot occurs, and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs. Alternatively, the MPU 42 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 does not need to be provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44.

(12) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of loss results: a "special loss result" and a "normal loss result." The MPU 42 executes the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot by comparing a win/lose table that stores the value of a random number that will result in a jackpot with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442. In other words, the MPU 42 executes the lottery for the "special loss result" by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Alternatively, the MPU 42 may execute the lottery for the "special loss result" by using a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 that is provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to execute the lottery for the "special loss result."

(13) In this reference form, in a gaming state in which the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, there are two random number values that result in a "special missing result," and in a gaming state in which the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced when drawing the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, there is one random number value that results in a "special missing result." In other words, the probability of a "special missing result" is set to be higher in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode. In contrast, the probability of a "special missing result" may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, or may be set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Furthermore, the probability of a "special missing result" may be set to be zero in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 creates advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by setting the win/lose lottery mode and the support mode. However, it may also create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by setting game states other than these. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game plays for which the high-frequency support mode continues after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by determining whether or not to transition to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player by varying the number of game plays for which the high-probability mode continues after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

(15) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 stores the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 in the first result display reserve area Ra and stores the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 in the second result display reserve area Rb, thereby separately storing the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 and the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26. In contrast, the pachinko machine 1 may store the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 and the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 together.
(16) In this embodiment, the MPU 42 preferentially sets the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 for consumption of game times regardless of whether there is reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25. In contrast, the MPU 42 may set the reserved information related to the upper actuation port 25 and the reserved information related to the lower actuation port 26 for consumption of game times in the order in which the reserved information is awarded.

(17) In this embodiment, the main control device 4 transmits a command to the audio and light emitting control device 5, and the audio and light emitting control device 5 transmits a command resulting from analyzing the command to the display control device 6, thereby controlling the display control device 6. Alternatively, the main control device 4 may transmit a command to the display control device 6, and the display control device 6 may transmit a command resulting from analyzing the command to the audio and light emitting control device 5, thereby controlling the audio and light emitting control device 5. Note that the commands transmitted from the main control device 4 to the audio and light emitting control device 5 and the commands transmitted from the audio and light emitting control device 5 to the display control device 6 are not limited to the commands described in this embodiment and are arbitrary.
(18) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control device 4, the sound and light emitting control device 5, and the display control device 6 as separate control devices. However, for example, the sound and light emitting control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be included as the same control device, or at least one of the sound and light emitting control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be included as the same control device as the main control device 4.

(19) In this embodiment, the symbol display device 36 executes a game round effect on the display screen G by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on a winning combination in the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, thereby starting a variable symbol display. However, the game round effect is not limited to the effect described in this embodiment and is optional. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a game round effect by combining and operating the symbol display device 36 with a movable decorative member provided on the game board 2. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a game round effect by combining and operating the symbol display device 36 with a light-emitting means provided on the game board 2. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may execute a game round effect by combining and operating these decorative members and light-emitting means with the symbol display device 36.

(20) In this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 executes an internal lottery (win/lose lottery and allocation lottery) based on a winning entry into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, and then the main display unit 34 and the pattern display device 36 execute a variable display and, as a result of stopping the variable display, display the result of the internal lottery executed based on a winning entry into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. In contrast, for example, the main display unit 34 and the pattern display device 36 may start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and, as a result of stopping the variable display, display the result of the internal lottery executed after starting the variable display. In this case, after starting the variable display and before stopping the variable display, the internal lottery is executed and the stop result, etc. are set.

(21) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main display unit 34, which executes the variable display of the images and displays the result of the internal lottery as the result of the variable display stopping. In contrast, for example, the main display unit 34 may display the same stop result as the result of the variable display stopping, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, or may display the stop result randomly so that the result of the internal lottery cannot be identified. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may not be equipped with a main display unit 34.

(22) In this reference embodiment, the pattern display device 36 executes a game round effect on the display screen G by periodically scrolling the patterns in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on a winning entry into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, thereby starting a variable display of the patterns. In contrast, the pattern display device 36 may execute a game round effect on the display screen G by displaying a pattern (picture) that clearly indicates the result of an internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 36 may set a predetermined area in at least one of an area smaller than the area displaying the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 and an area on the periphery of the area displaying the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3, and when the variable display of the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is stopped, a symbol indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbol displayed in this predetermined area may be variable or may be hidden while the variable display of the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is in progress.

The symbols displayed in the designated area may use letters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for players to distinguish, or a combination of these. Furthermore, even if the letters, colors, or patterns are not difficult for players to distinguish, similar symbols or combinations of similar symbols may be used to make the symbols difficult for players to distinguish. This allows the gaming center manager, for example, to easily check whether fraudulent activity is occurring by visually checking the symbol display device 36, without visually checking the main display unit 34, at the end of a round of play, in an attempt to make the pachinko machine 1 behave in the same way as if it had won a jackpot lottery.

(23) In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to operate independently, but it may also be configured to send and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. For example, the gaming machine may be configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like on the gaming machine, and the optical code information can be captured and read by a camera on a mobile phone or the like, and then accessed to a website, thereby transmitting gaming machine information to a web server. The gaming machine may also be configured so that information from a web server can be received by a player operating a button or the like on the gaming machine to enter a password issued by accessing a website into the gaming machine.

(24) In this embodiment, a pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a type of pachinko machine different from pachinko machine 1. For example, the gaming machine of the present invention may be a pachinko machine that releases an electric device a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area, or a pachinko machine that generates the right to win a jackpot when a gaming ball enters a specific area. Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of gaming machine, such as an arrange ball machine or a mahjong ball machine.

[Reference form A]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment A of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device>
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device according to embodiment A of the present invention.
29, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 that constitute the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video RAM 67. The MPU 62 is a chip-integrated device that includes not only the program ROM 63 and the work RAM 64, but also a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. The MPU 62, VDP 65, character ROM 66, and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes the commands sent from the audio and light emission control device 5 and performs predetermined calculations based on these commands to control the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 controls the VDP 65 by generating commands for the VDP 65.

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information.

The VDP 65 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 36. Because the VDP 65 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual function is like a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. Based on the contents of the commands generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as designs to be displayed on the design display device 36. The character ROM 66 stores bitmap image data of various designs, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the color to be displayed for each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 36, and the display contents of the pattern display device 36 can be changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 67.

The video RAM 67 includes a development buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69 .
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates one frame of drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. Note that one frame of drawing data refers to data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Here, the frame buffer 69 has multiple frame areas 691A, 692A. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 has a first frame area 691A and a second frame area 692A.

The first frame area 691A comprises a first layer 691A1, a second layer 691A2 having a lower priority than the first layer 691A1, and a third layer 691A3 having a lower priority than the second layer 691A2, and stores one frame's worth of drawing data by overlapping the layers 691A1 to 691A3 in order of priority.
The second frame area 692 comprises a first layer 692A1, a second layer 692A2 having a lower priority than the first layer 692A1, and a third layer 692A3 having a lower priority than the second layer 692A2, and stores one frame's worth of drawing data by overlapping the layers 692A1 to 692A3 in order of priority.
In the following description, the first layers 691A1 and 692A1 are also simply referred to as the first layer L1, the second layers 691A2 and 692A2 are also simply referred to as the second layer L2, and the third layers 691A3 and 692A3 are also simply referred to as the third layer L3.

Therefore, each layer L1 to L3 is set to a capacity that can store one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each layer L1 to L3 includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to the dots (pixels) of the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a memory capacity that can store data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, each unit area uses a full-color system, allowing 256 colors to be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each RGB color, for a total memory capacity of at least 3 bytes.

While drawing data created in one frame area (e.g., first frame area 691) is being used to draw on the pattern display device 36, the VDP 65 creates the next drawing data to be used in the other frame area (e.g., second frame area 692). In other words, the frame buffer 69 employs a double-buffer system.

The VDP 65 also generates image signals corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and outputs the image signals to the pattern display device 36. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691, 692 to be output. The VDP 65 converts this drawing data into gradation data by adjusting the resolution using a scaler (not shown) so that it corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36. The VDP 65 then generates image signals corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the gradation data, and outputs the image signals to the pattern display device 36.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processing than in the previous reference embodiment. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the hold generation processing and the presentation pattern determination processing are different from those in the previous reference embodiment. The contents of the hold generation processing and the presentation pattern determination processing in this reference embodiment are described below.

<Hold occurrence processing>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the hold generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 in substantially the same manner as in the above-mentioned reference embodiment. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 executes the process of steps S2210A to S2212A after executing the process of step S2204, as shown in FIG. 30, which is different from the above-mentioned reference embodiment.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first hold generation command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S2202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. Thereafter, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onward.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S2203 it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb and sets that number as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 in step S2204.

In step S2210A, the MPU 52 determines whether the current support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the contents of the hold occurrence command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is not the low-frequency support mode (if it determines that the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode), it executes the processing from step S2205 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, it executes the processes from step S2211A onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S2205 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is not the low-frequency support mode will be described.
In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for advance notice reservation. In this lottery process for advance notice reservation, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not advance notice reservation will occur.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, a notice hold is a hold that executes a notice display that changes the type of reserved image, etc. to notify the player of the expected level of the hold, or a notice display that generates a pre-reading effect to notify the player of the expected level of the hold by utilizing the effect of the number of games based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold. Note that in this reference form, a notice hold that executes a notice display that generates a pre-reading effect will be explained, and an explanation of notice holds that execute other notice displays will be omitted.

The advance notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, returns to 0. The advance notice pending occurrence counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a advance notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation lottery was won in step S2205 (whether or not an advance notice reservation should be made).
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of the above-mentioned step S2004.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first available storage area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side reserve area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2207 that a notice hold will not be generated, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2209. In this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes processing to generate a normal hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution processing of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Next, the process (the process from step S2211A onward) when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode will be described.
In step S2211A, MPU 52 determines whether or not it has received the second hold generation command sent from MPU 42 (whether or not it has set the second sub-side start-up hold memory number SRbN in step S2203).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that it has not received the second hold generation command, it executes the processing from step S2205 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that it has received the second hold generation command, it executes a special hold generation process in step S2212A. In this special hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a special hold. In addition, based on the contents of this special hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of the above-mentioned step S2004.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

Here, since the MPU 52 set the second sub-side start-up hold memory count SRbN in step S2203, it stores the special hold information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up hold memory count SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, if the MPU 52 set the second sub-side start-up hold memory count SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the special hold information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up hold memory count SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In this way, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information as sub-side hold information in each area SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in response to the reception of the second hold generation command. Each area SRb1 to SRb4 is set to a storage capacity sufficient to store the special hold information required to generate a special hold.

After executing the advance hold generation process of step S2207, the normal hold generation process of step S2208, or the special hold generation process of step S2212A, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. The MPU 52 then stores the hold display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of a notice hold, a normal hold, or a special hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays a notice hold image, a normal hold image, or a special hold image on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold, a normal hold, or a special hold.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts on the display screen G.

FIG. 31 shows the preview reserved pattern, normal reserved pattern, and special reserved pattern displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device.
As shown in Figure 31, the MPU 62 displays on the display screen G pedestals B11 to B14 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa, pedestals B21 to B24 corresponding to the four memory areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb, and an execution pedestal AB provided between pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to the execution area SAE.

The first holding lamp unit 371 is provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa. On the other hand, the bases B11 to B14 are provided from right to left to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4, of the first sub-side holding area SRa.
The second holding lamp units 372 are provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb. Similarly, the bases B21 to B24 are provided from left to right to correspond to the four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4, of the second sub-side holding area SRb.

The bases B11 to B14, the bases B21 to B24 and the execution base AB notify the player of the occurrence of the advance notice reservation, the normal reservation or the special reservation by placing the advance notice reservation pattern, the normal reservation pattern or the special reservation pattern thereon.
Specifically, when MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the memory area of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance hold image, on the bases B11 to B14.

In addition, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white spherical image, which is a normal hold image, on the bases B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is an advance hold image, on the bases B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, that special hold information is stored in the memory area of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a black spherical image, which is a special hold image, on the bases B21 to B24.

Furthermore, when the MPU 62 determines that normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the execution base AB.
When the MPU 62 determines that advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift time command transmitted from the MPU 52, it places a flashing white sphere pattern, which is an advance notice hold pattern, on the execution base AB.
When the MPU 62 determines that special hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, it places a black spherical image, which is a special hold image, on the execution base AB.

31, the MPU 62 places regular reserved symbols on the bases B11 and B12, places a notice reserved symbol on the base B13, and places a regular reserved symbol on the execution base AB. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 places a special reserved symbol on the base B21. In other words, in this example, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Also, in this example, the MPU 62 does not place symbols on the bases B14, B22 to B24.
In this embodiment, the images of the normal reserve, the advance notice reserve, and the special reserve are different from one another, but any two of the images may be the same, or all of the images may be the same. Also, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the bases B11 to B14, the bases B21 to B24, and the execution base AB on the display screen G, but it is not necessary to display each base on the display screen G.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining effects to be used for game times, effects for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 in a manner similar to that of the above-described reference embodiment. Note that, in this reference embodiment, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2403, step S2405, or step S2406, as shown in FIG. 32, and then executes the process of step S2407A.

In step S2407A, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407A, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to display a preview.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the selected performance pattern.
The process of determining the effect pattern will be described in detail below.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 as shown in FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE during the hold shift process is special hold information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special hold information, it executes a special hold effect determination process in step S3002. In this special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines the effect to be used to consume the special hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes the effect execution process in step S2004 described above, in which it controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. The MPU 52 then stores the special hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the effect for consuming the special hold on the pattern display device 36 based on the special hold effect command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the effect for consuming the special hold on the display screen G.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE is not special hold information, it sets a special hold effect end command in step S3004. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This special hold effect end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process in step S2006 described above.

Based on the special hold effect termination command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the special hold) that was created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.
In this reference embodiment, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE is not special hold information, it always sets a special hold effect end command in step S3004, and the MPU 62 clears the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect end command sent from the MPU 52. In contrast, the MPU 52 may set the special hold effect end command only when drawing data has been created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side reserved information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side reserved area by the reserved information shift process is advance notice reserved information.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is advance notice hold information, it executes advance notice hold effect determination processing in step S3006. In this advance notice hold effect determination processing, the MPU 52 determines an effect (pre-reading effect) for consuming the advance notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this advance notice hold effect determination processing, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of the above-mentioned step S2004.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice-on-hold effect command. The MPU 52 then stores the notice-on-hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the notice-on-hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice-on-hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the notice-hold effect command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the effect for consuming the notice-hold on the pattern display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the effect for consuming the notice-hold on the display screen G.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the flow of the pre-reading effect.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 34, the MPU 62 displays an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "mystery" on the symbol display device 36 so that the angel character flies around the entire display screen G, thereby displaying a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-announced reserved game, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the reserved game by utilizing the effect of the game number based on the reserved game that will be consumed before the reserved game. Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

The look-ahead effect starts the flight from the top right position of the display screen G and has the angel character fly towards the center position (see Figure 34(A)), and then has the angel character fly from that position towards the top left position (see Figure 34(B)). The look-ahead effect then returns the angel character to the flight start position by having the angel character fly from the top left position of the display screen G (position in Figure 34(B)) towards the top right position (see Figure 34(C)). Then, as shown in Figures 34(A) to 34(C), the look-ahead effect starts the angel character flying again, causing the angel character to fly in an infinite loop. In this reference embodiment, the time required for one loop of the look-ahead effect is 10 seconds.

Returning to the explanation of the effect pattern determination process, the process from step S3008 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes a display duration accumulation process. In this display duration accumulation process, the MPU 52 calculates the cumulative display duration based on the content of the variation command each time it executes the advance notice hold effect determination process of step S3006, and stores the cumulative time in RAM 54. In other words, the cumulative display duration indicates the time elapsed from the start to the end of the pre-reading effect. Here, the aforementioned advance notice hold effect command includes information related to the cumulative display duration. Therefore, by receiving information related to the cumulative display duration from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 is able to grasp the starting point of the angel character's flight and its subsequent movement. The initial value of the cumulative display duration is "0," and the angel character's starting point at this time is the flight start position.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is not advance notice hold information, it sets an advance notice hold effect end command in step S3009. The MPU 52 then stores the advance notice hold effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This advance notice hold effect end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the notice-hold effect end command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the notice-hold) that had been created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes a process for resetting the cumulative display duration. In this process, the MPU 52 resets the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0."

After executing the processing of step S3003, after executing the processing of step S3008, or after executing the processing of step S3010, the MPU 52 executes other processing in step S3011. The MPU 52 then terminates the processing for determining the effect pattern. In other processing, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing an effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the effect duration (effect duration period) and effect content as the effect pattern. Note that in step S3011, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display other than the pre-reading effect.

<About the occurrence of pre-reading effects and the subsequent flow>
35A and 35B are diagrams showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that advance notice reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. Specifically, FIG. 35A is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Also, FIG. 35B is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 35C is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 35D is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.
In this example, the MPU 52 determines that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and determines that normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE.

As shown in Figure 35 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the fluctuation display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of Figure 35, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 35 (B).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207 and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 35, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that advance notice information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa based on the contents of the reserve display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, it places a flashing white sphere, which is an advance notice reserve pattern, on the base B13. Here, as shown in Figure 35 (B), the VDP 65 displays the advance notice reserve pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69.

In the example of Figure 35, the MPU 62 is not executing the effect for the consumption of the special hold, and therefore the VDP 65 is not creating drawing data on the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 35 (C). Also, in the example of Figure 35, the MPU 62 is not executing the effect for the consumption of the advance hold, and therefore the VDP 65 is not creating drawing data on the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 35 (D).

Figure 36 shows the display screen of the pattern display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the first hold shift process is performed after it is determined that advance hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. Specifically, Figure 36(A) shows the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. Also, Figure 36(B) shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, Figure 36(C) shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and Figure 36(D) shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the normal hold, advance hold, and special hold shifts by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 36(A), based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image placed on the base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image placed on the base B12, onto the base B11, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image placed on the base B13, onto the base B12. Here, the VDP 65 displays the normal hold image and the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Fig. 36(B).

As shown in Figure 36 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the fluctuation display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of Figure 36, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 36 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is advance notice hold information, it executes advance notice hold presentation determination processing in step S3006, and sets an advance notice hold presentation command in step S3007.
Then, based on the notice-hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the notice-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(A), the MPU 62 displays an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "mystery" on the symbol display device 36, flying across the entire display screen G, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming the advance notice reserve, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the reserve (in the example of FIG. 36, the reserve related to the advance notice reserve symbol placed on the base B12) by utilizing the effect of the game turn based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (in the example of FIG. 36, the reserve related to the normal reserve symbol placed on the execution base AB and the base B11). Here, as shown in FIG. 36(D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

In the example of Figure 36, the MPU 62 receives the first notice hold effect command after determining that notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore the cumulative display duration included in this notice hold effect command is "0". Therefore, as shown in Figures 36(A) and (D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly, with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position.

In the example of Figure 36, the MPU 62 is not executing the effects for consuming the special hold, so the VDP 65 does not create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 36 (C).

<About the flow when normal holds are consumed after a pre-reading effect occurs>
37A and 37B are diagrams showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second reservation shift process is executed after it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. Specifically, FIG. 37A is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Also, FIG. 37B is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 37C is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 37D is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the normal hold, advance hold, and special hold shifts by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 37(A), the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal reserved image placed on the base B11, onto the execution base AB based on the reserve display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance reserved image placed on the base B12, onto the base B11 based on the reserve display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Here, the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved image and the advance reserved image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Fig. 37(B).

As shown in Figure 37 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the fluctuation display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of Figure 37, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 37 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is advance notice hold information, it executes advance notice hold presentation determination processing in step S3006, and sets an advance notice hold presentation command in step S3007.
Then, based on the notice-hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the notice-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(A), the MPU 62 displays an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "mystery" on the symbol display device 36, flying across the entire display screen G, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification reserve, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the reserve (in the example of FIG. 37, the reserve related to the pre-notification reserve symbol placed on the base B11) by utilizing the effect of a game turn based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (in the example of FIG. 37, the reserve related to the normal reserve symbol placed on the execution base AB). Here, as shown in FIG. 37(D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

In the example of Figure 37, the MPU 62 receives a second notice hold display command after determining that notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and the cumulative display duration included in this notice hold display command is the same as the display duration of the previous game. Therefore, as shown in Figures 37(A) and (D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead display.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the advance notice hold) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the advance notice hold effect end command sent from the MPU 52. In other words, in the example of Figure 37, the MPU 62 will receive the advance notice hold effect end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, and will clear the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the advance notice hold) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on this advance notice hold effect end command.

In the example of Figure 37, the MPU 62 is not executing the effects for consuming the special hold, so the VDP 65 does not create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 37 (C).

<About the flow when special reserve is consumed after the occurrence of pre-reading performance>
38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that advance reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area, and then the first reservation shift process is performed, and then it is determined that special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area. In other words, FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area after the state shown in FIG. 36 is reached. Specifically, FIG. 38 (A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Also, FIG. 38 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 38 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 38 (D) is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the normal hold, advance hold, and special hold shifts by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 38(A), based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image placed on the base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image placed on the base B12, onto the base B11, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image placed on the base B13, onto the base B12. Here, as shown in Fig. 38(B), the VDP 65 displays the normal hold image and the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69.

As shown in Figure 38 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the fluctuation display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of Figure 38, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 38 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is advance notice hold information, it executes advance notice hold presentation determination processing in step S3006, and sets an advance notice hold presentation command in step S3007.
Then, based on the notice-hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the notice-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(A), the MPU 62 displays an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "mystery" on the symbol display device 36, flying across the entire display screen G, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming the advance notice reserve, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the reserve (in the example of FIG. 38, the reserve related to the advance notice reserve symbol placed on the base B12) by utilizing the effect of the game turn based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (in the example of FIG. 38, the reserve related to the normal reserve symbol placed on the execution base AB and the base B11). Here, as shown in FIG. 38(D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

In the example of Figure 38, the MPU 62 receives the first notice hold effect command after determining that notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore the cumulative display duration included in this notice hold effect command is "0". Therefore, as shown in Figures 38(A) and (D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly, with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position.

Also, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that it has received the second hold generation command, it executes a special hold generation process in step S2212A and stores the special hold information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas in the sub-side hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Figure 38, the MPU 52 stores the special hold information in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays a special hold pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player that a special hold has occurred.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that special reservation information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the contents of the reservation display generation command sent from the MPU 52, it places a black sphere pattern, which is a special reservation pattern, on the base B21. Here, as shown in Figure 38 (B), the VDP 65 displays the special reservation pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69.

In the example of Figure 38, the MPU 62 is not executing the effects for consuming the special hold, so the VDP 65 does not create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 38 (C).

Figure 39 shows the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a hold shift process is executed after it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. Specifically, Figure 39(A) shows the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Also, Figure 39(B) shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, Figure 39(C) shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and Figure 39(D) shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the normal hold, advance hold, and special hold shifts by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 39(A), the MPU 62 shifts the black sphere picture, which is the special reserved picture placed on the pedestal B21, onto the execution pedestal AB based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Here, as shown in Fig. 39(B), the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved picture, the advance reserved picture, and the special reserved picture on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69.

As shown in Figure 39 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the fluctuation display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of Figure 39, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the special pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 39 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special hold information, and if it determines in step S3001 that it is special hold information, it executes a special hold presentation determination process in step S3002 and sets a special hold presentation command in step S3003.
Then, based on the special hold effect command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the special hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 39(A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display the words "If it's a reach, it's your chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and also displays a treasure chest and an angel character about to open the treasure chest in the center of the display screen G, thereby displaying and executing an effect for consuming the special reserve on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Here, the VDP 65 displays an effect for consuming the special reserve on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Fig. 39(C).

In addition, the VDP 65 stores data related to the effects for consuming special holds in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effects stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. Specifically, the VDP 65 stores data related to the effects for consuming special holds in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to make the data related to the look-ahead effects stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 invisible to the player by darkening the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

In the example of Figure 39, the MPU 62 is not executing the performance for consuming the advance notice hold, so the VDP 65 is not creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 39 (D) (the angel character is stationary and not flying around). In other words, the angel is stationary at the position it was in at the end of the previous pre-read performance.

Then, based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the shift of normal holds, advance notice holds, and special holds by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. The subsequent flow is the same as the flow when normal holds are consumed after a pre-reading effect occurs (see Figure 37).

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the special hold) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect end command sent from the MPU 52. As a result, each layer L1 to L3 of the frame buffer 69 becomes in the same state as in FIG.
As mentioned above, the angel's position remains stationary at the position it was at at the end of the previous pre-reading performance, so the MPU 62 can resume the pre-reading performance without causing the player any discomfort by clearing the drawing data (drawing data related to the performance for consuming the special hold) that had been created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold performance end command sent from the MPU 52.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the pattern display device 36 functions as a variable display means that executes a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26. Also, in this embodiment, the sound and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as an effect execution means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute an effect.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance notice hold effect determination process of step S3006 functions as a first effect means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect (first effect) for a predetermined period (cumulative display duration) based on the game ball entering the upper operating port 25 (the establishment of the first trigger).
In addition, in this reference form, the special hold effect determination process of step S3002 functions as a second effect means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute an effect (second effect) for consuming the special hold that overlaps with the pre-reading effect and is different from the pre-reading effect during a specified period based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 (the occurrence of a second trigger different from the first trigger).
In this reference embodiment, the advance notice hold effect determination process continues to execute the pre-reading effect after the effect for consuming the special hold is completed.
In this reference form, continuing to execute the first performance does not necessarily mean that the first performance is in operation after the second performance has ended, but also includes a state in which it is not in operation (a stationary state) as long as it is displayed on the pattern display device 36.

As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a special reserved ball consumption effect even when the symbol display device 36 is executing a pre-reading effect for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and can continue to execute the pre-reading effect after the special reserved ball consumption effect has ended. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to suspend the look-ahead effect when the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute an effect for consuming a special hold (the angel character remains stationary and does not fly around), and causes the pattern display device 36 to resume the look-ahead effect when the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to end the effect for consuming a special hold.

According to this, the advance notice hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to suspend the look-ahead effect when the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute an effect for consuming a special hold, and causes the pattern display device 36 to resume the look-ahead effect when the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to end the effect for consuming a special hold. Therefore, even when a look-ahead effect is being executed, the look-ahead effect can be suspended to execute an effect for consuming a special hold, and the look-ahead effect can be resumed after the effect for consuming a special hold has ended. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can reliably allow players to enjoy look-ahead effects.

Furthermore, in this reference form, the special hold presentation determination process of step S3002 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading presentation (first presentation) by storing data related to the pre-reading presentation in the third layer L3 (first presentation layer) of the frame buffer 69, and the special hold presentation determination process of step S3002 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a presentation for consuming the special hold (second presentation) by storing data related to the presentation for consuming the special hold in the second layer L2 (second presentation layer) of the frame buffer 69, which has a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.
In addition, in this reference form, the frame buffer 69 functions as an image synthesis means that displays an image on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying multiple layers (each of the layers L1 to L3) including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority.
Then, the special hold effect determination process of step S3002 stores data related to the effects for consuming the special hold in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the pre-reading effects stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

According to this, the frame buffer 69 displays an image on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying multiple layers including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying the second layer L2, which has stored data related to a presentation for consuming a special hold based on a game ball entering the lower operating port 26 in the special hold presentation determination process, on top of the third layer L3, which has stored data related to a pre-reading presentation based on a game ball entering the upper operating port 25 in the advance hold presentation determination process. The special hold effect determination process stores data related to the effect for consuming the special hold in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3. Therefore, even when a look-ahead effect based on the game ball entering the upper operating port 25 is being executed, the effect for consuming the special hold based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26 can be overwritten and executed. After the effect for consuming the special hold is completed, the data related to the effect for consuming the special hold stored in the second layer L2 is erased, allowing the advance notice hold effect determination process of step S3006 to continue executing the look-ahead effect.

In addition, in this reference form, the sub-side hold information storage area 543 functions as an information storage means for storing multiple hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.
The sub-side pending information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) that stores pending information while the pattern display device 36 is executing a variable display, and a first sub-side pending area SRa and a second sub-side pending area SRb (multiple pending areas) that store pending information in the pending state before the pattern display device 36 executes a variable display.

In addition, the hold determination process of step S2002 functions as an information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which the game balls enter the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26.
Furthermore, the hold determination process of step S2002 includes a process (first hold storage means) of step S2202 in which hold information is stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa (first hold region) based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, a process (second hold storage means) of step S2203 in which hold information is stored in a second sub-side hold area SRb (second hold region) different from the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26, and a hold shift process (hold shift means) of step S2104 in which the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb is shifted toward the execution area SAE.
Then, the hold shift process in step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

In this way, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, so even if a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa is being executed based on the game ball entering the upper actuation port 25, a special hold consumption effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb can be executed based on the game ball entering the lower actuation port 26.

In this reference embodiment, the hold shift process in step S2104 prioritizes shifting the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, but the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb does not have to prioritize shifting toward the execution area SAE. For example, the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb may be shifted toward the execution area SAE in the order in which the balls entered.

Furthermore, since the first effect is a look-ahead effect, if a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25, and then a special hold consumption effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the lower actuation port 26, the continuity of the look-ahead effect would be lost. According to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a special hold consumption effect even when the symbol display device 36 is executing a look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25, and can continue to execute the look-ahead effect after the special hold consumption effect has ended, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead effect.

In this reference form, the first effect was a look-ahead effect, but it may also be another effect, such as a preview display that changes the type of reserved image to inform the player of the expected degree of the reserved effect.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second effect was an effect for consuming a special reserved prize, but it may also be, for example, an effect that prompts the player to press a push button, or an effect that gradually enlarges an image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Furthermore, the second effect is not limited to an effect that displays an image on the symbol display device 36, but may also be, for example, an effect that activates a role-playing device. In short, the first effect and the second effect may be any effect, and the second effect may be an effect that is executed in overlap with the first effect. Here, in this embodiment, overlap refers to a state in which the first effect becomes invisible due to the execution of the second effect.

In addition, in this reference form, the hold occurrence processing of step S2102 functions as an information notification means that displays the hold pattern associated with this hold information on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold information (sub-side hold information) stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543.
The reserved pattern generation process in step S2102 stores data relating to the reserved pattern in the first layer L1 (layer for reserved patterns), which has a higher priority than the second layer L2, thereby displaying the reserved pattern on the pattern display device 36.

In this way, the reserved image generation process displays the reserved image on the pattern display device 36 by storing data related to the reserved image in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2. Therefore, when executing a pre-reading effect or an effect for consuming a special reserved image, the reserved image displayed on the pattern display device 36 can be reliably displayed on the pattern display device 36 without overwriting it.

In this reference form, the pending generation process displays the pending pattern on the pattern display device 36 by storing data related to the pending pattern in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2.
In response to this, the information notification means may cause the variable display means to display the reserved picture by storing data relating to the reserved picture in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer.
According to this, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved picture in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved picture, so that when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved picture can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved picture displayed on the variable display means. Also, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved picture on the variable display means without using a new layer.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second presentation means sets a special hold presentation end command in step S3004, thereby causing the pattern display device 36 to immediately end all presentations for consuming special holds.
According to this, the second effect means immediately terminates the effect for consuming the special hold on the pattern display device 36 all at once, so that the effect for consuming the special hold can be quickly terminated.

In this reference embodiment, the advance notice hold effect determination process of step S3006 functions as a first effect means for causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect by storing data relating to a pre-reading effect (first effect) in the third layer L3 (first effect layer) of the frame buffer 69 based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper operating port 25, and the special hold effect determination process of step S3002 functions as a second effect means for causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a special hold effect by storing data relating to a special hold effect (second effect) different from the pre-reading effect in the second layer L2 (second effect layer) of the frame buffer 69, which has a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower operating port 26.

In contrast to this, the advance notice hold effect determination process of step S3006 and the special hold effect determination process of step S3002 may cause the pattern display device 36 to execute the advance notice effect and the effect for consuming the special hold by storing data relating to the advance notice effect (first effect) and data relating to the effect for consuming the special hold (second effect) in the same layer.
In addition, the advance notice hold effect determination process in step S3006 and the special hold effect determination process in step S3002 may cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect and an effect for consuming the special hold based on the game ball entering the same starting ball entry means.

In this way, the first presentation means and the second presentation means only need to function as specific presentation means that cause the variable display means to execute a specific presentation by storing data related to a specific presentation in a specific presentation layer based on the occurrence of a specific trigger.
In this reference form, the hold generation process in step S2102 displays a common image on the pattern display device 36 by storing data relating to a common image (hold pattern and each pattern row Z1 to Z3) that is different from a specific effect in a common layer (first layer L1) that has a higher priority than the specific effect layers (second layer L2 and third layer L3).

Accordingly, the hold generation process of step S2102 displays a common image on the pattern display device 36 by storing data relating to a common image (hold pattern and each pattern row Z1-Z3) that is different from the effects for the pre-reading effect and the consumption of special holds in a common layer (first layer L1) that has a higher priority than the specific effect layers (second layer L2 and third layer L3). Therefore, when the pre-reading effect and the effects for the consumption of special holds are executed, the common image can be reliably displayed on the pattern display device 36 without overwriting the common image displayed on the pattern display device 36.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second allocation table, which is referenced when drawing a lottery to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on a win at the lower operating port 26, is more likely to allocate to the "most advantageous result" than the first allocation table, which is referenced when drawing a lottery to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on a win at the upper operating port 25. In other words, the effect (second effect) for consuming a special reserve based on a game ball winning at the lower operating port 26 is more useful to players than the look-ahead effect (first effect) based on a game ball winning at the upper operating port 25.

As a result, the effects for consuming special reserved balls are more useful to players than the pre-reading effects, so players will pay attention to whether or not the effects for consuming special reserved balls will be executed during the specified period. Therefore, pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference form, the second effect is more useful to the player than the first effect because it is easier to allocate to the "most advantageous result," but the second effect only needs to be more useful to the player than the first effect, and any type of effect may be used for the first and second effects.
For example, in a gaming machine configured to execute a first game round based on a ball entering a first starting ball entry means and a second game round based on a ball entering a second starting ball entry means in parallel, if the player wins or is likely to win the second game round, the second effect may be executed in the second game round in overlap with the first effect being executed in the first game round, making the second effect more useful to the player than the first effect.
Also, for example, in a gaming machine configured to execute an electric role game round related to a lottery for opening an electric role device based on the ball entering the through gate during the opening/closing execution mode, if the electric role game round is won or is likely to be won, a second effect may be executed in the electric role game round overlapping with the first effect during the opening/closing execution mode, making the second effect more useful to the player than the first effect.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the look-ahead effect by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "Strange" so that it flies around the entire display screen G. Then, when the MPU 62 continues to execute the look-ahead effect after the effect for consuming the special hold has ended, it executes the look-ahead effect by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "Strange" so that it flies around the entire display screen G. In other words, the look-ahead effect was one type of effect.

In contrast, the first presentation means may cause the variable display means to execute a first presentation having multiple degrees of expectation over a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first trigger. For example, the MPU 62 may execute a low-expectation look-ahead presentation by causing the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "mystery" so that it flies around the entire display screen G, and execute a high-expectation look-ahead presentation by causing the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "hot" so that it flies around the entire display screen G.

When the variable display means is caused to execute a first effect having multiple degrees of expectation over a predetermined period of time, the first effect means may change the expectation level of the first effect during the overlapping period in which the second effect is executed by the second effect means. For example, the MPU 62 may execute a look-ahead effect by having the pattern display device 36 display an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "Strange" so that it flies around the entire display screen G, and when the look-ahead effect is to be continued after the effect for consuming the special hold has ended, the look-ahead effect may be executed by having the pattern display device 36 display an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "Hot" so that it flies around the entire display screen G.

As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can execute a special reserved effect even when the symbol display device 36 is executing a pre-reading effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and can change the expectation level of the pre-reading effect during the overlapping period when the special reserved effect is being executed in the special reserved effect determination process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 can execute a special reserved consumption effect even when the symbol display device 36 is executing a pre-reading effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and can continue to execute the pre-reading effect after the special reserved consumption effect has ended. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) The advance notice hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to suspend the look-ahead effect when the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute an effect for consuming the special hold, and causes the pattern display device 36 to resume the look-ahead effect when the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to end the effect for consuming the special hold. Therefore, even when the look-ahead effect is being executed, the look-ahead effect can be suspended to execute an effect for consuming the special hold, and the look-ahead effect can be resumed after the effect for consuming the special hold ends. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can reliably allow players to enjoy the look-ahead effect.

(3) The frame buffer 69 displays an image on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying multiple layers, including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3, in order of priority.Therefore, an image can be displayed on the pattern display device 36 by overlaying the second layer L2, which has stored data related to a special hold consumption effect based on a game ball entering the lower actuation port 26 in the special hold effect determination process, on top of the third layer L3, which has stored data related to a pre-reading effect based on a game ball entering the upper actuation port 25 in the advance hold effect determination process. The special hold effect determination process stores data related to the effect for consuming the special hold in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3. Therefore, even when a look-ahead effect based on the game ball entering the upper operating port 25 is being executed, the effect for consuming the special hold based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26 can be overwritten and executed. After the effect for consuming the special hold is completed, the data related to the effect for consuming the special hold stored in the second layer L2 is erased, allowing the advance notice hold effect determination process of step S3006 to continue executing the look-ahead effect.

(4) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa is being executed based on the game ball entering the upper operating port 25, a special hold consumption effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb can be executed based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26.
(5) The pachinko machine 1 can execute a special reserved consumption effect even when the pattern display device 36 is executing a pre-reading effect for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, and can continue to execute the pre-reading effect after the special reserved consumption effect has ended, allowing the player to play comfortably without compromising the continuity of the pre-reading effect.

(6) The pending generation process stores data relating to the pending pattern in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2, thereby displaying the pending pattern on the pattern display device 36. Therefore, when executing a pre-reading effect or an effect for consuming a special pending, the pending pattern displayed on the pattern display device 36 can be reliably displayed on the pattern display device 36 without overwriting the pending pattern.
(7) The second presentation means immediately terminates the presentation for consuming special holds on the pattern display device 36 all at once, thereby enabling the presentation for consuming special holds to be terminated quickly.

[Reference form B]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment B of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.
In the reference form A, the advance hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to suspend the pre-reading effect when the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute an effect for consuming the special hold (the angel character remains stationary and does not fly around), and causes the pattern display device 36 to resume the pre-reading effect when the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to end the effect for consuming the special hold.
In contrast, in this reference form, the advance hold effect determination process differs from reference form A in that it continues to execute the advance read effect during the overlap period in which the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the effect for consuming the special hold.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform processing different from that in Reference Embodiment A. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the processing for determining the presentation pattern differs from that in Reference Embodiment A. The details of the processing for determining the presentation pattern in this reference embodiment are described below.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining an effect pattern according to the reference form B of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process for determining a performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011, similarly to the aforementioned embodiment A. Note that this embodiment differs from the aforementioned embodiment A in that, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S3003 and then executes the process of step S3012B.

In step S3012B, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area during the hold shift process is advance hold information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is advance notice pending information, it executes the processes from step S3006 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is not advance notice pending information, it executes the processes from step S3011 onwards.
In this way, in this reference form, when it is determined that advance notice hold information is stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area, the MPU 52 executes a performance for consuming the special hold in the special hold performance determination process, and also executes a pre-reading performance in the advance notice hold performance determination process.

<About the flow when special reserve is consumed after the occurrence of pre-reading performance>
41 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when a hold shift process is executed after it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. In other words, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a case where a special hold consumption effect is executed after the state of FIG. 38 in the reference form A is reached. Specifically, FIG. 41 (A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Also, FIG. 41 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 41 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 41 (D) is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the normal hold, advance hold, and special hold shifts by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 41(A), the MPU 62 shifts the black sphere picture, which is the special reserved picture placed on the pedestal B21, onto the execution pedestal AB based on the reserved display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Here, as shown in Fig. 41(B), the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved picture, the advance reserved picture, and the special reserved picture on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69.

As shown in Figure 41 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the fluctuation display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of Figure 41, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the special pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 41 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special hold information, and if it determines in step S3001 that it is special hold information, it executes a special hold presentation determination process in step S3002 and sets a special hold presentation command in step S3003.
Then, based on the special hold effect command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the special hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 41 (A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display the words "If it's a reach, it's your chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and also displays a treasure chest and an angel character about to open the treasure chest in the center of the display screen G, thereby displaying and executing an effect for consuming the special reserve on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Here, the VDP 65 displays an effect for consuming the special reserve on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Fig. 41 (C).

In addition, the VDP 65 stores data related to the effects for consuming special holds in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the look-ahead effects stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. Specifically, the VDP 65 stores data related to the effects for consuming special holds in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so as to make the data related to the look-ahead effects stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 invisible to the player by darkening the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3012B is advance notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3012B that it is advance notice hold information, it executes advance notice hold presentation determination processing in step S3006, and sets an advance notice hold presentation command in step S3007.
Then, based on the notice-hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the notice-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(D), the MPU 62 displays an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "mystery" on the symbol display device 36, flying across the entire display screen G, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming the advance notice reserve, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the reserve (in the example of FIG. 41, the reserve related to the advance notice reserve symbol placed on the base B12) by utilizing the effect of the game turn based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (in the example of FIG. 41, the reserve related to the normal reserve symbol placed on the execution base AB and the base B11). Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 41(D).

In the example of Figure 41, the MPU 62 receives a second notice hold display command after determining that notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and the cumulative display duration included in this notice hold display command is the same as the display duration of the previous game. Therefore, as shown in Figure 41 (D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead display.

Figure 42 shows the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. Specifically, Figure 42(A) shows the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Also, Figure 42(B) shows the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, Figure 42(C) shows the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and Figure 42(D) shows the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the normal hold, advance hold, and special hold shifts by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 42(A), the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal reserved image placed on the base B11, onto the execution base AB based on the reserve display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance reserved image placed on the base B12, onto the base B11 based on the reserve display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Here, as shown in Fig. 42(B), the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved image and the advance reserved image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69.

As shown in Figure 42 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the fluctuation display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of Figure 42, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 42 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is advance notice hold information, it executes advance notice hold presentation determination processing in step S3006, and sets an advance notice hold presentation command in step S3007.
Then, based on the notice-hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the notice-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the MPU 62 displays an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "mystery" on the symbol display device 36, flying across the entire display screen G, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the hold (in the example of FIG. 42, the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on the base B11) by utilizing the effect of a game turn based on the hold (in the example of FIG. 42, the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on the execution base AB) that will be consumed before the hold. Here, the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 42(D).

In the example of Figure 42, the MPU 62 receives a third preview hold effect command after determining that preview hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, and the cumulative display duration included in this preview hold effect command is the same as the total display duration of the previous and previous previous game rounds. Therefore, as shown in Figures 42 (A) and (D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead effect.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the advance notice hold) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the advance notice hold effect end command sent from the MPU 52. In other words, in the example of Figure 42, the MPU 62 will receive the advance notice hold effect end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, and will clear the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the advance notice hold) that was created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on this advance notice hold effect end command.

In the example of Figure 42, the MPU 62 is not executing the effects for consuming the special hold, so the VDP 65 does not create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 42 (C).

In this manner, in this reference form, the advance notice hold effect determination process continues to execute the pre-reading effect during the overlap period in which the special hold effect determination process causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the effect for consuming the special hold.

As a result, the advance notice hold effect determination process continues to execute the look-ahead effect during the overlap period in which the special hold effect determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the effect for consuming the special hold, so the look-ahead effect can be continuously executed regardless of the effect for consuming the special hold. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to enjoy the flow of the look-ahead effect.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1), (3) to (7) in the embodiment A, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(8) The advance notice hold effect determination process continues to execute the look-ahead effect during the overlap period in which the special hold effect determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the effect for consuming the special hold, so the look-ahead effect can be executed continuously regardless of the effect for consuming the special hold. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can allow the player to enjoy the flow of the look-ahead effect.

[Reference form C]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment C of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the reference form A, if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special hold information, it sets a special hold presentation end command in step S3004, and the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the presentation for consuming the special hold) that had been created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold presentation end command sent from the MPU 52.
In contrast, in this reference form, even if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side reserved information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special reserved information, if the sub-side reserved information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side reserved area is advance reservation reserved information, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 does not immediately clear the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, which differs from reference form A.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform processing different from that in Reference Embodiment A. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the processing for determining the presentation pattern differs from that in Reference Embodiment A. The details of the processing for determining the presentation pattern in this reference embodiment are described below.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining an effect pattern according to the reference form C of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 as shown in FIG.

In step S3001, it is determined whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE during the hold shift process is special hold information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special hold information, it executes a special hold effect determination process in step S3002. In this special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 determines the effect to be used to consume the special hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this special hold effect determination process, the MPU 52 executes the effect execution process in step S2004 described above, in which it controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. The MPU 52 then stores the special hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the effect for consuming the special hold on the pattern display device 36 based on the special hold effect command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the effect for consuming the special hold on the display screen G.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special hold information, it executes processing from step S3005 onwards.
In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side reserved information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side reserved area by the reserved information shift process is advance notice reserved information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is advance notice hold information, it executes advance notice hold effect determination processing in step S3006. In this advance notice hold effect determination processing, the MPU 52 determines the effect (pre-reading effect) for consuming the advance notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this advance notice hold effect determination processing, the MPU 52 executes the effect execution processing in step S2004 described above, in which it controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice-on-hold effect command. The MPU 52 then stores the notice-on-hold effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the notice-on-hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice-on-hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the notice-hold effect command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the effect for consuming the notice-hold on the pattern display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes the effect for consuming the notice-hold on the display screen G.

In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes a process for accumulating the display duration. In this process, the MPU 52 calculates the cumulative display duration based on the content of the variation command each time it executes the preview hold effect determination process of step S3006, and stores this cumulative time in RAM 54. In other words, the cumulative display duration indicates the time taken from the start to the end of the preview effect. Here, the preview hold effect command mentioned above includes information related to the cumulative display duration. Therefore, by receiving information related to the cumulative display duration from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 is able to determine the starting point for flying the angel character and its subsequent movements. The initial value of the cumulative display duration is "0," and the starting point of the angel character at this time is the flight start position.

In step S3013C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect fade-out command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect fade-out command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect fade-out command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect fade-out command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the special hold effect fade-out command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming special holds) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so that it fades out from the center to the periphery of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is not advance notice hold information, it sets an advance notice hold effect end command in step S3009. The MPU 52 then stores the advance notice hold effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the advance notice hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This advance notice hold effect end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the notice-hold effect end command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the notice-hold) that had been created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes a process for resetting the cumulative display duration. In this process, the MPU 52 resets the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0."

In step S3004C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect end command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special hold effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the special hold effect end command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the special hold) that had been created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

After executing the processing of step S3003, after executing the processing of step S3013C, or after executing the processing of step S3004C, the MPU 52 executes other processing in step S3011. The MPU 52 then terminates the processing for determining the effect pattern. In other processing, the MPU 52 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing an effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the effect duration (effect duration period) and effect content as the effect pattern. Note that in step S3011, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display other than the pre-reading effect.

<About the flow when special reserve is consumed after the occurrence of pre-reading performance>
44 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is determined that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area, and then the effect for consuming the special hold is terminated and the effect for consuming the advance notice hold is executed. In other words, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the case where, after the state of FIG. 39 in the reference form A is reached, the effect for consuming the special hold is terminated and the effect for consuming the advance notice hold is executed. Specifically, FIG. 44 (A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Also, FIG. 44 (B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 44 (C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 44 (D) is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the normal hold, advance hold, and special hold shifts by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 44(A), the MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal reserved image placed on the base B11, onto the execution base AB based on the reserved display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance reserved image placed on the base B12, onto the base B11 based on the reserved display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Here, as shown in Fig. 44(B), the VDP 65 displays the normal reserved image and the advance reserved image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69.

As shown in Figure 44 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the fluctuation display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference form). In the example of Figure 44, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning/losing lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the valid line L as the stop result (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in Figure 44 (B).

In addition, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the memory area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and if it determines in step S3005 that it is advance notice hold information, it executes advance notice hold presentation determination processing in step S3006, and sets an advance notice hold presentation command in step S3007.
Then, based on the notice-hold effect command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 executes the effect for consuming the notice-hold by displaying it on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(A), the MPU 62 displays an angel character holding a sign displaying the word "mystery" on the symbol display device 36, flying across the entire display screen G, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification reserve, which notifies the player of the expected probability of the reserve (in the example of FIG. 44, the reserve related to the pre-notification reserve symbol placed on the base B11) by utilizing the effect of a game turn based on the reserve that will be consumed before the reserve (in the example of FIG. 44, the reserve related to the normal reserve symbol placed on the execution base AB). Here, as shown in FIG. 44(D), the VDP 65 displays the look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

Thereafter, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is advance notice hold information, it sets a special hold effect fade-out command in step S3013C.
Then, based on the special hold effect fade-out command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for consuming the special hold) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so that it fades out from the center to the periphery of the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 44 (C).

In this way, in this reference embodiment, the processing of step S3013C functions as a second presentation means that causes the pattern display device 36 to end the presentation for consuming the special hold by fading it out.
According to this, the processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to end the presentation for consuming the special hold by fading it out, so that the presentation for consuming the special hold can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the advance hold effect determination process, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to end the effect for consuming the special hold.
According to this, the processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading performance in the advance notice hold performance determination process, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to end the performance for consuming the special hold, so that the images of the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 can be changed simultaneously without the player being able to see the angel character, which is in a stationary state, and the performance for consuming the special hold can be ended and the pre-reading performance can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (6) in the embodiment A, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(9) The processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to end the presentation for consuming the special hold by fading it out, so that the presentation for consuming the special hold can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.
(10) The processing of step S3013C causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the advance notice hold effect determination process, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to terminate the effect for consuming the special hold, so that the effect for consuming the special hold can be terminated and the pre-reading effect can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Reference form D]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment D of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of a game board according to embodiment D of the present invention.
In this reference embodiment, the center frame 37 differs from the above-mentioned reference embodiment in that it has a two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 45.
The two-tiered stage 7 comprises an upper stage 71 arranged vertically above (on the display screen G side of the pattern display device 36), a lower stage 72 arranged vertically below the upper stage 71, and a stage allocation mechanism 73 that allocates game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72.

Fig. 46 is an enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity, and Fig. 47 is an enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity.
As shown in Figures 46 and 47, the upper stage 71 is equipped with a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game balls flowing down the game area, and a guide path 75 that guides the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guides the game balls toward the front of the game board 2.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so that there is a depth between the game area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in Figure 45), and is distributed to the upper stage 71 by the stage distribution mechanism 73, thereby reaching the rolling surface 74.

The rolling surface 74 is formed with a gentle curve, with its lowest position being vertically above the upper operating port 25 and rising horizontally to both the left and right. This rolling surface 74 has a gently recessed recess 741 located above the upper operating port 25, and two gently recessed recesses 742 located adjacent to recess 741 on both the left and right sides of recess 741.

The recessed portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75.
Each recessed portion 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the play area.
Therefore, after rolling on the rolling surface 74 by moving back and forth horizontally in the left and right directions, the game balls are discharged into the game area via one of two routes: one that travels down the inclined surface of the recessed portion 741 and into the guide path 75, and one that travels down the inclined surface of the recessed portion 742 and falls into the game area. Specifically, by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74 and the inclination angles of the recessed portion 741 and each recessed portion 742, the upper stage 71 is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 into the route that leads to the guide path 75 and approximately 60% into the route that leads to the fall into the game area.

The guide path 75 is equipped with an upper inlet section 751 into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and an outlet section 752 that discharges game balls that have entered from the upper inlet section 751 and drops them into the play area. Here, the upper stage 71 is made of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that game balls that have entered the guide path 75 can be seen.

The guide path 75 also includes a left guide section 753 that guides a game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guides it horizontally to the left, a right guide section 754 that guides a game ball that has been guided horizontally to the left by the left guide section 753, dropping it toward the bottom of the game board 2 and then guiding it horizontally to the right, and a front guide section 755 that guides a game ball that has been guided horizontally to the right by the right guide section 754 toward the front of the game board 2 and then ejects it from an ejection section 752 provided in the game area and drops it.
Here, since the discharge section 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, a game ball discharged into the game area via a route that leads to the ball entering the guide path 75 is more likely to enter the upper operating port 25.

The lower stage 72 is equipped with a rolling surface 76 that rolls the game balls flowing down the game area, and a guide path 77 that guides the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 76 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then toward the front of the game board 2.

The rolling surface 76 is provided so that there is a depth between the game area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in Figure 45), and is distributed to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73, thereby reaching the rolling surface 76.

The rolling surface 76 is located above the upper operating port 25 and has a mountain-shaped portion that protrudes vertically upward, and two valley-shaped portions that are located on both the left and right sides of the mountain-shaped portion and that are recessed vertically downward, and is formed with a greater curve than the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. This rolling surface 76 is located above the upper operating port 25 (at the top of the mountain-shaped portion) and has a gently recessed recess 761, and two gently recessed recesses 762 that are located at the bottom of the valley-shaped portion.

The recessed portion 761 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 77.
Each recessed portion 762 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the play area.
Therefore, after rolling on the rolling surface 76 by moving back and forth horizontally in the left and right directions, the game ball is discharged into the game area via one of two routes: a route that runs along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 761 and enters the guide path 77, or a route that runs along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 762 and falls into the game area. Specifically, by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 76 and the inclination angles of the recessed portion 761 and each recessed portion 762, the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute about 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to the route that enters the guide path 77 and distribute about 90% of the game balls to the route that falls into the game area.

The guide path 77 includes a lower inlet 771 into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 76 can enter, and a discharge 772 (discharge 752) that discharges game balls that enter through the lower inlet 771 and drops them into the game area. In this embodiment, the discharge 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge 752 of the upper stage 71. The lower stage 72 is formed from a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that game balls that have entered the guide path 77 can be seen. In this embodiment, the discharge 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge 752 of the upper stage 71, but this does not have to be the case.

The guide path 77 also includes a rear guide section 773 that guides a gaming ball that has entered the lower introduction section 771 toward the rear of the gaming board 2 and then drops and guides it downward below the gaming board 2, and a front guide section 774 (front guide section 755) that guides the gaming ball that has been dropped and guided downward below the gaming board 2 by the rear guide section 773 toward the front of the gaming board 2 and then discharges and drops it from a discharge section 772 (discharge section 752) provided in the gaming area. In this reference embodiment, the front guide section 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide section 755 of the upper stage 71. In other words, the front guide section 774 of the lower stage 72 is connected to the right guide section 754 of the upper stage 71, and a gaming ball guided horizontally to the right by the right guide section 754 can enter the interior. In this embodiment, the front guide portion 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide portion 755 of the upper stage 71, but this does not have to be the case.
Here, since the discharge section 772 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, a game ball discharged into the game area via a route that leads to the ball entering the guide path 77 is more likely to enter the upper operating port 25.

The stage allocation mechanism 73 includes a rotating member 78 provided to the left of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71.

The rotating member 78 comprises a rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with its axis extending in the horizontal front-to-rear direction; a first plate 782 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71); a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 so as to be approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782; and a third plate 784 fixed to the horizontal rear side of the rotating shaft 781 (the left guide section 753 side of the upper stage 71) so as to be approximately parallel to the first plate 782.

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotation shaft 781 so that the rotation shaft 781 passes through it in the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally upward and to the right from the rotation shaft 781, and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally downward and to the left from the rotation shaft 781. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end face inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite the rotation shaft 781.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. This second plate 783 has an end face on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781 that is inclined with respect to the plate surface.
The third plate 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the vertically lower side is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. This third plate 784 has a permanent magnet 787 fixed to the plate surface on the right side in the horizontal direction.

The door element 79 comprises a rotating shaft 791 rotatably attached to the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71 with the horizontal front-to-rear direction as its axial direction, and a rotating door 792 fixed to the rotating shaft 791 so as to close the inside of the left guide portion 753.
The revolving door 792 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate, and one end on the vertically upper side is fixed to the rotation shaft 791. The revolving door 792 is equipped with a permanent magnet 793 fixed to the plate surface on the left side in the horizontal direction.

The following describes the process by which the stage distribution mechanism 73 distributes game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72.
In the state shown in Figure 47, the surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, so that the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73 can be made to roll.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in Figure 45), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 47.
The game ball BA1 rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 and collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

48A and 48B are diagrams showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782. Specifically, Fig. 48A shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and Fig. 48B shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation axis 781, and the rotation member 78 rotates about the rotation axis 781 as shown in Figure 48(A) (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). Also, each of the plates 783 and 784 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation axis 781.
Thereafter, the game ball BA1 rolls horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, as shown in FIG. 48(B).

FIG. 49 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
49 , when the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation axis 781, and the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 opposite the rotation axis 781 engages with the end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the rotating member 78 side, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and has an end face on the rotating member 78 side that is inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, and the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, and therefore is unable to roll a subsequent game ball BA2 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73. Furthermore, when a subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74 prevents the rotating member 78 from rotating about the rotation shaft 781, and therefore the subsequent game ball BA2 is not distributed to the upper stage 71. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 passes through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 and is distributed to the lower stage 72.
In addition, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75, and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 is exposed to the inside of the left guide portion 753 through an opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753.

Here, as mentioned above, the upper stage 71 is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75, and to distribute approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 is configured to divert approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to divert approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
The following describes the flow of game balls allocated to each route on the upper stage 71. Note that a description of the flow of game balls allocated to each route on the lower stage 72 will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing game balls that have been sorted into routes that lead to the guideway.
The game ball BA1 that has been diverted to a route that leads to the guide path 75 will travel down the inclined surface of the recessed portion 741 and enter the upper introduction portion 751. The game ball BA1 that has entered the upper introduction portion 751 will be guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide portion 753, and then guided horizontally to the left, as shown in Figure 50. The game ball BA1 that has been guided horizontally to the left by the left guide portion 753 will collide with the revolving door 792.

51A and 51B are diagrams showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball hits the revolving door. Specifically, Fig. 51A shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792, and Fig. 51B shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792.
51(A) , when the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792, the door element 79 rotates around the rotation shaft 791 (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). When the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792 and the door element 79 rotates around the rotation shaft 791, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 comes close to the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753.
Here, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 is attached to the revolving door 792 so that when it approaches the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 as the door member 79 rotates, the two repel each other.

Therefore, when game ball BA1 hits revolving door 792, permanent magnet 793 of revolving door 792 approaches permanent magnet 787 of third plate 784 through opening 756 formed in left guide portion 753, and third plate 784 rotates about rotation shaft 781 due to the repulsive force of permanent magnet 787, so that rotating member 78 rotates about rotation shaft 781 as an axis, as shown in Figure 51 (B) (see counterclockwise arrow in the figure). Also, each of plates 782 and 783 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA1 hits the revolving door 792, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotation shaft 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This returns the rotating member 78 to the state shown in FIG.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that lead to the game area.
52, the game ball BA1 that has been diverted to a route that leads to the game area will fall into the game area along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 742. In this case, the game ball BA1 will not collide with the revolving door 792, and therefore the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 will not come close to the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753, and the rotating member 78 will not rotate.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes horizontally to the left. Therefore, a subsequent game ball BA2 that is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that the proportion of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 is approximately 20%, but may be set to a different proportion.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotation member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). In addition, each of the plates 783 and 784 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA2 hits the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation axis 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotation axis 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This returns the rotating member 78 to the state shown in FIG.

Thus, in this reference form, the two-stage stage 7 is equipped with a guide means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding game balls to the upper stage 71, and a blocking means (second plate 783) for preventing the guide means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 when the guide means has guided one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
According to this, when the guiding means has guided one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means prevents the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, so that the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being obstructed by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the second plate 783 serves both as the guiding means and the blocking means, but it is not necessary for them to serve both functions, and the guiding means and the blocking means may be separate bodies.
Furthermore, in this reference form, when the guiding means guides one game ball onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means prevents the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, but when two or more game balls are guided onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the guiding means may also prevent the subsequent game balls from being guided onto the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
Furthermore, in this reference form, when the guiding means has guided one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means prevents the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, but the guiding means may also prevent the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 based on other conditions, such as the passage of a predetermined time.

In this embodiment, the two-stage stage 7 includes an upper stage 71 (first stage) and a lower stage 72 (second stage) that is different from the upper stage 71. The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. The blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
According to this, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.Therefore, even if the blocking means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the player can enjoy the movement of the subsequent game balls that have been guided to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72.

In this embodiment, the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. However, for example, the blocking means may guide the game ball to the play area, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. In short, the blocking means only needs to be able to prevent the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the stage does not need to include a lower stage 72.

As described above, the upper stage 71 is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to the route that leads to the guide path 75, and distribute approximately 60% to the route that leads to the game area. As described above, the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to the route that leads to the guide path 77, and distribute approximately 90% to the route that leads to the game area. In other words, in this embodiment, the upper stage 71 is a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the lower stage 72.
According to this, the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being obstructed by subsequent game balls, and since the upper stage 71 is a stage that is more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.

In this reference form, as described above, the upper stage 71 is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the guide path 75, and approximately 60% to a route that leads to the game area, and the lower stage 72 is configured to distribute approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the guide path 77, and approximately 90% to a route that leads to the game area, but the distribution rates may be set differently.
In addition, in this reference form, the upper stage 71 is set as a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the lower stage 72, but it may also be set as a stage that is less advantageous to the player than the lower stage 72, or may be set to the same allocation rate as the lower stage 72.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the blocking means has a blocking state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) in which the guiding means blocks a subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and a non-blocking state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) in which the guiding means does not block a subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. The second stage 7 is equipped with a stage allocation mechanism 73 (switching means) that switches the blocking means between the blocking state and the non-blocking state. This stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
According to this, the second stage 7 is equipped with a stage sorting mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means between a blocking state and a non-blocking state, and the stage sorting mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference form, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a blocking state when the guidance means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, but the blocking means may also be switched to a blocking state when two or more game balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
Furthermore, in this reference form, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a blocking state when the guidance means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, but the blocking means may also be switched to a blocking state based on other conditions, such as the elapse of a predetermined time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means. Specifically, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means collides with the revolving door 792.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.

In this embodiment, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means hits the revolving door 792. However, the blocking means may also be switched to the non-blocking state by, for example, utilizing a game ball that has been assigned to a route that leads to falling into the play area. In short, the stage allocation mechanism 73 simply switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means. Specifically, the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by the subsequent game ball BA2 different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means colliding with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.

Furthermore, in this reference embodiment, the stage allocation mechanism 73 includes a second plate-shaped portion 786 (contact means) of the first plate 782 that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by coming into contact with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means. This contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with some of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means. Specifically, the length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that the proportion of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls allocated to the lower stage 72 is approximately 20%.
According to this, the stage allocation mechanism 73 is equipped with contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, and the contact means is disposed in a position where it will contact a portion (approximately 20%) of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means will contact the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference form, when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means collides with the revolving door 792, the stage distribution mechanism 73 brings the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 close to the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753, thereby switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state.
In this way, the stage allocation mechanism 73 can reliably switch the blocking means to a non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive force of the permanent magnets 793 and 787, so that the player can play with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 have a first guiding state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) in which game balls are guided only to the upper stage 71, and a second guiding state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) in which game balls are guided only to the lower stage 72, and function as stage guiding means for guiding game balls to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72. This stage guiding means is equipped with a stage sorting mechanism 73 (switching means) that switches the stage guiding means between the first guiding state and the second guiding state.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are equipped with a stage allocation mechanism 73 that switches the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to either a first induction state or a second induction state, and the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches to either the first induction state in which game balls are guided only to the upper stage 71, or the second induction state in which game balls are guided only to the lower stage 72, so the player will pay attention to the state of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. Furthermore, by switching the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to the second guidance state (first guidance state), the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 prevent subsequent game balls from being guided onto the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72), so that a game ball guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can roll on the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) without being obstructed by subsequent game balls. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, the flow path through which game balls flowing down the game area are introduced is described as a two-stage stage 7 having an upper stage 71 (first flow path) and a lower stage 72 (second flow path), but other flow paths may also be used. For example, the first and second flow paths may be gadgets such as a crane, or may be flow paths leading to a large prize opening or a V prize opening.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) When the guiding means has guided one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means prevents the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, so that the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being obstructed by the subsequent game ball. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.
(2) The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Therefore, even if the blocking means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the player can enjoy the movement of the subsequent game balls guided to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72.

(3) The game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being obstructed by subsequent game balls, and since the upper stage 71 is an advantageous stage for the player compared to the lower stage 72, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.
(4) The second stage 7 is equipped with a stage sorting mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means between a blocking state and a non-blocking state, and the stage sorting mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(5) The stage distribution mechanism 73 cooperates with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means to switch the blocking means to a non-blocking state, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.
(6) The stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by working in cooperation with a subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball that was guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball that was guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means.

(7) The stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it will contact a portion (approximately 20%) of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guide means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(8) The stage allocation mechanism 73 can reliably switch the blocking means to a non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive force of the permanent magnets 793 and 787, so that the player can play with peace of mind.

(9) The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are equipped with a stage allocation mechanism 73 that switches the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to either a first guidance state or a second guidance state, and the stage allocation mechanism 73 switches between either the first guidance state that guides game balls only to the upper stage 71 and the second guidance state that guides game balls only to the lower stage 72, so the player will pay attention to the state of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. Furthermore, by switching the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to the second guidance state (first guidance state), the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 prevent subsequent game balls from being guided onto the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72). Therefore, a game ball guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 can roll on the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) without being obstructed by subsequent game balls. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this reference embodiment, gaming balls present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 can enter the upper introduction section 751 of the guide path 75. If the state in which gaming balls can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first gaming state, and the state in which gaming balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 is defined as a second gaming state, in the second gaming state, only gaming balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71) in the gaming area can enter the first ball entry area (upper introduction section 751). The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a guide means (guide path 75) that guides gaming balls that have entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that awards a profit to the player.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first game state and a second game state that provides a player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference form, the second game state grants a benefit to the player and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, but it may also be a game state that does not grant a benefit to the player, a game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first game state, or a game state that grants the player the same benefit as the first game state.

Considering the invention of this reference form from this perspective, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783).
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state when a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition (when game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
The second plate 783 functions as a restriction means for restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, when the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75 guides game balls that have entered the upper introduction section 751 to the upper operating port 25, which provides a benefit to the player, allowing the player to enjoy a benefit when the second game state is occurring. Furthermore, the second plate 783 restricts the occurrence of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 based on the second game ball passing through a specific area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) to pass through another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from the predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 allows the ball to pass through areas other than the specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, thereby reliably restricting the occurrence of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a restricted state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) that restricts the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state, and an unrestricted state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) that does not restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state. The state is switched to the restricted state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and is switched to the unrestricted state when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state.

As a result, the second plate 783 switches to a restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and switches to an unrestricted state when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786.This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes a specific condition based only on a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition (game ball BA2 that collided with the second plate-shaped portion 786).

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 fulfills a specific condition based only on a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so the player will pay attention to whether the second game balls satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1, thereby generating a second game state.

This allows the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to be displaced by the first game ball to generate the second game state, thereby simplifying the configuration of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783.

In this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
Alternatively, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. Alternatively, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects a game ball, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to generate the second game state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. In this case, if the lottery for determining whether or not to generate the second game state is not won, the game ball present in the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be ejected into the game area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may generate a second game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA1 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area to the left of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is won, and do not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2, thereby generating the first game state.

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the second plate-shaped portion 786.

In this embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the game ball BA2, thereby generating the first game state. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
In contrast, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when this sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when this sensor detects a game ball, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. In this case, if the lottery to determine whether or not the first game state will be generated is not won, the game ball present in the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be discharged into the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may generate the first game state if the state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA2 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the first game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
The first game state generating means may determine that the state generating lottery is won as a case where a specific condition is met, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be met when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large prize slot, a V prize slot, or the like.

In this embodiment, the first gaming state is the state in which gaming balls can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783), and the second gaming state is the state in which gaming balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, in other words, the state in which gaming balls can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. The upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
In contrast, the configuration for switching between the first and second gaming states may be different from the configuration for switching the respective flow paths of the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72. For example, the configuration may be a configuration for switching between a flow path leading to the large prize opening, a flow path leading to the V prize opening, a flow path leading to the general prize opening, a flow path leading to each actuation port, and a flow path leading to the through gate, or a configuration for switching between the flow paths leading to two types of V prize openings, or a configuration for switching between a flow path leading to the upper actuation port and a flow path leading to the lower actuation port. Furthermore, these flow paths may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize opening or inside a special device. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state. For example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific control state (open/close execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 functions as a game ball guiding means that guides the second game ball (game ball BA2) to another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 guides the player to an area other than the specified area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a game ball guiding state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) in which it guides the second game ball to an area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, and a game ball non-guiding state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) in which it guides the first game ball to a predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring. The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 switch to the game ball guiding state when the second game state is occurring, and the second plate portion 786 switches to the game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 switches to a game ball guiding state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring.

In this embodiment, the game ball guiding means employs the second plate 783, but any means may be used as long as it can guide the second game ball to an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various components (apparatuses) such as nails or windmills, a center frame, or a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. The game ball guiding means may also be located in any part of the game machine, such as inside the big prize opening or inside the apparatus.

In addition, in this reference form, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and coming into contact with and displacing the first game ball.
In addition, the stage allocation mechanism 73 functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) that is launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) and coming into contact with the second game ball and being displaced.
The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has generated the second game state to a first benefit-granting area (upper stage 71) that will grant the player a first benefit (distributing approximately 40% of the game balls to a route that will land on guide path 75), and the stage allocation mechanism 73 guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to a second benefit-granting area (lower stage 72) that will grant the player a second benefit different from the first benefit (distributing approximately 10% of the game balls to a route that will land on guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has generated the second game state to the upper stage 71, which will grant the player a first benefit, and the stage allocation mechanism 73 guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to the lower stage 72, which will grant the player a second benefit different from the first benefit, so the player will pay attention to where the game ball is guided.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 will enter a first profit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that will award a first profit if it satisfies a first condition (entering the upper introduction section 751), and a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73 will enter a second profit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that will award a second profit if it satisfies a second condition (entering the lower introduction section 771) that is different from the first condition.

According to this, a first gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 will enter the upper inlet section 751, which will award a first benefit, if it satisfies a first condition, and a second gaming ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73 will enter the lower inlet section 771, which will award a second benefit, if it satisfies a second condition different from the first condition. Therefore, the player will pay attention to whether the first and second conditions are met.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged into another area (game area) different from both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771.

As a result, a first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and a second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition will be discharged into an area other than the areas of both the upper inlet section 751 and the lower inlet section 771, so the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball will be discharged into another area.

In addition, in this reference form, the state in which game balls can be made to flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (the second plate 783 is in an approximately horizontal state) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which game balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, in other words, the state in which game balls can be made to flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, is defined as the second game state. When the first condition (ball entering the upper introduction section 751) is met, the upper stage 71 functions as a first profit-granting area that causes a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to enter a first profit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that grants a first profit, and when the second condition (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met, the lower stage 72 functions as a second profit-granting area that causes a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73 to enter a second profit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that grants a second profit.
In contrast, the first and second benefit-awarding areas may have different configurations from the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72. For example, they may be a large prize opening, a V prize opening, a general prize opening, each operating opening, or a through gate, and may be any area that can award a benefit to a player. These areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize opening or inside a special device. The first and second gaming states may be any gaming states. For example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific control state (open/close execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Reference form E]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment E of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of a game board according to embodiment E of the present invention.
In the reference form D, the center frame 37 includes the two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36 .
In contrast, in this reference embodiment, the center frame 37 differs from the reference embodiment D in that it is provided with a two-stage stage 7E provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 53.

The two-tiered stage 7E comprises an upper stage 71E located vertically above (on the display screen G side of the symbol display device 36), a lower stage 72 located vertically below the upper stage 71E, and a stage allocation mechanism 73E that allocates game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71E or the lower stage 72.

Fig. 54 is an enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity, and Fig. 55 is an enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity.
As shown in Figures 54 and 55, the upper stage 71E is equipped with a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game balls flowing down the game area, and a guide path 75E that guides the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guides the game balls toward the front of the game board 2.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so that there is a depth between the game area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in Figure 53), and is distributed to the upper stage 71E by the stage distribution mechanism 73E, thereby reaching the rolling surface 74.

The rolling surface 74 is formed with a gentle curve, with its lowest position being vertically above the upper operating port 25 and rising horizontally to both the left and right. This rolling surface 74 has a gently recessed recess 741 located above the upper operating port 25, and two gently recessed recesses 742 located adjacent to recess 741 on both the left and right sides of recess 741.

The recessed portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75E.
Each recessed portion 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the play area.
Therefore, after rolling on the rolling surface 74 by moving back and forth horizontally in the left and right directions, the game balls are discharged into the game area via one of two routes: a route that runs along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 741 and enters the guide path 75E, or a route that falls into the game area via the inclined surface of the recessed portion 742. Specifically, by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74 and the inclination angles of the recessed portion 741 and each recessed portion 742, the upper stage 71E is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75E and approximately 60% to the route that falls into the game area.

The guide path 75E is equipped with an upper inlet section 751 into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and an outlet section 752 that discharges game balls that have entered from the upper inlet section 751 and drops them into the play area. Here, the upper stage 71 is made of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that game balls that have entered the guide path 75E can be seen.

The guide path 75E also includes a left guide section 753E that guides the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guides it horizontally to the left, a right guide section 754 that guides the game ball that has been guided horizontally to the left by the left guide section 753E by dropping it toward the bottom of the game board 2 and then guiding it horizontally to the right, and a front guide section 755 that guides the game ball that has been guided horizontally to the right by the right guide section 754 toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharges it from a discharge section 752 provided in the game area and causes it to drop.
Here, since the discharge section 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, a game ball discharged into the game area via a route that leads to the ball entering the guide path 75E is more likely to enter the upper operating port 25.

The stage distribution mechanism 73E includes a rotating member 78E located to the left of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E.

The rotating member 78E comprises a rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with its axis extending in the horizontal front-to-rear direction; a first plate 782 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71E); a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 so as to be approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782; and a third plate 784E fixed to the horizontal rear side of the rotating shaft 781 (the left guide section 753E side of the upper stage 71E) so as to be approximately parallel to the first plate 782.

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotation shaft 781 so that the rotation shaft 781 passes through it in the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally upward and to the right from the rotation shaft 781, and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally downward and to the left from the rotation shaft 781. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end face inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite the rotation shaft 781.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. This second plate 783 has an end face on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781 that is inclined with respect to the plate surface.
The third plate 784E is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the vertically lower side is fixed to the rotation shaft 781. This third plate 784E has a protrusion 788E formed on the plate surface on the right side in the horizontal direction. This protrusion 788E is formed in a semi-elliptical cylindrical shape with its major axis directed away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E.

Below, the process of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71E or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E will be explained.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in Figure 53), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 55.
The game ball BA1 rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 and collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

56A and 56B are diagrams showing the operating state of the rotating member when a gaming ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782. Specifically, Fig. 56A shows the state immediately before the gaming ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and Fig. 56B shows the state immediately after the gaming ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.
When a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotation member 78E rotates about the rotation shaft 781 as shown in Figure 56(A) (see the clockwise arrow in the figure). Furthermore, the plates 783 and 784E rotate in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
Thereafter, the gaming ball rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, as shown in FIG. 56(B).

FIG. 57 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
57 , when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotation axis 781, and the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 opposite the rotation axis 781 engages with the end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E on the rotating member 78E side, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and has an end face on the rotating member 78E side that is inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, and the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is distributed to the upper stage 71E.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that it is unable to roll a subsequent game ball BA2 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73E. Furthermore, when a subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74 prevents the rotating member 78E from rotating about the rotation axis 781, so that the subsequent game ball BA2 is not distributed to the upper stage 71E. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 passes through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 and is distributed to the lower stage 72.
In addition, the plate surface of the third plate 784E is close to the left guide portion 753E of the guide path 75E, and the protrusion portion 788E of the third plate 784E is exposed to the inside of the left guide portion 753E through the opening 756E (see Figures 54 and 55) formed in the left guide portion 753E.

Here, as mentioned above, the upper stage 71E is configured to divert approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75E, and to divert approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 is configured to divert approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to divert approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
The flow of game balls distributed to each route on the upper stage 71E will be described below, while a description of the flow of game balls distributed to each route on the lower stage 72 will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing game balls that have been sorted into routes that lead to the guideway.
The game ball BA1 that has been diverted to a route that leads to the guide path 75E will travel down the inclined surface of the recessed portion 741 and enter the upper introduction portion 751. As shown in Figure 58, the game ball that has entered the upper introduction portion 751 is guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide portion 753E, and then guided horizontally to the left. The game ball BA1 that has been guided horizontally to the left by the left guide portion 753E collides with the protrusion 788E.

59A and 59B are diagrams showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the protrusion 788E. Specifically, Fig. 59A shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the protrusion 788E, and Fig. 59B shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the protrusion 788E.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the protrusion 788E, the protrusion 788E is formed in a semi-elliptical cylindrical shape with its major axis directed away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E, causing the third plate 784E to bounce vertically upward by the game ball BA1. This causes the third plate 784E to rotate about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotation member 78E rotates about the rotation shaft 781 as shown in Figures 59(A) and 59(B) (see the counterclockwise arrow in Figure 59(B)). Furthermore, each plate 782, 783 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA1 hits the protrusion 788E, the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotation shaft 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This returns the rotating member 78E to the state shown in FIG.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that will lead to the game area.
60, the game ball BA1 that has been diverted to the route that leads to the game area will fall into the game area along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 742. In this case, the game ball BA1 will not collide with the protruding portion 788E, and therefore the rotating member 78E will not rotate.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes horizontally to the left. Therefore, game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that the percentage of game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is approximately 20%, but it may be set to a different percentage.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotation member 78E rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). In addition, each of the plates 783 and 784E rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA2 hits the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotation axis 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotation axis 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This returns the rotating member 78E to the state shown in FIG.

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73E causes the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guidance means to collide with the protrusion 788E, thereby bouncing the third plate 784E vertically upward and switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage allocation mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the protrusion 788E, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the third plate 784E will be bounced up vertically. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (7) and (9) in the embodiment D, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(10) The stage allocation mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the protrusion 788E, so the player will pay attention to whether the third plate 784E is bounced up vertically. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, a gaming ball present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E can enter the upper introduction section 751 of the guide path 75E. The state in which a gaming ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first gaming state, and the state in which a gaming ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E is defined as a second gaming state. In the second gaming state, only gaming balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71E) in the gaming area can enter the first entry area (upper introduction section 751). The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a guide means (guide path 75E) that guides a gaming ball that has entered the first entry area to a second entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a player with a profit.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first game state and a second game state that provides a player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference form, the second game state grants a benefit to the player and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, but it may also be a game state that does not grant a benefit to the player, a game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first game state, or a game state that grants the player the same benefit as the first game state.

Considering the invention of this reference form from this perspective, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783).
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state when a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition (when game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
The second plate 783 functions as a restriction means for restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, when the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75E guides game balls that enter the upper introduction section 751 to the upper operating port 25, which provides a benefit to the player, allowing the player to enjoy a benefit when the second game state is occurring. Furthermore, the second plate 783 restricts the occurrence of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 based on the second game ball passing through a specific area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) to pass through another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from the predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 allows the ball to pass through areas other than the specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, thereby reliably restricting the occurrence of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a restricted state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) that restricts the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state, and an unrestricted state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) that does not restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state. The state is switched to the restricted state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and is switched to the unrestricted state when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state.

As a result, the second plate 783 switches to a restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and switches to an unrestricted state when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786.This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes a specific condition based only on a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition (game ball BA2 that collided with the second plate-shaped portion 786).

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 fulfills a specific condition based only on a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so the player will pay attention to whether the second game balls satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1, thereby generating a second game state.

This allows the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to be displaced by the first game ball to generate the second game state, thereby simplifying the configuration of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783.

In this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
Alternatively, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. Alternatively, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects a game ball, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to generate the second game state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. In this case, if the lottery for determining whether or not to generate the second game state is not won, the game ball present in the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be ejected into the game area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may generate a second game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA1 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area to the left of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is won, and do not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2, thereby generating the first game state.

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the second plate-shaped portion 786.

In this embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the game ball BA2, thereby generating the first game state. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
In contrast, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when this sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when this sensor detects a game ball, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. In this case, if the lottery to determine whether or not the first game state will be generated is not won, the game ball present in the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be discharged into the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may generate the first game state if the state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA2 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the first game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
The first game state generating means may determine that the state generating lottery is won as a case where a specific condition is met, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be met when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large prize slot, a V prize slot, or the like.

In this embodiment, the first gaming state is a state in which gaming balls can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state), and the second gaming state is a state in which gaming balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E, in other words, a state in which gaming balls can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. The upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
In contrast, the configuration for switching between the first and second game states may be different from the configuration for switching the respective flow paths of the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a configuration for switching between a flow path leading to the large prize opening, a flow path leading to the V prize opening, a flow path leading to the general prize opening, a flow path leading to each actuation port, and a flow path leading to the through gate, or a configuration for switching between the flow paths leading to two types of V prize openings, or a configuration for switching between a flow path leading to the upper actuation port and a flow path leading to the lower actuation port, or any other configuration for switching between flow paths. Furthermore, these flow paths may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize opening or inside a special device. Furthermore, the first and second game states may be any game states. For example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first game state, and the specific control state (open/close execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 functions as a game ball guiding means that guides the second game ball (game ball BA2) to another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 guides the player to an area other than the specified area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a game ball guiding state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) in which it guides the second game ball to an area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, and a game ball non-guiding state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) in which it guides the first game ball to a predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring. The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 switch to the game ball guiding state when the second game state is occurring, and the second plate portion 786 switches to the game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 switches to a game ball guiding state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring.

In this embodiment, the game ball guiding means employs the second plate 783, but any means may be used as long as it can guide the second game ball to an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various components (apparatuses) such as nails or windmills, a center frame, or a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. The game ball guiding means may also be located in any part of the game machine, such as inside the big prize opening or inside the apparatus.

In addition, in this reference form, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and coming into contact with and displacing the first game ball.
In addition, the stage allocation mechanism 73E functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) that is launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) and coming into contact with the second game ball and being displaced.
The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has generated the second game state to a first benefit-granting area (upper stage 71E) that will grant the player a first benefit (distributing approximately 40% of the game balls to a route that will land on guide path 75E), and the stage distribution mechanism 73E guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to a second benefit-granting area (lower stage 72) that will grant the player a second benefit different from the first benefit (distributing approximately 10% of the game balls to a route that will land on guide path 77).

Accordingly, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has generated the second game state to the upper stage 71E, which will grant the player a first benefit, and the stage allocation mechanism 73E guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to the lower stage 72, which will grant the player a second benefit different from the first benefit, so the player will pay attention to where the game ball is guided.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 will enter a first profit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that will award a first profit if it satisfies a first condition (entering the upper introduction section 751), and a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73E will enter a second profit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that will award a second profit if it satisfies a second condition (entering the lower introduction section 771) that is different from the first condition.

According to this, a first gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 will enter the upper inlet section 751, which will award a first benefit, if it satisfies a first condition, and a second gaming ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73E will enter the lower inlet section 771, which will award a second benefit, if it satisfies a second condition different from the first condition. Therefore, the player will pay attention to whether the first and second conditions are met.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged into another area (game area) different from both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771.

As a result, a first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and a second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition will be discharged into an area other than the areas of both the upper inlet section 751 and the lower inlet section 771, so the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball will be discharged into another area.

In addition, in this reference form, the state in which game balls can be made to flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (the second plate 783 is in an approximately horizontal state) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which game balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E, in other words, the state in which game balls can be made to flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, is defined as the second game state. When the first condition (ball entering the upper introduction section 751) is met, the upper stage 71E functions as a first benefit-granting area that causes the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to enter a first benefit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that grants a first benefit, and when the second condition (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met, the lower stage 72 functions as a second benefit-granting area that causes the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73E to enter a second benefit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that grants a second benefit.
In contrast, the first and second benefit-awarding areas may have different configurations from the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72. For example, they may be a large prize opening, a V prize opening, a general prize opening, each operating opening, or a through gate, and may be any area that can award a benefit to a player. These areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize opening or inside a special device. The first and second gaming states may be any gaming state. For example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific control state (open/close execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Reference form F]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment F of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 61 is a front view of a game board according to embodiment F of the present invention.
In the reference form D, the center frame 37 includes the two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36 .
In contrast, in this reference embodiment, the center frame 37 differs from the reference embodiment D in that it is provided with a two-stage stage 7F provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 61.

The two-tiered stage 7F includes an upper stage 71F located vertically above (on the display screen G side of the symbol display device 36), a lower stage 72 located vertically below the upper stage 71F, and a stage allocation mechanism 73F that allocates game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72.

Fig. 62 is an enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity, and Fig. 63 is an enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity.
As shown in Figures 62 and 63, the upper stage 71F is equipped with a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game balls flowing down the game area, and a guide path 75F that guides the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides the game balls toward the front of the game board 2.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so that there is a depth between the game area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in Figure 61), and is distributed to the upper stage 71F by the stage distribution mechanism 73F, where it reaches the rolling surface 74.

The rolling surface 74 is formed with a gentle curve, with its lowest position being vertically above the upper operating port 25 and rising horizontally to both the left and right. This rolling surface 74 has a gently recessed recess 741 located above the upper operating port 25, and two gently recessed recesses 742 located adjacent to recess 741 on both the left and right sides of recess 741.

The recessed portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75F.
Each recessed portion 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each inclined surface is connected to the play area.
Therefore, after rolling on the rolling surface 74 by moving back and forth horizontally in the left and right directions, the game balls are discharged into the game area via one of two routes: a route that runs along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 741 and enters the guide path 75F, or a route that falls into the game area along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 742. Specifically, by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74 and the inclination angles of the recessed portion 741 and each recessed portion 742, the upper stage 71F is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75F and approximately 60% to the route that falls into the game area.

The guide path 75F is equipped with an upper inlet section 751 into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and an outlet section 752 that discharges game balls that have entered from the upper inlet section 751 and drops them into the game area. Here, the upper stage 71F is made of a transparent (or translucent) synthetic resin so that game balls that have entered the guide path 75F can be seen.

The guide path 75F also includes a left guide section 753F that guides the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then guides it horizontally to the left, a right guide section 754 that guides the game ball that has been guided horizontally to the left by the left guide section 753F, dropping it toward the bottom of the game board 2 and then guiding it horizontally to the right, and a front guide section 755 that guides the game ball that has been guided horizontally to the right by the right guide section 754 toward the front of the game board 2 and then ejects it from an ejection section 752 provided in the game area and drops it.
Here, since the discharge section 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, a game ball discharged into the game area via a route that leads to the ball entering the guide path 75F is more likely to enter the upper operating port 25.

The stage allocation mechanism 73F includes a rotating member 78F located to the left of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F.

The rotating member 78F comprises a rotating shaft 781F rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-to-rear direction as its axial direction, a first plate 782 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71F), and a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F so as to be approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782.

The first plate 782 is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F so that the rotation shaft 781F passes through it in the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally upward and to the upper right from the rotation shaft 781F, and a second plate-shaped portion 786 extending diagonally downward and to the left from the rotation shaft 781F. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end face inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite the rotation shaft 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F. The second plate 783 has an end face that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781F.

Below, the flow of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F will be explained.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in Figure 61), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 63.
The game ball BA1 rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 and collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 64 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
64, when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotation axis 781F, and the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 opposite the rotation axis 781F engages with the end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the rotating member 78F side, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and has an end face on the rotating member 78F side that is inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, and the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright position, preventing the subsequent game ball BA2 that reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F from rolling. Furthermore, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74 prevents the rotating member 78F from rotating around the rotation axis 781F, preventing the subsequent game ball BA2 from being distributed to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 passes through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 and is distributed to the lower stage 72.

As mentioned above, the upper stage 71F is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75F, and to distribute approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 is configured to divert approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to divert approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes horizontally to the left. Therefore, game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that the percentage of game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is approximately 20%, but may be set to a different percentage.

When a game ball collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation axis 781F, and the rotation member 78F rotates about the rotation axis 781F (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). In addition, the plate 783 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation axis 781F.
When the game ball hits the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotation axis 781F, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite to the rotation axis 781F engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This returns the rotating member 78F to the state shown in FIG.

This embodiment achieves the same effects and advantages as those (1) to (4), (6), (7), and (9) of embodiment D.

In this reference embodiment, a gaming ball present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper introduction section 751 of the guide path 75F. If the state in which a gaming ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first gaming state, and the state in which a gaming ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F is defined as a second gaming state, in the second gaming state, only gaming balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71F) in the gaming area can enter the first entry area (upper introduction section 751). The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a guide means (guide path 75F) that guides a gaming ball that has entered the first entry area to a second entry area (upper operating port 25) that awards a player a profit.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first game state and a second game state that provides a player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference form, the second game state grants a benefit to the player and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, but it may also be a game state that does not grant a benefit to the player, a game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first game state, or a game state that grants the player the same benefit as the first game state.

Considering the invention of this reference form from this perspective, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783).
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state when a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition (when game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
The second plate 783 functions as a restriction means for restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, when the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75F guides game balls that enter the upper introduction section 751 to the upper operating port 25, which provides a benefit to the player, allowing the player to enjoy a benefit when the second game state is occurring. Furthermore, the second plate 783 restricts the occurrence of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 based on the second game ball passing through a specific area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) to pass through another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from the predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 allows the ball to pass through areas other than the specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, thereby reliably restricting the occurrence of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a restricted state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) that restricts the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state, and an unrestricted state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) that does not restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state. The state is switched to the restricted state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and is switched to the unrestricted state when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state.

As a result, the second plate 783 switches to a restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and switches to an unrestricted state when the first game state is generated by the second plate-shaped portion 786.This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes a specific condition based only on a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition (game ball BA2 that collided with the second plate-shaped portion 786).

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 fulfills a specific condition based only on a portion of the second game balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so the player will pay attention to whether the second game balls satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1, thereby generating a second game state.

This allows the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to be displaced by the first game ball to generate the second game state, thereby simplifying the configuration of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783.

In this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
Alternatively, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. Alternatively, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects a game ball, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to generate the second game state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. In this case, if the lottery for determining whether or not to generate the second game state is not won, the game ball present in the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be ejected into the game area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may generate a second game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA1 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area to the left of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is won, and do not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2, thereby generating the first game state.

As a result, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the second plate-shaped portion 786.

In this embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the game ball BA2, thereby generating the first game state. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
In contrast, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when this sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and when this sensor detects a game ball, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. In this case, if the lottery to determine whether or not the first game state will be generated is not won, the game ball present in the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be discharged into the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may generate the first game state if the state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA2 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the first game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
The first game state generating means may determine that the state generating lottery is won as a case where a specific condition is met, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be met when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large prize slot, a V prize slot, or the like.

In this embodiment, the first game state is a state in which game balls can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state), and the second game state is a state in which game balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F, in other words, a state in which game balls can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. The upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
In contrast, the configuration for switching between the first and second game states may be different from the configuration for switching the respective flow paths of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a configuration for switching between a flow path leading to the large prize opening, a flow path leading to the V prize opening, a flow path leading to the general prize opening, a flow path leading to each actuation port, and a flow path leading to the through gate, or a configuration for switching between the flow paths leading to two types of V prize openings, or a configuration for switching between a flow path leading to the upper actuation port and a flow path leading to the lower actuation port, or any other configuration for switching between flow paths. Furthermore, these flow paths may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize opening or inside a special device. Furthermore, the first and second game states may be any game states. For example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first game state, and the specific control state (open/close execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 functions as a game ball guiding means that guides the second game ball (game ball BA2) to another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) different from a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 guides the player to an area other than the specified area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a game ball guiding state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) in which it guides the second game ball to an area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, and a game ball non-guiding state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) in which it guides the first game ball to a predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring. The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 switch to the game ball guiding state when the second game state is occurring, and the second plate portion 786 switches to the game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 switches to a game ball guiding state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first game state. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring.

In this embodiment, the game ball guiding means employs the second plate 783, but any means may be used as long as it can guide the second game ball to an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various components (apparatuses) such as nails or windmills, a center frame, or a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. The game ball guiding means may also be located in any part of the game machine, such as inside the big prize opening or inside the apparatus.

In addition, in this reference form, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and coming into contact with and displacing the first game ball.
In addition, the stage allocation mechanism 73F functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) that is launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782) and coming into contact with the second game ball and being displaced.
The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has generated the second game state to a first benefit-granting area (upper stage 71F) that will grant the player a first benefit (distributing approximately 40% of the game balls to a route that will land on guide path 75F), and the stage allocation mechanism 73F guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to a second benefit-granting area (lower stage 72) that will grant the player a second benefit different from the first benefit (distributing approximately 10% of the game balls to a route that will land on guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has generated the second game state to the upper stage 71F, which will grant the player a first benefit, and the stage allocation mechanism 73F guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to the lower stage 72, which will grant the player a second benefit different from the first benefit, so the player will pay attention to where the game ball is guided.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 will enter a first profit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that will award a first profit if it satisfies a first condition (entering the upper introduction section 751), and a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73F will enter a second profit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that will award a second profit if it satisfies a second condition (entering the lower introduction section 771) that is different from the first condition.

According to this, a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 will enter the upper inlet section 751, which will award a first benefit, if it satisfies a first condition, and a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73F will enter the lower inlet section 771, which will award a second benefit, if it satisfies a second condition different from the first condition. Therefore, the player will pay attention to whether the first and second conditions are met.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged into another area (game area) different from both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771.

As a result, a first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and a second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition will be discharged into an area other than the areas of both the upper inlet section 751 and the lower inlet section 771, so the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball will be discharged into another area.

In addition, in this reference form, the state in which game balls can be made to flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the second plate 783 is in an approximately horizontal state) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which game balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F, in other words, the state in which game balls can be made to flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, is defined as the second game state. When the first condition (ball entering the upper introduction section 751) is met, the upper stage 71F functions as a first profit-granting area that causes the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to enter a first profit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that grants a first profit, and when the second condition (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met, the lower stage 72 functions as a second profit-granting area that causes the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73F to enter a second profit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that grants a second profit.
In contrast, the first and second benefit-awarding areas may have different configurations from the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, they may be a large prize opening, a V prize opening, a general prize opening, each operating opening, or a through gate, and may be any area that can award a benefit to a player. These areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize opening or inside a special device. The first and second gaming states may be any gaming states. For example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific control state (open/close execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Reference form G]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment G of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a front view of a game board according to the reference form G of the present invention.
In the reference form F, the center frame 37 includes the two-stage stage 7F provided in the area below the pattern display device 36.
In contrast, in this reference embodiment, the center frame 37 differs from the reference embodiment D in that it is provided with a two-stage stage 7G provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 65.

The two-tiered stage 7G includes an upper stage 71F located vertically above (on the display screen G side of the symbol display device 36), a lower stage 72 located vertically below the upper stage 71F, and a stage allocation mechanism 73G that allocates game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72.

Fig. 66 is an enlarged perspective view of the second stage and its vicinity, and Fig. 67 is an enlarged front view of the second stage and its vicinity.
As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the stage distribution mechanism 73G includes a rotating member 78G provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F.

The rotating member 78G comprises a rotating shaft 781F rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with its axis extending in the horizontal front-to-rear direction; a first plate 782G fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71F); a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F and approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782G; and a fourth plate 789G fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F and approximately perpendicular to the first plate 782G, and fixed to the opposite side of the second plate 783 across the rotating shaft 781F.

The first plate 782G is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F so that the rotation shaft 781F passes through it in the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782G has a first plate-shaped portion 785 that extends diagonally upward and to the upper right from the rotation shaft 781F. The first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end face that is inclined relative to the plate surface on the side opposite the rotation shaft 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F. The second plate 783 has an end face that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotation shaft 781F.
The fourth plate 789G is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the left side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotation shaft 781F.

Below, the process of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G will be explained.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73G (see arrow A in Figure 65), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 67.
The game ball BA1 rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 and collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G.

FIG. 68 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
68 , when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G, the rotating member 78G rotates about the rotation axis 781F, and the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G opposite the rotation axis 781F engages with the end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the rotating member 78G side, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G, and has an end face on the rotating member 78G side that is inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, and the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright position, preventing the subsequent game ball BA2 that reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73G from rolling. Furthermore, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74 prevents the rotating member 78G from rotating around the rotation axis 781F, preventing the subsequent game ball BA2 from being distributed to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 passes through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation axis 781F and is distributed to the lower stage 72.

As mentioned above, the upper stage 71F is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75F, and to distribute approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 is configured to divert approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to divert approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the fourth plate 789G protrudes vertically downward, so that a game ball BA2 that is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F collides with the fourth plate 789G.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G, the fourth plate 789G rotates about the rotation shaft 781F, and the rotation member 78G rotates about the rotation shaft 781F in a direction that disengages the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). In addition, the plate 783 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781F.
When the game ball hits the fourth plate 789G, the rotating member 78G rotates about the rotation axis 781F, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite to the rotation axis 781F engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This returns the rotating member 78G to the state shown in FIG.

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73G includes a fourth plate 789G (contact means) that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means. This contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73G is equipped with a contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by coming into contact with a subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball that has been guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means, and the contact means is arranged in a position that will make contact with all of the subsequent game balls that are different from the game ball that has been guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls that have been guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means with peace of mind.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (4), (6), and (9) in the embodiment D, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(11) The stage distribution mechanism 73G is equipped with a contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball that has been guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means, and the contact means is arranged in a position that makes contact with all of the subsequent game balls that are different from the game ball that has been guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls that have been guided to the upper stage 71F by the guidance means with peace of mind.

In this reference embodiment, a gaming ball present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper introduction section 751 of the guide path 75F. If the state in which a gaming ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first gaming state, and the state in which a gaming ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F is defined as a second gaming state, in the second gaming state, only gaming balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71F) in the gaming area can enter the first entry area (upper introduction section 751). The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a guide means (guide path 75F) that guides a gaming ball that has entered the first entry area to a second entry area (upper operating port 25) that awards a player a profit.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between a first game state and a second game state that provides a player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
In this reference form, the second game state grants a benefit to the player and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, but it may also be a game state that does not grant a benefit to the player, a game state that is less advantageous to the player than the first game state, or a game state that grants the player the same benefit as the first game state.

Considering the invention of this reference form from this perspective, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783).
In addition, the fourth plate 789G functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state when a second game ball (game ball BA2) launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state satisfies a specific condition (when the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G).
The second plate 783 functions as a restriction means for restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, when the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75F guides game balls that enter the upper introduction section 751 to the upper operating port 25, which provides a benefit to the player, allowing the player to enjoy a benefit when the second game state is occurring. Furthermore, the second plate 783 restricts the occurrence of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 based on the second game ball passing through a specific area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 allows the second game ball (game ball BA2) to pass through another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation axis 781F) different from the predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 allows the ball to pass through areas other than the specified area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring, thereby reliably restricting the occurrence of the second gaming state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a restricted state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) that restricts the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state, and an unrestricted state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) that does not restrict the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state. The state is switched to the restricted state when the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and is switched to the unrestricted state when the fourth plate 789G generates the first game state.

In this way, the second plate 783 switches to a restricted state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and switches to an unrestricted state when the first game state is generated by the fourth plate 789G. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1, thereby generating a second game state.

This allows the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 to be displaced by the first game ball to generate the second game state, thereby simplifying the configuration of the first plate 782G and the second plate 783.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are displaced by the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
Alternatively, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and when this sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and when this sensor detects a game ball, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to generate the second game state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the second game state. In this case, if the lottery to determine whether or not the second game state will be generated is not won, the game ball present in the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be ejected into the game area.

In this way, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may generate a second game state if a state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA1 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passes through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area to the left of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the second game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and do not generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2, thereby generating the first game state.

This allows the fourth plate 789G to generate the first game state by displacing the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the second game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the fourth plate 789G.

In this embodiment, the fourth plate 789G generates the first game state by displacing the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the game ball BA2. In other words, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
In contrast, the fourth plate 789G may be displaced by a driving force such as a motor. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F, and when this sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation shaft 781F, and when this sensor detects a game ball, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. In this case, if the lottery to determine whether or not the first game state will be generated is not won, the game ball present in the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation axis 781F may be guided to the lower stage 72 or may be discharged into the game area.

In this way, the fourth plate 789G may generate the first game state if the state generation lottery executed based on the game ball BA2 launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the second game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (such as the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation axis 781F, or the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the area on the left side of the center frame 37) is won, and may not generate the first game state if the state generation lottery is not won.
According to this, the fourth plate 789G generates the first game state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first game state when the state generation lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
The first game state generating means may determine that the state generating lottery is won as a case where a specific condition is met, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be met when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when a predetermined number of game balls enter a large prize slot, a V prize slot, or the like.

In this embodiment, the first game state is a state in which game balls can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state), and the second game state is a state in which game balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F, in other words, a state in which game balls can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. The upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 form a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
In contrast, the configuration for switching between the first and second game states may be different from the configuration for switching the respective flow paths of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a configuration for switching between a flow path leading to the large prize opening, a flow path leading to the V prize opening, a flow path leading to the general prize opening, a flow path leading to each actuation port, and a flow path leading to the through gate, or a configuration for switching between the flow paths leading to two types of V prize openings, or a configuration for switching between a flow path leading to the upper actuation port and a flow path leading to the lower actuation port, or any other configuration for switching between flow paths. Furthermore, these flow paths may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize opening or inside a special device. Furthermore, the first and second game states may be any game states. For example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first game state, and the specific control state (open/close execution mode) may be the second game state.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 functions as a game ball guiding means that guides the second game ball (game ball BA2) to another area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation axis 781F) different from a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) while the second game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 guides the player to an area other than the specified area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the second plate 783 has a game ball guiding state (the second plate 783 is in an upright state) in which it guides the second game ball to an area different from the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, and a game ball non-guiding state (the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state) in which it guides the first game ball to a predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring. The first plate 782G and the second plate 783 switch to the game ball guiding state when the second game state is occurring, and the fourth plate 789G switches to the game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is occurring.

As a result, the second plate 783 switches to a game ball guiding state when the second game state is generated by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the first game state is generated by the fourth plate 789G.This makes it possible to reliably restrict the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the generation of the second game state by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 while the first game state is occurring.

In this embodiment, the game ball guiding means employs the second plate 783, but any means may be used as long as it can guide the second game ball to an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring. For example, the game ball guiding means may employ various components (apparatuses) such as nails or windmills, a center frame, or a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. The game ball guiding means may also be located in any part of the game machine, such as inside the big prize opening or inside the apparatus.

In addition, in this reference form, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 function as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the first game ball (game ball BA1) launched by the launch handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) and coming into contact with and displacing the first game ball.
In addition, the stage allocation mechanism 73G functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state based on the second game ball (game ball BA2) that is launched by the launch handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotation axis 781F) and coming into contact with the second game ball and being displaced.
The first plate 782G and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has generated the second game state to a first benefit-granting area (upper stage 71F) that will grant the player a first benefit (distributing approximately 40% of the game balls to a route that will land on guide path 75F), and the stage allocation mechanism 73G guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to a second benefit-granting area (lower stage 72) that will grant the player a second benefit different from the first benefit (distributing approximately 10% of the game balls to a route that will land on guide path 77).

As a result, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has generated the second game state to the upper stage 71F, which will grant the player a first benefit, and the stage allocation mechanism 73G guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to the lower stage 72, which will grant the player a second benefit different from the first benefit, so the player will pay attention to where the game ball is guided.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, a first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 will enter a first profit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that will award a first profit if it satisfies a first condition (entering the upper introduction section 751), and a second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73G will enter a second profit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that will award a second profit if it satisfies a second condition (entering the lower introduction section 771) that is different from the first condition.

According to this, a first gaming ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 will enter the upper inlet section 751, which will award a first benefit, if it satisfies a first condition, and a second gaming ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73G will enter the lower inlet section 771, which will award a second benefit, if it satisfies a second condition different from the first condition. Therefore, the player will pay attention to whether the first and second conditions are met.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged into another area (game area) different from both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771.

As a result, a first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and a second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition will be discharged into an area other than the areas of both the upper inlet section 751 and the lower inlet section 771, so the player will pay attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball will be discharged into another area.

In addition, in this reference form, the state in which game balls can be made to flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (the second plate 783 is in an approximately horizontal state) is defined as the first game state, and the state in which game balls are present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F, in other words, the state in which game balls can be made to flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, is defined as the second game state. When the first condition (ball entering the upper introduction section 751) is met, the upper stage 71F functions as a first benefit-granting area that causes the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 to enter a first benefit ball entry area (upper introduction section 751) that grants a first benefit, and when the second condition (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met, the lower stage 72 functions as a second benefit-granting area that causes the second game ball guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage allocation mechanism 73G to enter a second benefit ball entry area (lower introduction section 771) that grants a second benefit.
In contrast, the first and second benefit-awarding areas may have different configurations from the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, they may be a large prize opening, a V prize opening, a general prize opening, each operating opening, or a through gate, and may be any area that can award a benefit to a player. These areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize opening or inside a special device. The first and second gaming states may be any gaming states. For example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific control state (open/close execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Reference form H]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment H of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage according to embodiment H of the present invention.
In the reference form D, the stage allocation mechanism 73 was provided with a rotating member 78 provided to the left of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71.
In contrast, in this reference form, the stage distribution mechanism 73H differs from the reference form D in that it is equipped with a rotating member 78, a door member 79, and an obstruction means 70 that prevents game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.

The baffle means 70 includes a baffle plate 701 located at the upper left of the rotation shaft 781 of the rotating member 78, a baffle plate driver 702 that drives the baffle plate 701, and a rotation detection sensor 703 that detects the rotation state of the rotating member 78.

The baffle plate 701 is formed in a rectangular plate shape. This baffle plate 701 has an obstructing state in which it advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2, thereby obstructing game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H, and a non-obstructing state in which it retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 and is buried in the game board 2, thereby not obstructing game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.
The baffle plate 701 is connected to a baffle plate drive unit 702 mounted on the rear side of the game board 2. The baffle plate 701 is driven by the baffle plate drive unit 702 to be set to either an obstructing state or a non-obstructing state.

The rotation detection sensor 703 is attached to the horizontal rear side of the rotation shaft 781 (towards the left guide section 753 of the upper stage 71). This rotation detection sensor 703 detects two rotation states: when the second plate 783 is upright, and when the second plate 783 is approximately horizontal.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
70, the audio and light emission control device 5H includes an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. The MPU 52 is an element that combines the ROM 53 and the RAM 54 as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like, all on one chip.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The input port of the MPU 52 is also connected to a rotation detection sensor 703 that detects the rotation state of the rotating member 78. The output port of the MPU 52 is also connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6. The output port of the MPU 52 is also connected to a baffle plate drive unit 702 that performs a protruding and retracting operation on a baffle plate 701.
The sound and light emission control board 51 has a driver circuit. The MPU 52 controls the driving of various driving units through this driver circuit. Specifically, the MPU 52 controls the driving of the baffle driving unit 702 to extend and retract the baffle 701.

Below, the process of distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73H will be explained.
The MPU 52 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) detects two rotation states, that is, the upright state of the second plate 783 and the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783, using the rotation detection sensor 703.

In the state shown in Figure 69, the surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, so that the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73H can be made to roll.
When the MPU 52 detects that the second plate 783 is rotated in a substantially horizontal state, it executes drive control of the baffle drive unit 702 to set the baffle 701 to a non-obstructive state. In Fig. 69, the non-obstructive state is indicated by illustrating the baffle 701 in white.
Since the baffle plate 701 is set to a non-obstructive state, the game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73H (see arrow A in Figure 45), and rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783, as shown in Figure 69.
The game ball BA1 rolls horizontally to the right on the surface of the second plate 783 and collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotation of the rotary member.
71 , when the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation axis 781, and the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 opposite the rotation axis 781 engages with the end face of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the rotating member 78 side, thereby stopping the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end face of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and has an end face on the rotating member 78 side that is inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74.
Therefore, the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, and the game ball BA1 that was rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state.
In addition, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75, and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 is exposed to the inside of the left guide portion 753 through an opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753.

Here, as mentioned above, the upper stage 71 is configured to distribute approximately 40% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 74 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 75, and to distribute approximately 60% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 is configured to divert approximately 10% of the game balls that reach the rolling surface 76 to a route that leads to the balls entering the guide path 77, and to divert approximately 90% of the game balls to a route that leads to the balls falling into the game area.
The following describes the flow of game balls that have been allocated to the routes that lead to the game area of the upper stage 71. The flow of game balls that have been allocated to the routes that lead to the guide path 75 of the upper stage 71 and the flow of game balls that have been allocated to each route of the lower stage 72 are the same as those in the reference form D.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that will lead to the game area.
72, the game ball BA1 that has been diverted to a route that leads to the game area will fall into the game area along the inclined surface of the recessed portion 742. In this case, the game ball BA1 will not collide with the revolving door 792, and therefore the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 will not come close to the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753, and the rotating member 78 will not rotate.

When the MPU 52 detects that the second plate 783 is rotated in an upright position, it executes drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to repeatedly set the baffle plate 701 between the non-obstruction state and the obstruction state at a predetermined cycle. Note that in Figure 71, the obstruction state is indicated by the baffle plate 701 being shown with diagonal lines, and in Figure 72, the non-obstruction state is indicated by the baffle plate 701 being shown with white outlines.

Here, the MPU 52 has a high-frequency interference mode in which the baffle plate 701 is set to a non-obstruction state for a short period of time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) and to a long period of time (e.g., 0.7 seconds) when it is set to an interference state, thereby frequently interfering with game balls reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H, and a low-frequency interference mode in which the baffle plate 701 is set to a non-obstruction state for a long period of time (e.g., 0.7 seconds) and to a short period of time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) when it is set to an interference state, thereby frequently interfering with game balls reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.

When the MPU 52 detects a transition in the rotation state of the second plate 783 from a substantially horizontal state to an upright state of the second plate 783, it executes a lottery to select either the high-frequency obstruction mode or the low-frequency obstruction mode, and executes drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 in the mode that is selected in the lottery. Note that the MPU 52 executes a lottery to select the high-frequency obstruction mode or the low-frequency obstruction mode with a 50% probability for each mode, but it may also execute a lottery to select with a different probability.

When the MPU 52 sets the baffle plate 701 to the obstructing state, the subsequent game ball BA2 is obstructed by the baffle plate 701 and cannot reach the stage sorting mechanism 73H, as shown in Fig. 71. In this case, the subsequent game ball BA2 passes through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 and is sorted to the lower stage 72.
Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding horizontally to the left. However, since the baffle plate 701 is provided at a position vertically above the tip of the second plate-shaped portion 786, the game balls blocked by the baffle plate 701 will not collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782.

In contrast, when the MPU 52 sets the baffle plate 701 to a non-obstructive state, the subsequent game ball BA2 reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73H without being obstructed by the baffle plate 701, as shown in FIG. 72 . However, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, and therefore the subsequent game ball BA2 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73H cannot be rolled. Furthermore, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78 does not rotate about the rotation shaft 781 due to the engagement between the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74, and therefore the subsequent game ball BA2 is not distributed to the upper stage 71. Specifically, the subsequent game ball BA2 is distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782.
Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes horizontally to the left. Therefore, a subsequent game ball BA2 that is distributed to the lower stage 72 through a gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. Note that the length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is set so that, when the baffle plate 701 is set to the non-obstruction state by the MPU 52, the proportion of game balls that collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls that are distributed to the lower stage 72 is approximately 20%, but may be set to a different proportion.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, and the rotation member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure). In addition, each of the plates 783 and 784 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotation shaft 781.
When the game ball BA2 hits the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation axis 781, and the end face of the second plate 783 opposite the rotation axis 781 engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, stopping the rotation. This returns the rotating member 78 to the state shown in FIG.
It should be noted that when the MPU 52 detects the rotation state of the second plate 783 in an upright state and then detects the rotation about the rotation shaft 781, it immediately executes the drive control of the baffle drive unit 702 to set the baffle 701 to a non-obstructive state, so that the rotation about the rotation shaft 781 is not obstructed by the baffle 701.

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the second game state has a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) in which the first game state generating means generates the first game state based on a first probability, and a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) in which the first game state generating means generates the first game state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

Therefore, in this reference form, the first probability state indirectly specifies that in the first game state, the second game state is generated in the second game state generating means based on the first probability by generating the first game state in the first game state based on the first probability.
In addition, in this reference form, the second probability state indirectly specifies that in the first game state, the second game state generating means generates the second game state based on the second probability by causing the first game state generating means to generate the first game state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability in the second game state.

In other words, in this reference form, the first game state has a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate a second game state based on a first probability, and a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) that causes the second game state generating means to generate a second game state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.
In this embodiment, the first probability state and the second probability state indirectly define the second game state to be generated in the second game state generating means based on the first probability and the second probability, but they may also be defined directly. In short, the first game state may have a first probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on the first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second game state generating means to generate the second game state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

Accordingly, the first gaming state has a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and play in the hope that the second probability state will be reached. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those of the embodiment D, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(12) The first gaming state has a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability higher than the first probability, so that the player pays attention to the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and plays in the hope that the second probability state will be reached. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the second game state has the first probability state and the second probability state by differentiating the periods during which the baffle plate 701 is set to the non-obstruction state and the obstruction state, but any configuration may be adopted as long as the probability of generating the first game state can be different in the first game state generating means. For example, the second game state may be a state in which the baffle plate 701 is set to the obstruction state as the first probability state, and a state in which the baffle plate 701 is set to the non-obstruction state as the second probability state.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second game state has the first probability state and the second probability state by setting the baffle plate 701 to the non-obstruction state and the obstruction state, but as long as the probability of generating the first game state can be made different in the first game state generating means, a configuration different from the baffle plate 701 may be adopted. For example, the second game state may be such that a motor is attached to the rotating shaft 781 instead of the baffle plate 701, and a state in which a large load is applied to the rotating shaft 781 making it difficult to rotate is the first probability state, and a state in which a small load is applied to the rotating shaft 781 making it easy to rotate is the second probability state.

[Reference form I]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 73 is a front view of a game board according to Reference Form I of the present invention.
In the reference form, the game board 2 was equipped with a variable winning device 27, a cover 29 arranged to cover the front side of the variable winning device 27, and a through gate 31 arranged on the right side of the center.
In contrast, in this reference form, the game board 2 is equipped with a lower right game means 8 provided in the area on the lower right side of the pattern display device 36, as shown in Figure 73, and this lower right game means 8 differs from the above reference form in that it is equipped with a variable winning device 27I, a cover 29I, and a through gate 31I.
Furthermore, the player can hit the ball to the right by rotating the launch handle 16 to the maximum extent, thereby shifting the position at the top of the game area where the game ball reaches from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and directing the game ball to the lower right game means 8.

The game board 2 has multiple large and small openings in the game area that are formed by routing to penetrate the game balls in the front-to-back direction. Each opening on the game board 2 is equipped with a general winning opening 24, an upper operating opening (first starting ball entry means) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entry means) 26, a variable winning device 27I, and an outlet 28, 281. The game board 2 also has through gates 31, 31I on the left and right sides of the center, a main display device 32 on the upper right, and a variable display unit 33 in the center. The game board 2 also has numerous nails NL planted in the game area to appropriately disperse or adjust the direction in which the game balls fall, as well as various other components (gimmicks) such as windmills.

Each of the various winning openings, including the general winning opening 24, upper operating opening 25, lower operating opening 26, and variable winning device 27I, is equipped with detection sensors 301-304 (see Figure 78) that detect the entry of game balls. These detection sensors 301-304 are arranged on the back side of the gaming board 2. Specifically, the general winning opening 24 is equipped with detection sensor 301, the upper operating opening 25 is equipped with detection sensor 302, the lower operating opening 26 is equipped with detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27I is equipped with detection sensor 304. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-304. Note that the detection sensors 301-304 may be any type capable of individually detecting the entry of game balls; for example, electromagnetic induction proximity sensors may be used.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 will pay out 10 prize balls if a ball lands in the general winning opening 24. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 3 prize balls if a ball lands in the upper operating opening 25 and if a ball lands in the lower operating opening 26. The pachinko machine 1 will pay out 15 prize balls if a ball lands in the variable winning device 27I. Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in each operating opening 25, 26 may be different.

Figure 74 is an enlarged front view of the game board, enlarging the area around the lower right gaming means. In Figure 74, the vertical direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and the two axes perpendicular to the Z-axis are defined as the X- and Y-axes. This also applies to the following drawings.
The lower right game means 8 is equipped with the variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I described above, and also, as shown in Figure 74, a crane 81 provided in the area below the pattern display device 36, a rotation distribution means 82 provided in the area to the right of the crane 81, an open start port 83 provided on the lower right side of the rotation distribution means 82, an open winning device 84 provided in the area below the open start port 83, adjacent to the right side of the variable winning device 27I, an outlet 281 provided in the area to the right of the open winning device 84, and a variable winning through gate 85 provided in the area to the left of the through gate 31I.

Variable winning device 27I is equipped with a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing large winning opening 271, and a variable winning drive unit 273 that drives opening/closing door 272. In other words, variable winning device 27I has the same configuration as variable winning device 27 in the reference embodiment, except for its position.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotational amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the variable winning device 27I.

Here, the cover 29I is provided in the area below the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84, and includes an opaque panel 292 formed to be opaque.
Therefore, the player can see the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84 from the front through the window portion 122.
In this reference form, the cover 29I is provided with only an opaque panel 292, but as in the above-mentioned reference form, it may also be provided with a transparent panel that is transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 27I and the open winning device 84 can be seen from the front side.

The big prize opening 271 is located in an opening formed in the gaming area by router processing, penetrating it in the front-to-rear direction. As mentioned above, this big prize opening 271 is equipped with a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of gaming balls. Based on the detection results, the pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in the shape of a rectangular plate and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the special prize opening 271. The opening/closing door 272 has a closed state in which it advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2, thereby closing the opening of the special prize opening 271, and an open state in which it retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 and is buried in the game board 2, thereby opening the opening of the special prize opening 271.
The variable winning drive unit 273 drives the opening/closing door 272 to set the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot enter, but when a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in an internal lottery and the mode is transitioned to, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which game balls can enter.
The open/close execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the open/close door 272 is set to an open state, allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening 271. In the open/close execution mode, the period from when the open/close door 272 is set to an open state until when it is set to a closed state again is called one round of play.

The outlet 281 is located in the area to the right of the open winning device 84. Gaming balls that flow down to the right of the open winning device 84 are discharged from the gaming area through this outlet 281. The flow path of the outlet 281 merges with the flow path of the outlet 28, and gaming balls that pass through the outlet 281 are detected by a detection sensor 305 (see Figure 78) that detects the entry of gaming balls. Note that when a ball enters the outlet 281, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning ports.

The through gate 31I has the same configuration as the through gate 31 in the reference embodiment, except for its position. Specifically, the through gate 31I has a detection sensor 306 (see Figure 78) that detects the entry of game balls, and this detection sensor 306 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters each through gate 31, 31I, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning slots.

Here, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a game ball being discharged from the game area after passing through an opening, but also a game ball continuing to flow down the game area after passing through an opening without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish game balls entering through outlets 28, 281, game balls entering various winning openings will also be referred to as winning. Furthermore, a game ball entering through gates 31, 31I or variable winning through gate 85 refers to a game ball continuing to flow down the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area without being discharged. Entry into through gates 31, 31I or variable winning through gate 85 will also be referred to as winning, just like entry into various winning openings.

FIG. 75 is an enlarged plan view of the crane as seen from vertically above.
As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the crane 81 comprises a guide rail 811 that guides the game balls that have flowed down to the left side of the rotary sorting means 82 to the crane 81, a disc-shaped turning surface 812 that rotates the game balls that have been guided to the crane 81 via the guide rail 811, and a side wall 813 that is provided along the periphery of the turning surface 812.
The guide rail 811 guides the game ball along the side wall 813 to the turning surface 812 .

The swivel surface 812 has three holes 814 to 816 formed at a predetermined distance from its center and equally spaced from one another, and a protrusion 817 formed at its center and having three side surfaces that slope downward as they approach the holes 814 to 816. The swivel surface 812 also slopes downward as it approaches the holes 814 to 816 from the side wall 813 (see FIG. 74).
Therefore, the game ball guided to the crane 81 via the guide rail 811 will rotate around the rotating surface 812 along the side wall 813, and then enter one of the holes 814 to 816 (see arrow A in Figure 75).

As shown in Figure 74, the crane 81 also includes a guide tube 818 that guides a game ball that has entered hole 814 and causes it to enter variable winning through gate 85 via hole 801 formed in the game area, and a guide tube 819 that guides a game ball that has entered holes 815 and 816 and causes it to enter through gate 31I via hole 802 formed in the game area.

The rotation distribution means 82 includes a rotating body 821 formed in a generally V-shape, a rotating shaft 822 that rotatably supports the rotating body 821, and a rotating body drive unit 823 that drives the rotating body 821. The game board 2 has a hole 803 formed in the area above the rotating body 821.
The rotating body 821 is formed on the +Z axis direction side and has a guide surface 824 formed in a V shape by combining two inclined surfaces, a guide surface 825 formed on the +X axis direction side, and a guide surface 826 formed on the -X axis direction side.

Figure 76 is a diagram showing a crane guide state in which the rotating body is rotated. Figure 77 is a diagram showing a starting port guide state in which the rotating body is rotated.
As shown in Figures 74, 76 and 77, the rotating body 821 has three guiding states: a normal guiding state, a crane guiding state and a starting port guiding state.
In the normal guidance state, as shown in Figure 74, the rotating body 821 guides the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 into the hole 803 by rotating the rotating body 821 around the rotation axis 822 and positioning the guide surface 824 on the +Z axis direction and stopping it (see arrow B in the figure).

Here, the guide surface 824 is inclined downward as it approaches the -Y axis direction, so that the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 is guided into the hole 803 by utilizing this inclination.
The rotary sorting means 82 also includes a guide pipe 827 that guides the game ball that has entered the hole 803 and causes it to enter the through gate 31I via the hole 802 formed in the game area.

In the crane guidance state, as shown in Figure 76, the rotating body 821 rotates around the rotation axis 822 to position the guide surface 825 on the +Z axis direction side, thereby guiding the game balls flowing down toward the rotating body 821 to the guide rail 811 of the crane 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
In the start port guide state, as shown in Figure 77, the rotating body 821 rotates around the rotation axis 822 to position the guide surface 826 on the +Z axis direction side, thereby guiding the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

The rotating body driving unit 823 drives the rotating body 821 to set the rotating body 821 to either the normal guiding state or the specific guiding state.
In the normal guide state, the rotating body drive unit 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotation shaft 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the +Z axis direction side and stop it.
In the specific guidance state, the rotating body drive unit 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotation axis 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the -Z axis direction side, and then rotates the rotating body 821 to swing back and forth between the crane guidance state (see Figure 76) and the starting port guidance state (see Figure 77) so that it swings back and forth from side to side.

The opening start opening 83 is located in an opening formed in the game area by router processing so as to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. This opening start opening 83 is equipped with a detection sensor 307I (see Figure 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 307I is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Based on the detection result, the pachinko machine 1 opens the opening winning device 84. Note that when a ball enters the opening start opening 83, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning openings.

The open winning device 84 is equipped with an open winning port 841 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening/closing door 842 for opening and closing the open winning port 841, and an open winning drive unit 843 that drives the opening/closing door 842.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotation amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the open winning device 84.

The open winning opening 841 is located in an opening formed in the game area by router processing so as to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. This open winning opening 841 is equipped with a detection sensor 308I (see Figure 78) that detects the entry of game balls, and this detection sensor 308I is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results. Specifically, when a ball enters the open winning opening 841, the pachinko machine 1 pays out 15 prize balls.

The opening/closing door 842 is formed in a roughly flat plate shape with a wave-like surface on the vertically upper side, and is attached to the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the open winning opening 841. This opening/closing door 842 has two states: a closed state in which it advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2, thereby closing the opening of the open winning opening 841, and an open state in which it retreats toward the interior of the game board 2 and is buried in the game board 2, thereby opening the opening of the open winning opening 841.

The open winning drive unit 843 drives the opening/closing door 842 to set the opening/closing door 842 to either an open state or a closed state.
Specifically, the opening/closing door 842 is normally set to a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, but when the game ball enters the opening start opening 83, the opening/closing door 842 is set to an open state in which the game ball can enter under certain conditions.

Here, the plate surface on the vertically upper side of the opening/closing door 842 is formed in a wavy shape, so that the game ball moves to the left over time while swaying on this plate surface, and the opening/closing door 842 can hold multiple game balls until it is set to an open state based on the game ball entering the opening start port 83.
In addition, since the opening/closing door 842 of the open winning device 84 is located adjacent to the right side of the opening/closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27I, the game ball moves to the left over time while being swayed on the surface of the opening/closing door 842, and then moves to the left along the surface of the opening/closing door 272.

The variable winning through gate 85 is equipped with a detection sensor 309I (see FIG. 78) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 309I is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. When a ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out any prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning slots.
The variable winning through gate 85 becomes a trigger for starting a round game when it wins the internal lottery to switch to the open/close execution mode and switches to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 wins the internal lottery to switch to the open/close execution mode and switches to the open/close execution mode, and a ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, it sets the open/close door 272 to the open state and starts the execution of a predetermined number of round games.

<Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine>
Figure 78 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in Figure 78, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control device 4, an audio/light emitting control device 5, and a display control device 6, which are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 1 also has a payout control device 46 and a power/launch control device 47, which are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control to cause the payout device 48 described above to pay out game balls. The power/launch control device 47 executes launch control to cause the game ball launching mechanism 49 described above to launch game balls.

The main control device 4 is equipped with a main control board 41 that handles the main control of the game (main control), and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 4 also has a board box that houses the main control board 41 and other components. This board box may be equipped with a trace means that leaves a trace when it is opened, or a trace structure that leaves a trace when it is opened. Specifically, the trace means may be configured such that the board box is formed by joining multiple case bodies, and that joining sections (crimped sections) that require destruction of specific locations when the case bodies are separated, or a seal sticker that spans the boundaries between multiple case bodies, leaving a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the adhesive object when peeled off, may be attached. Furthermore, the trace structure may be configured such that an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42. The MPU 42 is a chip-integrated device that includes, in addition to the ROM 43 and RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that serves as a random number generator.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and RAM 44 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of the other control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information. The ROM 43 has various areas such as a win/loss table storage area 431, an allocation table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 43 is executed, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 44 has various areas such as a counter area 441, a reserved ball storage area 442, and an electric role reserved area 443.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45 provided in the main control unit 4 and to multiple detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45, the payout control unit 46, and the audio/light emitting control unit 5. The output port of the MPU 42 is also connected to the electric device drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric device 261 of the lower operating port 26, the variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening/closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27I, the open winning drive unit 843 that opens and closes the opening/closing door 842 of the open winning device 84, the main display unit 34, and the device display unit 35.

The main control board 41 also has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 controls the operation of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the electric role drive unit 262 to open and close the electric role 261. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the variable prize drive unit 273 to open and close the large prize opening 271. The MPU 42 also controls the operation of the open prize drive unit 843 to open and close the open prize opening 841. During each game, the MPU 42 controls the display of the main display unit 34 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at each operating port 25, 26. The MPU 42 also controls the display of the role display unit 35 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at each through gate 31, 31I.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply and launch control device 47, which has the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 V DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 47. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301-306 and 307I-309I are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the various winning ports of the general winning port 24, the upper operating port 25, the lower operating port 26, the variable winning device 27I, and the open winning device 84, as well as the outlets 28 and 281, the through gates 31 and 31I, the open start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-306 and 307I-309I, the MPU 42 performs winning determinations (ball-entry determinations) for the various winning ports, the outlets 28 and 281, the through gates 31 and 31I, the open start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85. The MPU 42 also performs an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control to have the payout device 48 pay out prize balls and loan balls (game balls loaned to players during play) based on commands (control instructions) sent from the main control device 4.

The power supply and firing control device 47 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) at, for example, an amusement facility. The power supply and firing control device 47 generates the operating power required for the main control board 41, payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and supplies the generated operating power. The power supply and firing control device 47 is also equipped with a power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply unit for use in the event of a power outage supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4, even in the event of a power outage in which the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

The power supply and launch control device 47 also executes launch control, causing the game ball launch mechanism 49 to launch game balls. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feed device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail, and a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail toward the guide rail 23. When predetermined launch conditions are met, the power supply and launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid, causing the game balls to be launched.

FIG. 79 shows an allocation table that stores random number values related to allocation destinations for each type of jackpot.
In this embodiment, the first and second allocation tables are different from those in the previous embodiment.
Specifically, the random number values relating to the allocation destination of each type of jackpot are stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in an allocation table storage area 432 (see FIG. 78) of a ROM 43 provided as allocation information group storage means, as shown in FIG. 79. The allocation table includes a first allocation table (first allocation information group) shown in FIG. 79(a) and a second allocation table (second allocation information group) shown in FIG. 79(b).
The MPU 42 compares these distribution tables with the value of the big win type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 to execute a lottery for determining the type of big win.

The first allocation table is a table that is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the reserve area Ra for the first result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning the upper operating port 25.
79(a), the first allocation table allocates multiple allocation results, including "low probability result (special allocation result corresponding to low probability),""non-explicit few-round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to few rounds),""explicit few-round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to few rounds)," and "most favorable result (special allocation result corresponding to high probability)." Specifically, in the first allocation table, of the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is allocated to "low probability result,""10 to 14" is allocated to "non-explicit few-round high probability result,""15 to 19" is allocated to "explicit few-round high probability result," and "20 to 29" is allocated to "most favorable result."

The second allocation table is a table that is referenced when a lottery is conducted to determine the type of jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the reserve area Rb for the second result display section to the execution area AE, i.e., the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning the lower operating port 26.
79(b), the second allocation table allocates three allocation results, namely, a "low probability result," a "most advantageous result," and a "most advantageous result with special game." Specifically, in the second allocation table, of the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" is allocated to the "low probability result,""10 to 14" is allocated to the "most advantageous result," and "15 to 29" is allocated to the "most advantageous result with special game."
Here, the "most advantageous result with special game" differs from the "most advantageous result" in that a special game is added by the lower right game means 8, and in the pachinko machine 1, the "most advantageous result with special game" is treated the same as the "most advantageous result" except for this point. The special game by the lower right game means 8 will be explained in detail later.

The respective allocation results differ in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win/lose lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed (2) Support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is completed (3) Opening/closing control mode of the variable winning device 27I in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the winning/losing lottery modes (1) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the win/loss lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the win/loss lottery mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win."
The "High Probability Result of Non-Specified Few Rounds,""High Probability Result of Specified Few Rounds,""Most Advantageous Result," and "Most Advantageous Result with Special Game" are distribution results in which the winning/losing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This high frequency support mode transitions to the low frequency support mode when the number of times of play reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The "non-explicit few rounds high probability result" is an allocation result that maintains the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening and closing execution mode was the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode will continue at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."
The "high probability result with fewer rounds,""most advantageous result," and "most advantageous result with special game" are allocation results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode, regardless of the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. This high frequency support mode continues at least until the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win."

The differences in the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 27I in the opening and closing execution mode (3) will be explained in detail later.

In this embodiment, the main control device 4 performs different processing than in the previous embodiment. Below, we will explain the details of various processes in this embodiment that differ from those in the previous embodiment.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 42 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S107I as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes a read process for the multiple detection sensors 301-306 and 307I-309I. In this read process, the MPU 42 reads the statuses of the multiple detection sensors 301-306 and 307I-309I, determines the statuses, and stores the statuses in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. If the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensors 301-304 and 308I corresponding to the various winning slots have detected the entry of a game ball, it sets a prize ball command for issuing a payout instruction for the prize balls and transmits this set command to the payout control device 46. For example, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 308I corresponding to the open winning device 84 has detected the entry of a game ball, it transmits a prize ball command for issuing a specific unit number of 15 prize balls to the payout control device 46.
In addition, the payout control device 46 performs payout control to cause the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command sent from the MPU 42.

In step S102, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 to the previous value, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the random number initial value counter CINI has reached its maximum value when the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous value, it clears the random number initial value counter CINI by returning it to 0.

In step S103, the MPU 42 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric feature release counter C4 by adding 1 to each of them, and stores the updated values in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the maximum value has been reached when the MPU 42 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the MPU 42 clears the values of the counters C1 to C4 by resetting them to 0.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for through play. In this winning process for through play, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensors 306 corresponding to the respective through gates 31, 31I have detected the winning of a game ball, the MPU 42 stores the value of the electric role opening counter C4 updated in step S103 in the electric role reserve area 443. In addition, the MPU 42 sets a command for turning on the third reserve lamp unit 373 and transmits this set command to the sound and light emission control device 5.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the third reserve lamp unit 373 based on a command sent from the MPU 42. As described above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in each through gate 31, 31I is four, and the third reserve lamp unit 373 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the activation port.

In step S106I, the MPU 42 executes a winning process for a variable win. In this winning process for a variable win, if the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 309I corresponding to the variable win through gate 85 has detected the winning of a gaming ball, the MPU 42 sets a variable win flag in the RAM 44. This variable win flag is a flag for identifying the occurrence of a ball entering the variable win through gate 85.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by assigning 1 to a predetermined area such as the RAM 44, and clears various flags by assigning 0. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets a variable prize flag by assigning 1 to a predetermined area of the RAM 44, and clears the variable prize flag by assigning 0 to the predetermined area of the RAM 44.

In step S107I, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the open winning.
The winning process for the open prize will be described in detail below.

<Open prize winning process>
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the open prize.
In the winning process for the open winning, the MPU 42 executes steps S4001 to S4004 as shown in FIG.
In step S4001, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the open start opening 83 by determining whether or not the detection sensor 307I corresponding to the open start opening 83 has detected the entry of a game ball.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S4001 that the game ball has not entered the opening start opening 83, it terminates the winning process for the opening winning without executing the processes from step S4002 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S4001 that the gaming ball has entered the opening start hole 83, it determines in step S4002 whether or not a special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44. This special game in progress flag is a flag for specifying that a special game is being executed by the lower-right gaming means 8.
The MPU 42 determines whether or not a special game is being played by referring to a special game flag stored in the RAM 44. The MPU 42 sets the special game flag when a special game is being played and clears the special game flag when the special game is ended. The transition to the special game and the end of the special game will be described in detail later.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S4002 that the special game in progress flag is not set, it terminates the prize winning process for the open prize without executing the processes from step S4003 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S4002 that the special game in progress flag is set, then in step S4003, it executes an opening execution process for the open winning opening 841. In this opening execution process, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the open winning driving unit 843 to set the opening/closing door 842 to an open state.
In this reference embodiment, the duration from when the opening/closing door 842 is set to the open state until when it is set to the closed state again is 0.17 seconds, but it may be a different duration, or it may be possible to switch between multiple durations specified to different lengths of time.

In step S4004, the MPU 42 sets an open winning command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the open winning command set in step S4004 to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the open winning processing.
In addition, based on the open winning command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognizes that the opening and closing door 842 has been set to the open state and executes a predetermined process.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start processing.
In the fluctuation start processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in Fig. 82. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 42 differs from the above-mentioned embodiment in that it executes step S711I instead of step S711.

In step S711I, the MPU 42 sets a flag corresponding to the allocation result determined in step S709 in the RAM 44. Specifically, if the MPU 42 determines that the allocation result is a "low probability result," it sets a low probability result flag; if it determines that the allocation result is an "inexplicit low round high probability result," it sets a non-explicit low round high probability result flag; if it determines that the allocation result is an "explicit low round high probability result," it sets a explicit low round high probability result flag; if it determines that the allocation result is a "most advantageous result," it sets a most advantageous result flag; and if it determines that the allocation result is a "most advantageous result with special game," it sets a most advantageous result with special game flag. Thereafter, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S716 onwards.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 determines the allocation result by referring to these flags.

<Game status transition processing>
Figure 83 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition processing.
In the game state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in Fig. 83. Note that in this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 executes steps S815I and S816I after executing step S808, and differs from the above-mentioned reference embodiment in that it executes step S817I before executing step S811.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode.
If it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode, it executes the processes in and after step S802.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it executes the processes in and after step S817I.

First, the process (the process from step S802 onward) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the variable display has ended on the main display unit 34. If the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display unit 34 has not ended, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display of the main display unit 34 has ended, it determines in step S803 whether the winning/losing result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "jackpot win" or a "special losing result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the pass/fail result corresponds to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets an opening/closing execution mode flag in RAM 44 and then executes the processing from step S804 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result does not correspond to a transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if it determines that the win/loss result is a "normal miss result"), it terminates the game state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning/losing result is a "special losing result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the winning/losing result is a "special losing result," then in step S805, it sets "2" to the opening/closing counter SOC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter that allows the MPU 42 to determine the total number of times the large winning opening 271 of the variable winning device 27I is opened and closed when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the win/loss result is not a "special miss result," i.e., that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it determines in step S806 whether the allocation result is a low-round high-probability result (an "unspecified low-round high-probability result" or an "explicit low-round high-probability result").

If the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is a low-round, high-probability result, then in step S807 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 to "2." Furthermore, if the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the allocation result is not a low-round, high-probability result, i.e., if it determines that the allocation result is a "low-probability result," "most advantageous result," or "most advantageous result with special play," then in step S808 it sets the round counter RC to "15." This round counter RC is a counter that the MPU 42 uses to determine the number of rounds of play when transitioning to the open/close execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has multiple opening/closing execution modes with different termination conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds-defined mode to which it enters when the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," and a number-of-opening/closing-defined mode to which it enters when the win/loss result is a "special loss result."

The round count mode ends when a predetermined number of rounds have been played, where the number of rounds corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number-defined mode ends when the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or when a predetermined number of game balls have entered the large prize opening 271. Here, the total number of times the large prize opening 271 has been opened and closed corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number-defined mode does not end when the number of rounds of play has been reached.

The pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening 271 once per round of play. One round of play continues until one of the following two conditions is met. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again by meeting one of the following two conditions:
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of game balls entering the large prize slot 271 has reached a predetermined upper limit.

After executing the process of step S808, in step S815I, the MPU 42 clears the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 44. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In step S816I, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the most advantageous result flag with special game is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S816I that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set, it terminates the game state transition process.

After executing the processing of step S805 or step S807, or if it is determined in step S816I that the most advantageous result flag with special game is not set, the MPU 42 sets "1000" as the opening waiting time (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44 in step S809. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. Therefore, the opening waiting time is 2 seconds. Note that the opening waiting time is not limited to this and can be any time.

In this way, when the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/loss result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, it sets the timer counter T to the waiting time for opening regardless of the type of game result, except when it determines in step S816I that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, to the extent that the player perceives them as similar. Also, for example, the waiting time for the opening may be configured to be significantly different depending on the type of game result, such as being significantly different for a game result of a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" than for a game result other than these.

In step S810, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. The MPU 42 then terminates the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the open/close execution mode based on the opening command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process, which will be described in detail later.

Next, the process (the process from step S817I onwards) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is in the opening/closing execution mode will be described.
In step S817I, the MPU 42 executes a special game execution process.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the special game execution process.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111 as shown in FIG.
In step S4101, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the most advantageous result flag with special game is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S4101 that the most advantageous result flag with special game is not set, it ends the special game execution process without executing the processes from step S4102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S4101 that the most advantageous result flag with special game is set, it determines in step S4102 whether or not the special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S4102 that the special game in progress flag is not set, it executes the processing from step S4103 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S4102 that the special game in progress flag is set, it executes the processing from step S4106 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S4103 onward) when it is determined in step S4102 that the special game in progress flag is not set by the MPU 42 will be described.
In step S4103, the MPU 42 clears the variable winning flag stored in the RAM 44.
In step S4104, the MPU 42 sets a rotation sorting start command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the rotation sorting start command set in step S4104 to the audio and light emission control device 5.
Based on the rotation distribution start command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the specific guidance state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4105, the MPU 42 sets the special game in progress flag in the RAM 44. The MPU 42 then terminates the special game execution processing.

Next, the processing (processing from step S4106 onwards) when it is determined in step S4102 that the special game in progress flag is set by the MPU 42 will be described.
In step S4106, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a variable winning flag is set in the RAM 44. In other words, the MPU 42 executes a special game, clears the variable winning flag stored in the RAM 44 in step S4103, and then determines whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning through gate 85 and the variable winning flag has been set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S4106 that the variable winning flag is not set, it terminates the special game execution process without executing the processes in and after step S4107.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S4106 that the variable winning flag is set, it sets a rotation distribution stop command in step S4107. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the rotation distribution stop command set in step S4107 to the sound and light emission control device 5.
In addition, based on the rotation distribution stop command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the normal guidance state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4108, the MPU 42 clears the special game in progress flag stored in the RAM 44.
In step S4109, the MPU 42 sets the most advantageous result flag in the RAM 44 in place of the most advantageous result flag with special game stored in the RAM 44.

In step S4110, the MPU 42 sets "1000" as the opening wait time (wait period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter area 441 of the RAM 44. The value set in this timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the opening wait time is 2 seconds. Note that the opening wait time is not limited to this and can be any value.

In step S4111, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. Then, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open/close execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S4111 to the audio and light-emitting control device 5.
The audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the open/close execution mode based on the opening command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process, which will be described in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process, the processing from step S811 onwards will be explained with reference to Figure 83.
After executing the special game execution process in step S817I, the MPU 42 executes the big prize opening/closing process in step S811.
In step S812, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" and the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0", then in step S813 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0".

If the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0", it terminates the game state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0," then in step S814, it clears the open/close execution mode in progress flag stored in the RAM 44, and then executes transition processing at the end of the open/close execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the game state transition processing.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
85, the audio and light emission control device 5 comprises an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element that combines the ROM 53 and RAM 54 as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like, all on one chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to hold the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed, and requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 54 has various areas, such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, a rotating body drive unit 823 that rotates the rotating body 821 of the rotation distribution means 82, and the display control device 6.
Based on commands transmitted from the main control device 4, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125. Based on commands transmitted from the main control device 4, the MPU 52 also executes drive control of the rotating body drive unit 823 to rotate the rotating body 821.
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits the commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.
In this reference embodiment, the drive control of the rotating body drive unit 823 is performed by the MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5, but it may also be performed by the MPU 42 of the main control device 4 or the MPU 62 of the display control device 6.

In this embodiment, the audio and light control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processing than in the previous embodiment. Below, we will explain the various processing steps that differ in this embodiment from those in the previous embodiment.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes the processes of steps S2401 to S2412, and then executes the processes of steps S2414I to S2419I, as shown in FIG. 86, before executing the process of step S2413, in substantially the same manner as in the above-mentioned reference embodiment.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 42 have been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has not received any command, it executes the processes in and after step S2409.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that it has received each command, it determines in step S2402 whether the game result is the "most advantageous result" (including "most advantageous result with special game") or a "low probability result" based on the content of the type command.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the gaming result is the "most advantageous result" (including the "most advantageous result with special game") or a "low probability result," it executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of gaming result in step S2403. In this symbol determination process, if the MPU 52 determines that the gaming result is the "most advantageous result" (including the "most advantageous result with special game"), it determines information regarding a combination of symbols having the same odd numbers or the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally displayed on the active line L; if the MPU 52 determines that the gaming result is a "low probability result," it determines information regarding a combination of symbols having the same even numbers as the stop result to be finally displayed on the active line L. Note that odd and even numbers are determined randomly by lottery or the like.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (including the "most advantageous result with special game") or a "low probability result," then in step S2404 it determines whether the game result is a "normal losing result" based on the content of the type command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is not a "normal loss result," i.e., if the game result is one of a "special loss result," a "non-indicated low-round high-probability result," or a "indicated low-round high-probability result," it executes a common symbol determination process in step S2405. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information regarding a special symbol combination as the stop result to be ultimately displayed on the pay line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 determines a special symbol combination (e.g., "3, 4, 1") having different numbers that would not be selected in the case of a "normal loss result" in the lottery, rather than a symbol combination having the same number. Note that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is a "normal miss result," it executes a pattern determination process for a normal miss in step S2406. In this pattern determination process for a normal miss, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a reach display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will occur, it determines information relating to the combination of symbols in the reach display as a stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L. The combination of symbols in the reach display is determined randomly by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that a reach display will not occur, it determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the combinations of symbols described above as a stop result to be finally displayed on the activated line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines, by lottery or the like, a combination of symbols different from any of a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols in a reach display.

After executing any one of the processes in step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern in step S2407. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to display a preview.

In addition, based on the selected effect pattern, the MPU 52 performs the effect execution process of step S2004 described above, in which it controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and also controls the sound of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command that includes information related to the stop result determined in any one of the processes in steps S2403, S2405, and S2406. The MPU 52 then stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. These fluctuation start command and the stop result command are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process in step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for starting the variable display and displaying the stop result on the pattern display device 36 based on the variable display start command and stop result command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 starts the variable display and then finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the active line L.

After executing the process of step S2408, or if it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes of step S2409 and subsequent steps.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether or not an opening command has been received.

If it is determined in step S2409 that an opening command has been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes from step S2410 onwards, as in the above-mentioned embodiment.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S2414I onwards.

In step S2414I, the MPU 52 determines whether a rotation sorting start command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2414I that the rotation distribution start command has not been received, it executes the processes of step S2416I and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2414I that it has received a rotation sorting start command, it executes a process for determining a rotation sorting start effect in step S2415I. In the process for determining a rotation sorting start effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the rotation sorting start effect by referring to an effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53. This rotation sorting start effect is an effect for notifying the player that the rotation sorting means 82 has been set to a specific guidance state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the content of the selected performance.
In addition, in the performance execution processing of step S2004 described above, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the rotating body drive unit 823 to start the rotation of the rotating body 821, thereby setting the rotation distribution means 82 to a specific guidance state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a rotation sorting start effect command for the rotation sorting start effect determined in the rotation sorting start effect determination process of step S2415I. The MPU 52 then stores the rotation sorting start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This rotation sorting start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the rotation sorting start effect on the pattern display device 36 based on the rotation sorting start effect command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the rotation sorting start effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2415I, or if it is determined in step S2414I that a rotation sorting start command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2416I whether a rotation sorting stop command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2416I that the rotation sorting stop command has not been received, it executes the processes of step S2418I and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2416I that it has received a rotation distribution stop command, it executes a process for determining a rotation distribution stop effect in step S2417I. In the process for determining a rotation distribution stop effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the rotation distribution stop effect by referring to a table for effects pre-stored in the ROM 53. This rotation distribution stop effect is an effect for notifying the player that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the normal guidance state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the content of the selected performance.
In addition, in the performance execution processing of step S2004 described above, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the rotating body drive unit 823 to stop the rotation of the rotating body 821, thereby setting the rotation distribution means 82 to the normal guidance state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a rotational motion stop effect command related to the rotational motion stop effect determined in the rotational motion stop effect determination process of step S2417I. The MPU 52 then stores the rotational motion stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This rotational motion stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the rotational distribution stop effect on the pattern display device 36 based on the rotational distribution stop effect command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the pattern display device 36 to execute the rotational distribution stop effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2417I, or if it is determined in step S2416I that a rotation distribution stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I whether an open winning command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I that it has not received an opening winning command, it executes the processing from step S2413 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2418I that it has received the open winning command, it executes a process for determining an effect for the open winning in step S2419I. In the process for determining an effect for the open winning, the MPU 52 selects the content of the effect for the open winning by referring to a table for effects pre-stored in the ROM 53. This effect for the open winning is an effect for notifying the player that the opening/closing door 842 of the open winning device 84 has been set to the open state.

In addition, based on the content of the selected effect, the MPU 52 performs the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above, in which it controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets an open prize winning effect command for the open prize winning effect determined in the open prize winning effect determination process of step S2419I. The MPU 52 then stores the open prize winning effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This open prize winning effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the opening prize-winning effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the opening prize-winning effect command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the rendering buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the rendering buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the opening prize-winning effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2419I, or if it is determined in step S2418I that an opening winning command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processing of step S2413 and subsequent steps.

In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 52 executes processing to progress the effects for the open/close execution mode, for example, based on the open command, close command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 42. The MPU 52 then terminates the effect determination processing.

<About the special game flow>
Fig. 87 is a diagram showing the symbol display device, the variable winning device, and the open winning device before a special game is executed, and Fig. 88 is a diagram showing the symbol display device, the variable winning device, and the open winning device in a state where a special game is executed.
The MPU 42 executes a special game when a "jackpot win" is obtained in the winning/losing lottery and the MPU 42 is allocated to the "most advantageous result with special game" in the allocation lottery.
In addition, the MPU 42 can allocate to the "most favorable result with special game" in the allocation lottery only when a lottery for the type of jackpot is conducted based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 26.

First, the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting a variable display of a plurality of symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 52. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts a variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, if the result of the lottery is a "jackpot" and the result is allocated to the "most favorable result" in the allocation lottery, the MPU 62, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, displays a combination of symbols having the same numbers ("7 7 7" in this reference embodiment) stopped on the pay line L as the stop result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 52, thereby announcing the result of the lottery (see FIG. 87(A)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the open/close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result", the opening/closing execution mode transitions to a round number specified mode in which rounds of play are played with a maximum of 15 times, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long-term manner.
In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 87(B).

In the open/close execution mode, the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal guide state. Therefore, a game ball launched toward the right-hand shot route flows down toward the rotating body 821, and then is guided by the rotating body 821 to the hole 803, enters the opening start hole 83 or the outlet hole 281, or flows down toward the opening winning device 84 (see FIG. 74).
In this reference form, a game ball launched toward the right-hand hitting route can enter the open starting port 83 or the outlet 281, or flow down toward the open winning device 84, but the arrangement and spacing of the nails NL arranged vertically above the open starting port 83 can be changed so that the game ball cannot enter the open starting port 83 or the outlet 281, or flow down toward the open winning device 84.

The game ball that enters the hole 803 then passes through the guide pipe 827 into the through gate 31I, and then flows down toward the variable winning device 27I.
A game ball flowing down toward the variable winning device 27I or the open winning device 84 will win a prize in the big winning opening 271 when the big winning opening 271 is opened.
In addition, since a special game is not executed in the "most advantageous result", the opening and closing door 842 is not set to the open state based on the game ball entering the opening start port 83.

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode transitions to the high probability mode, and the support mode transitions to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right, as shown in Figure 87 (C).

Here, in the high frequency support mode, the player can increase the probability of the game ball winning at the lower operating port 26 rather than the upper operating port 25 by rotating the launch handle 16 to the maximum extent and hitting the ball to the right, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side.
Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal guide state, so that a game ball launched toward the right hitting route flows down toward the rotating body 821 and is then guided by the rotating body 821 to the hole 803 (see arrow B in Figure 74).

Then, the game ball that entered the hole 803 enters the through gate 31I through the guide pipe 827, and if the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of this through gate 31I corresponds to the transition to the electric role opening state, the electric role 261 provided in the lower operating port 26
is opened in a predetermined manner.
When a winning entry into the lower operating port 26 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game without losing too many game balls.
Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can gain an advantage in the game by firing the game ball toward the right hitting route.

Next, the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting a variable display of the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the pattern command received from the MPU 52. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts a variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment).
Then, if the winning/losing lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the allocation lottery results in the "most favorable result with special game," the MPU 62, after the high-speed fluctuation period has elapsed, displays a combination of symbols having the same numbers ("7 7 7" in this reference embodiment) stopped on the pay line L as the stopping result based on the stop result command received from the MPU 52, thereby announcing the result of the winning/losing lottery (see FIG. 87(D)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 executes the special game.
In this reference form, if the allocation lottery results in the ``most advantageous result with special game,'' the MPU 62 displays a combination of symbols having the same numbers (``7 7 7'' in this reference form) stopped on the valid line L as the stopping result, but it may also display a combination of symbols (for example, ``V V V'') different from the combination that was allocated to the ``most advantageous result'' in the allocation lottery on the valid line L.

In the "Most Advantageous Result with Special Game", the MPU 52 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to a specific guidance state based on the rotation distribution start command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.
Specifically, the MPU 52 sets the rotation distribution means 82 to a specific guidance state, and the MPU 62 announces the result of the win/lose lottery, and then executes the rotation distribution start performance selected by the MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5, as shown in Figure 88 (A).
Here, when the rotation distribution start effect is executed, the win/loss lottery mode remains set to the high probability mode, and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode because the high frequency support mode flag has been cleared by the processing of step S815I. In other words, when the rotation distribution start effect is executed, the state is the same as when the win/loss lottery results in a "jackpot win" and the distribution lottery results in an "unspecified short round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to short round)."

In the rotation distribution start effect, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right. The MPU 62 also displays an angel character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and has this character say, "Aim for the crane!!" to suggest to the player that the game ball should land in the crane.

When the rotational distribution means 82 is in the specific guidance state, the rotating body drive unit 823 rotates the rotating body 821 around the rotation axis 822 to position the guide surface 824 on the -Z axis direction side, and then rotates the rotating body 821 to swing back and forth between the crane guidance state (see Figure 76) and the starting port guidance state (see Figure 77).

In the crane guidance state, as shown in Figure 76, the rotating body 821 rotates around the rotation axis 822 to position the guide surface 825 on the +Z axis direction side, thereby guiding the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 onto the guide rail 811 of the crane 81 (see arrow B in the figure).

The game ball guided by the crane 81 rotates around the rotating surface 812 along the side wall 813, and then enters one of the holes 814 to 816 (see arrow A in Figure 75).
When a game ball enters a hole 814 of the crane 81, the game ball is guided by a guide pipe 818 to a hole 801 formed in the game area, and then discharged from the hole 801 to enter a variable winning through gate 85.

When a game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the MPU 52 recognizes that the rotation distribution means 82 has been set to the normal guidance state based on the rotation distribution stop command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.
In the rotation distribution stop effect, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right. Also, the MPU 62 displays the letter "V" on the entire screen of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, as shown in Fig. 88(B). After that, the pachinko machine 1 transitions to the open/close execution mode.

When the rotary sorting means 82 is in its normal guiding state, the rotating body 821 rotates around the rotation axis 822 as shown in Figure 74, positioning the guide surface 824 on the +Z axis direction and bringing it to a standstill, thereby guiding game balls that have flowed down toward the rotating body 821 into the hole 803 (see arrow B in the figure).

The opening/closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which rounds of play are played with a maximum of 15 times, and the opening and closing of the big prize opening 271 is executed 15 times in a long-term manner.
In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit right, as shown in Figure 88 (C).

In the open/close execution mode, the rotation distribution means 82 is set to the normal guide state. Therefore, a game ball launched toward the right-hand shot route flows down toward the rotating body 821, and then is guided by the rotating body 821 to the hole 803, enters the opening start hole 83 or the outlet hole 281, or flows down toward the opening winning device 84 (see FIG. 74).
In this reference form, a game ball launched toward the right-hand hitting route can enter the open starting port 83 or the outlet 281, or flow down toward the open winning device 84, but the arrangement and spacing of the nails NL arranged vertically above the open starting port 83 can be changed so that the game ball cannot enter the open starting port 83 or the outlet 281, or flow down toward the open winning device 84.

The game ball that enters the hole 803 then passes through the guide pipe 827 into the through gate 31I, and then flows down toward the variable winning device 27I.
A game ball flowing down toward the variable winning device 27I or the open winning device 84 will win a prize in the big winning opening 271 when the big winning opening 271 is opened.
In the opening and closing execution mode, since a special game is not being executed, the opening and closing door 842 is not set to an open state based on the entry of a game ball into the opening start port 83.

After the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/lose lottery mode transitions to the high probability mode, and the support mode transitions to the high frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right (see Figure 87 (C)).

On the other hand, when a game ball enters holes 815, 816 of the crane 81, the game ball is guided by a guide tube 819 to a hole 802 formed in the game area, and then discharged from the hole 802 to enter the through gate 31I.
In this case, the MPU 52 does not receive the rotation sorting stop command transmitted from the MPU 42, and therefore maintains the specific guidance state of the rotation sorting means 82.

In the start port guide state, as shown in Figure 77, the rotating body 821 rotates around the rotation axis 822 to position the guide surface 826 on the +Z axis direction side, thereby guiding the game ball flowing down toward the rotating body 821 to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).
The game ball guided to the open start opening 83 will enter the open start opening 83 or the outlet 281, or flow down toward the open winning device 84 (see Figure 77).
In this reference form, the game ball guided to the open start port 83 enters the open start port 83, the outlet 281, or flows down toward the open winning device 84, but it may also be designed to enter only the open start port 83.

During the execution of the special game, the opening and closing door 842 is set to the open state based on the entry of a game ball into the opening start opening 83.
When the opening/closing door 842 is set to the open state based on the entry of a game ball into the opening start port 83, the MPU 52 recognizes that the opening/closing door 842 has been set to the open state based on the opening winning command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.
Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the opening winning effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5, as shown in Figure 88 (D).

In the open winning effect, the MPU 62 displays a right-pointing arrow in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to suggest to the player to hit to the right. The MPU 62 also displays a devil character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and has this character say "Charging!!" to suggest to the player that the opening/closing door 842 has been set to the open state.
During the execution of the special game, the MPU 62 executes the open winning effect each time a gaming ball enters the opening start opening 83 until the gaming ball enters the variable winning through gate 85. When the gaming ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, the MPU 62 displays the letter "V" on the entire screen of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 as described above (see FIG. 88(B)). After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the open/close execution mode.

In this way, in this reference embodiment, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as a specific ball entry means that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game.
In addition, in this reference form, the special game execution processing functions as a specific control start means that transitions the game state to a specific control state in the main control unit 4, and then starts gameplay in the specific control state when the ball enters the variable winning through gate 85.
The lower right game means 8 functions as a special game execution means that executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to the specific control state and before starting the game in the specific control state in the special game execution processing.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a lower-right gaming means 8 that executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the game in the specific control state begins in the special game execution process, allowing the player to enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 function as special game payout means that pays out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area.
In addition, in this reference form, the crane 81 functions as a ball entry delay means that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delays the time it takes for the game ball to enter the variable winning through gate 85.
The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a special game path (right-hit route) that leads to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to this configuration, the lower right game means 8 is provided with an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84 that pay out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when playing special games.
In addition, the lower right game means 8 is equipped with a crane 81 that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, so that after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state, the time until game play in the specific control state begins can be delayed by the special game execution process.
Therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the right-hand hitting route, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

In this embodiment, the crane 81 is used as the ball entry delay means, but any configuration may be used as long as it can guide a gaming ball flowing down the play area to the variable prize-winning through gate 85 and delay the time it takes for the gaming ball to enter the variable prize-winning through gate 85. For example, in this embodiment, the crane 81 has three holes 814-816, but it may have only one hole as long as it can guide a gaming ball flowing down the play area to the variable prize-winning through gate 85 and delay the time it takes for the gaming ball to enter the variable prize-winning through gate 85. Furthermore, other mechanisms, such as a rotating body, gate mechanism, or gentle slope, may be used to guide a gaming ball flowing down the play area to the variable prize-winning through gate 85 and delay the time it takes for the gaming ball to enter the variable prize-winning through gate 85.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening start opening 83 and the opening winning device 84 are used as the special game payout means, but any configuration may be used as long as it is possible to pay out game balls when they enter the game area. For example, a big prize opening, a V prize opening, a general prize opening, or any other operating opening may be used.
In addition, in this reference form, a right-hand hit route is adopted as the special game path leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means, but a left-hand hit route may also be adopted, or other routes such as a route inside the large prize opening or a route inside the special device may also be adopted.

Here, in this reference form, the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 award a benefit to the player depending on the length of the delay time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85 using the crane 81.
Therefore, the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 also function as a period benefit awarding means that awards a benefit to the player depending on the length of the period from when the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state until the special game execution process starts the game in the specific control state.

With this configuration, the opening start opening 83 and the opening winning device 84 can award a player a benefit depending on the length of time between when the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state and when the special game execution process starts gameplay in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 are used as the periodic benefit awarding means, and after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to the specific control state, the opening count of the opening winning device 84 is increased depending on the length of the period before game play in the specific control state begins in the special game execution process, thereby increasing the number of game balls and awarding a benefit to the player. However, anything that can award a benefit to the player may be awarded to the player. For example, useful information for the player may be provided, or a situation that allows the player to play the pachinko machine 1 advantageously may be provided.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the open start opening 83 functions as a special game ball entry means that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and the open winning device 84 functions as a game ball payout means that pays out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter. The open winning device 84 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter when a game ball enters the open start opening 83.

With this configuration, the open winning device 84 is set up to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter when they enter the open start opening 83, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the open start opening 83. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the open winning device 84 has a non-restricted state in which it does not restrict the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area as enterable when the game ball enters the open start port 83, and a restricted state in which it restricts the setting of the game ball flowing down the game area as enterable when the game ball enters the open start port 83. Specifically, the open winning device 84 is in the non-restricted state when a special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44, and is in the restricted state when the special game in progress flag is not set in the RAM 44.
The winning process for the open prize functions as a regulated state switching means that switches the open prize winning device 84 to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and switches the open prize winning device 84 to a regulated state when a special game is not being played (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a prize-winning process for open prizes that switches the open prize-winning device 84 to a non-restricted state when a special game is being played, and switches the open prize-winning device 84 to a restricted state when a special game is not being played. This allows the player to fire game balls aiming at the open start hole 83 when a special game is being played, and not to fire game balls aiming at the open start hole 83 when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, the open winning device 84 has a non-restrictive state in which it does not restrict the game ball flowing down the game area from being set as enterable when the game ball enters the open starting port 83, and a restricted state in which it restricts the game ball flowing down the game area from being set as enterable when the game ball enters the open starting port 83.The winning process for open winning switches the open winning device 84 to the non-restrictive state when a special game is being played, and switches the open winning device 84 to the restricted state when a special game is not being played.

In contrast, the open winning device 84 may have a first ball-entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period of time from when a game ball enters the open start opening 83 until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter, and a second ball-entry waiting period, which is a period of time longer than the predetermined period of time from when a game ball enters the open start opening 83 until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter. When configured in this way, the pachinko machine 1 may be equipped with a ball-entry waiting period switching means that switches the open winning device 84 to the first ball-entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and switches the open winning device 84 to the second ball-entry waiting period when a special game is not being played.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the open winning device 84 to the first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and switches the open winning device 84 to the second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played.This allows the player to fire game balls aiming at the open start hole 83 when a special game is being played, and not to fire game balls aiming at the open start hole 83 when a special game is not being played.As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 has a left-hitting route (first path) that leads to the upper operating port 25 and the lower operating port 26, and a right-hitting route (second path) that leads to the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 and is different from the left-hitting route.
The aforementioned restriction state switching means and ball entry waiting period switching means function as launch suppression means that suppress the launch of game balls toward the right-hand hitting route by switching the state of the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84.

With this configuration, the launch suppression means switches the state of the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 to prevent the game ball from being launched toward the right-hand hit route, so that the player will not aim for the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 and launch the game ball toward the right-hand hit route. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

In this reference embodiment, the launch suppression means suppresses the launch of a game ball toward the right-hand hit route by switching the open winning device 84 to a non-restricted state or a restricted state, or by switching the open winning device 84 to a first ball-entry waiting period or a second ball-entry waiting period. However, any state of the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 may be switched as long as the launch of a game ball toward the right-hand hit route can be suppressed by switching the state of the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84. For example, the launch suppression means may suppress the launch of a game ball toward the right-hand hit route by switching the length of time for which the open winning device 84 is set to allow ball entry.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the crane 81 has a swivel surface 812 that rotates the game ball. The hole 814 functions as a guide hole that allows the game ball rotating on the swivel surface 812 to be guided to the variable prize-winning through gate 85, and the holes 815 and 816 function as non-guidance holes that prevent the game ball rotating on the swivel surface 812 from being guided to the variable prize-winning through gate 85.

With this configuration, the crane 81 is equipped with a hole 814 that allows a game ball revolving on the revolving surface 812 to be guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and holes 815 and 816 that prevent a game ball revolving on the revolving surface 812 from being guided to the variable winning through gate 85. Therefore, after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state, the time until game play in the specific control state begins can be delayed by the special game execution process, thereby simplifying the configuration of the crane 81.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 functions as a special distribution means that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a rotation distribution means 82 that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so players play in the hope that the rotation distribution means 82 will distribute the game balls to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, a rotational distribution means 82 is used as the special distribution means, but any configuration may be used as long as it can distribute game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

In addition, in this reference form, the rotational distribution means 82 has a distribution-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, and a distribution-disabled state (normal guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
The special game execution process functions as a distribution state switching means that switches the rotation distribution means 82 to a specific guidance state when a special game is being executed (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and switches the rotation distribution means 82 to a normal guidance state when a special game is not being executed (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a special game execution process that switches the rotation allocation means 82 to a specific guidance state when a special game is being played (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and switches the rotation allocation means 82 to a normal guidance state when a special game is not being played (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44).This means that players will play in the hope that the rotation allocation means 82 will be switched to the specific guidance state during the special game execution process.As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route so that in the specific guidance state, the game balls are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the front surface of the game board 2, and in the normal guidance state, the game balls are distributed so that they are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2.

With this configuration, the rotation distribution means 82 is configured so that in the specific guidance state, game balls are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the front side of the game board 2, and in the normal guidance state, game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back side of the game board 2, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to diversify the flow of game balls.

Here, in this reference form, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 also function as a specific benefit granting means that grants a benefit to a player based on the game balls that have been allocated to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary allocation means 82 before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, after the rotary allocation means 82 allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85.
In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is configured in this way, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable prize entry through gate 85 that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and any means can be used as long as it can enter a game ball flowing down the game area. For example, the specific ball entry means may be a big prize entry port, a V prize entry port, a general prize entry port, or each operating port.
Furthermore, the specific benefit granting means does not have to be the opening start port 83 and the opening winning device 84 that pay out game balls when they enter the game area as they flow down the game area, and as long as it can grant a benefit to the player, it may grant information that is useful to the player, or it may grant a situation that allows the player to play the pachinko machine 1 advantageously, or it may grant anything.

With this configuration, the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 award a profit to the player based on the game balls that have been allocated to the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary allocation means 82 before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85 after the rotary allocation means 82 allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85. This allows the player to enjoy the profits awarded by the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this reference form, the rotation distribution means 82 distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hitting route so that, in the specific guidance state, the game balls are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the front surface of the game board 2, and in the normal guidance state, the game balls are distributed so that the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a rotary sorting means 82 that sorts game balls flowing down the game area into either a first sorting flow path or a second sorting flow path. The rotary sorting means 82 sorts game balls into the first sorting flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board 2, and sorts game balls into the second sorting flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2.

With this configuration, the rotary distribution means 82 distributes game balls to the first distribution flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board 2, and distributes game balls to the second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to diversify the flow of game balls.

In this reference embodiment, the first distribution flow path employs a flow path leading to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, and the second distribution flow path employs a flow path that does not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means. However, any flow path may be employed for the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path. For example, the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path may be a flow path leading to a large prize opening, a flow path leading to a V prize opening, a flow path leading to a general prize opening, a flow path leading to each operating port, or a flow path leading to a through gate. Furthermore, these flow paths may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize opening or inside a special device.

Here, in this reference form, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as a primary ball entry area that gives the player the primary benefit of starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and the flow path in the crane guidance state functions as a primary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this primary ball entry area.
In addition, the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 function as a secondary ball entry area that provides the player with a secondary benefit (a benefit smaller than the primary benefit) of having 15 prize balls paid out when a ball enters the open winning port 841, and the flow path in the starting port induction state functions as a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this secondary ball entry area.
Furthermore, the lower operating port 26 and the outlet 28 function as a tertiary ball entry area that grants the player a tertiary benefit (a benefit smaller than the secondary benefit) of not paying out prize balls when a ball enters the lower operating port 26, and a tertiary ball entry area that grants the player a tertiary benefit (a benefit smaller than the secondary benefit) of not paying out prize balls when a ball enters the outlet 28, and the flow path in the normal guidance state functions as a tertiary flow path that allows game balls to enter this tertiary ball entry area.
The rotary distribution means 82 has an operating state (specific guiding state) that allows game balls to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state (normal guiding state) that allows game balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and functions as an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (the start of a special game).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a specific induction state that allows game balls to flow down either the crane induction state flow path or the start port induction state flow path, and a normal induction state that allows game balls to flow down the normal induction state flow path. It is equipped with a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of specified operating conditions, so players play in the hope that the normal induction state will change to the specific induction state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, the flow paths in the crane guidance state, the starting port guidance state, and the normal guidance state are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the game board 2. Specifically, the flow paths in the crane guidance state and the starting port guidance state form flow paths on the front side of the game board 2, while the flow path in the normal guidance state forms a flow path on the back side of the game board 2.

With this configuration, the flow path in the crane guidance state, the flow path in the starting port guidance state, and the flow path in the normal guidance state are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the game board 2, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to diversify the flow of game balls. Furthermore, even when three flow paths must be formed in the flow path when a game ball is launched toward one route - a flow path in the crane guidance state, a flow path in the starting port guidance state, and a flow path in the normal guidance state - the pachinko machine 1 can effectively utilize the limited space on the game board 2 to efficiently form the flow paths.

In this reference form, the flow path in the crane guidance state, the flow path in the starting port guidance state, and the flow path in the normal guidance state have different surfaces that form the three flow paths in the front and back directions of the game board 2, but the number of flow paths does not have to be three, and can be two or more.
In addition, in this reference form, the flow path in the crane guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state form a flow path on the surface of the game board 2, and the flow path in the normal guidance state forms a flow path on the back surface of the game board 2, but the surface forming the flow path in the front-to-back direction of the game board 2 may be the opposite.

Here, in this reference form, the flow path in the crane guidance state is equipped with a crane 81 as a ball entry delay means that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to a variable winning through gate 85 and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, if another game ball flowing down the flow path in the start port guided state enters the open start port 83 and the open prize-winning device 84 before the game ball guided to the variable prize-winning through gate 85 by the crane 81 enters the variable prize-winning through gate 85, the pachinko machine 1 immediately performs a granting process to pay out 15 prize balls and grant a secondary profit.

With this configuration, if a gaming ball guided by the crane 81 to the variable prize-winning through gate 85 enters the variable prize-winning through gate 85 and another gaming ball flowing down the flow path in the start port guidance state enters the open start port 83 and the open prize-winning device 84, the pachinko machine 1 immediately executes a payout process to award a secondary benefit. Therefore, even while waiting for the gaming ball guided by the crane 81 to enter the variable prize-winning through gate 85, the player can instantly receive the payout of 15 prize balls and enjoy the secondary benefit. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to enjoy a comfortable gameplay experience.

In this embodiment, the rotation distribution means 82 allows the game balls to flow only into either the flow path in the crane guide state or the flow path in the starting port guide state in the specific guide state. The ratio of the game balls flowing into the flow path in the crane guide state and the flow path in the starting port guide state is the same.
In contrast, the rate at which game balls flow down the flow path in the crane guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state do not have to be the same; for example, the rate at which game balls flow down the flow path in the starting port guidance state may be greater than the rate at which game balls flow down the flow path in the crane guidance state.

With this configuration, the rotation distribution means 82, in the specific guidance state, causes game balls to flow only into either the flow path in the crane guidance state or the flow path in the starting port guidance state. Since the proportion of game balls flowing into the flow path in the starting port guidance state is greater than the proportion of game balls flowing into the flow path in the crane guidance state, the player will pay attention to whether or not game balls are flowing into the flow path in the crane guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a lower-right game means 8 that executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the main control device 4 has transitioned the game state to the specific control state and before the game in the specific control state is started in the special game execution process, so that the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(2) The lower right game means 8 is equipped with an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84 that pay out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when playing special games.
In addition, the lower right game means 8 is equipped with a crane 81 that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 and delays the time until the game ball enters the variable winning through gate 85, so that after the main control device 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state, the time until game play in the specific control state begins can be delayed by the special game execution process.
Therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the right-hand hitting route, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

(3) The opening winning device 84 is set to be able to receive a game ball flowing down the game area when the game ball enters the opening start opening 83, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the opening start opening 83. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(4) The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a prize-winning process for opening and closing the prize-winning device 84 to a non-restricted state when a special game is being played, and to a restricted state when a special game is not being played, so that a player fires a game ball aiming at the opening start hole 83 when a special game is being played, and does not fire a game ball aiming at the opening start hole 83 when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(5) The crane 81 is provided with a hole 814 that allows a game ball rotating on the rotating surface 812 to be guided to the variable winning through gate 85, and holes 815 and 816 that prevent a game ball rotating on the rotating surface 812 from being guided to the variable winning through gate 85. Therefore, after the main control unit 4 transitions the game state to a specific control state, the special game execution process can delay the time until game play in the specific control state begins, thereby simplifying the configuration of the crane 81.
(6) The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a rotation distribution means 82 that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the game balls will be distributed to the special game payout means by the rotation distribution means 82. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(7) The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a special game execution process that switches the rotation allocation means 82 to a specific guidance state when a special game is being played (when a special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44), and switches the rotation allocation means 82 to a normal guidance state when a special game is not being played (when a special game in progress flag is not set in the RAM 44), so that a player plays the game in the hope that the rotation allocation means 82 will be switched to the specific guidance state in the special game execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(8) The rotation distribution means 82 is configured so that in the specific guidance state, the game balls are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the front surface of the game board 2, and in the normal guidance state, the game balls are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing through the back surface of the game board 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls.

(9) The opening start opening 83 and the opening winning device 84 can provide a player with a profit depending on the length of the period from when the main control device 4 transitions the game state to the specific control state until when the special game execution process starts the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(10) After the rotary distribution means 82 distributes game balls flowing down the game area to the variable prize-winning through gate 85, the open start opening 83 and the open prize-winning device 84 award a profit to the player based on the game balls distributed to the open start opening 83 and the open prize-winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 82 before the game balls enter the variable prize-winning through gate 85, so that the player can enjoy the profit awarded by the open start opening 83 and the open prize-winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(11) The rotary distribution means 82 distributes game balls to a first distribution flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board 2, and distributes game balls to a second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board 2, so that the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls.

(12) The pachinko machine 1 has a specific induction state in which game balls can flow down either the flow path in the crane induction state or the flow path in the start port induction state, and a normal induction state in which game balls can flow down the flow path in the normal induction state, and is equipped with a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays in the hope that the normal induction state will change from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(13) The flow path in the crane guide state, the flow path in the starting port guide state, and the flow path in the normal guide state are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the game board 2, so the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the flow of game balls. Furthermore, even if three flow paths, a flow path in the crane guide state, a flow path in the starting port guide state, and a flow path in the normal guide state, must be formed in the flow path when a game ball is launched toward one route, the pachinko machine 1 can efficiently form the flow paths by effectively utilizing the limited space of the game board 2.

(14) If, before a gaming ball guided to the variable prize-winning through gate 85 by the crane 81 enters the variable prize-winning through gate 85, another gaming ball flowing down the flow path in the start port guidance state enters the open start port 83 and the open prize-winning device 84, the pachinko machine 1 performs a granting process to immediately pay out 15 prize balls and grant a secondary benefit. Therefore, even while waiting for a gaming ball guided to the variable prize-winning through gate 85 by the crane 81 to enter the variable prize-winning through gate 85, the player can enjoy the secondary benefit by immediately paying out 15 prize balls. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

[Reference form J]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment J of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 89 is an enlarged front view of a gaming board showing the vicinity of the lower right gaming means according to Reference Form J of the present invention. In Figure 89, the vertically upward direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and the two axes perpendicular to this Z-axis are defined as the X- and Y-axes. This also applies to the following drawings.
In the reference form I, the lower right game means 8 is equipped with the variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I mentioned above, as well as a crane 81, a rotation distribution means 82, an opening start port 83, an opening winning device 84, an outlet 281, and a variable winning through gate 85.
In contrast, in this reference mode, the lower right game means 8 is different from the reference mode I in that it is provided with a movement distribution means 86J instead of the rotation distribution means 82, as shown in Figure 89. Note that this reference mode also differs from the reference mode I in that the game board 2 does not have holes 803.

The movement sorting means 86J includes a moving body 861 formed in a generally triangular prism shape, a moving shaft 862 that supports the moving body 861 so that it can move freely along the horizontal direction (X-axis direction), and a moving body drive unit 863 that drives the moving body 861. The game board 2 has an elongated hole 804 through which the moving shaft 862 is inserted and which is formed so that its longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction.
The moving body 861 has a guide surface 864 formed on the −X-axis direction side and a guide surface 865 formed on the +X-axis direction side.

Fig. 90 is a diagram showing a crane guidance state in which the moving body is moved. Fig. 91 is a diagram showing a starting port guidance state in which the moving body is moved.
As shown in Figures 89 to 91, the moving body 861 has three guidance states: a normal guidance state, a crane guidance state, and a starting port guidance state.
In the normal guidance state, as shown in Figure 89, the moving body 861 moves the moving axis 862 in the +X-axis direction to bring the guide surfaces 864, 865 to a standstill below the group of nails NL3J, thereby allowing the game ball that has flowed down between the group of nails NL3J and the group of nails NL4J to flow down and be guided to the through gate 31I (see arrow B in the figure).

In the crane guidance state, as shown in Figure 90, the moving body 861 moves the moving axis 862 toward the -X axis direction to position the guide surface 864 between the nail NL3J group and the nail NL4J group, thereby guiding the game balls flowing down toward the moving body 861 to the guide rail 811 of the crane 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
In the start port guide state, as shown in Figure 91, the movable body 861 further moves the moving axis 862 toward the -X axis direction to position the guide surface 865 between the nail NL3J group and the nail NL4J group, thereby guiding the game ball flowing down toward the movable body 861 to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

The moving body driving unit 863 drives the moving body 861 to set the moving body 861 to either the normal guidance state or the specific guidance state.
In the normal guidance state, the moving body drive unit 863 moves the moving shaft 862 in the +X-axis direction to bring the guide surfaces 864, 865 to rest below the group of nails NL3J.
In the specific guidance state, the moving body drive unit 863 moves the moving shaft 862 toward the -X axis direction to position the guide surfaces 864, 865 between the nail NL3J group and the nail NL4J group, and then moves the moving body 861 to swing back and forth between the crane guidance state (see Figure 90) and the starting port guidance state (see Figure 91).

In this reference mode, the main control device 4 executes processing differently from that in Reference Mode I. Specifically, in this reference mode, the special game execution processing differs from that in Reference Mode I. The details of the special game execution processing in this reference mode are explained below.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special game execution process.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111 as shown in Fig. 92. Note that this reference embodiment differs from the reference embodiment I in that the MPU 42 executes the process of step S4104J instead of the process of step S4104, and executes the process of step S4107J instead of the process of step S4107.

In step S4104J, the MPU 42 sets a movement allocation start command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the movement allocation start command set in step S4104J to the audio and light emission control device 5.
Based on the movement allocation start command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the movement allocation means 86J has been set to the specific guidance state, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4107J, the MPU 42 sets a movement allocation stop command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the movement allocation stop command set in step S4107J to the audio and light emission control device 5.
In addition, based on the movement allocation stop command sent from the MPU 42, the audio and light emission control device 5 recognizes that the movement allocation means 86J has been set to the normal guidance state, and executes a predetermined process.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
93, the audio and light emission control device 5 comprises an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 constituting the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 53 and RAM 54, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are integrated into a single chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed, and requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 54 has various areas, such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, a moving body drive unit 863 that moves the moving body 861 of the movement allocation means 86J, and the display control device 6.
Based on commands transmitted from the main control device 4, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125. Based on commands transmitted from the main control device 4, the MPU 52 also executes drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 to move the moving body 861.
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits the commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.
In this reference form, the drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 is performed by the MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5, but it may also be performed by the MPU 42 of the main control device 4 or the MPU 62 of the display control device 6.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform processing different from that in Reference Embodiment I. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the performance determination processing differs from that in Reference Embodiment I. The details of the performance determination processing in this reference embodiment are explained below.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in Fig. 94. Note that this embodiment differs from the embodiment I in that the MPU 52 executes steps S2414J to S2417J instead of steps S2414I to S2417I.

In step S2414J, the MPU 52 determines whether a movement allocation start command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2414J that the movement allocation start command has not been received, it executes the processes of step S2416J and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2414J that it has received a movement allocation start command, it executes a process for determining a movement allocation start effect in step S2415J. In the process for determining a movement allocation start effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the movement allocation start effect by referring to an effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53. This movement allocation start effect is an effect for notifying the player that the movement allocation means 86J has been set to a specific guidance state. Note that in this reference embodiment, the movement allocation start effect is the same effect as the rotation allocation start effect in the reference embodiment I.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the content of the selected performance.
In addition, in the performance execution processing of step S2004 described above, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 to start the movement of the moving body 861, thereby setting the movement allocation means 86J to a specific guidance state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a movement allocation start effect command related to the movement allocation start effect determined in the movement allocation start effect determination process of step S2415J. The MPU 52 then stores the movement allocation start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This movement allocation start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the movement allocation start effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the movement allocation start effect command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the movement allocation start effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2415J, or if it is determined in step S2414J that a movement allocation start command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2416J whether a movement allocation stop command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2416J that the movement allocation stop command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S2418I onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2416J that it has received a movement sorting stop command, it executes a process for determining a movement sorting stop effect in step S2417J. In the process for determining a movement sorting stop effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the movement sorting stop effect by referring to an effect table pre-stored in the ROM 53. This movement sorting stop effect is an effect for notifying the player that the movement sorting means 86J has been set to the normal guidance state. Note that in this reference embodiment, the movement sorting stop effect is the same effect as the rotation sorting stop effect in the reference embodiment I.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the content of the selected performance.
In addition, in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the moving body drive unit 863 to stop the movement of the moving body 861, thereby setting the movement allocation means 86J to the normal guidance state.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a movement sorting stop effect command related to the movement sorting stop effect determined in the movement sorting stop effect determination process of step S2417J. The MPU 52 then stores the movement sorting stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This movement sorting stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the movement sorting stop effect command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 of display control device 6 reads from program ROM 63 a data table for executing the movement sorting stop effect on pattern display device 36. Then, MPU 62 outputs a command to VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by MPU 62, VDP 65 reads image data from character ROM 66 and stores this image data in expansion buffer 68. Furthermore, VDP 65 creates drawing data in frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in expansion buffer 68. This causes pattern display device 36 to execute the movement sorting stop effect selected by MPU 52 of sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2417J, or if it is determined in step S2416J that a movement allocation stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processing of step S2418I and subsequent steps, as in Reference Form I above.

In this way, in this reference embodiment, the movement distribution means 86J functions as a special distribution means that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a transfer distribution means 86J that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so players play in the hope that the transfer distribution means 86J will distribute the game ball to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, a moving distribution means 86J is used as the special distribution means, but any configuration may be used as long as it can distribute game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

In addition, in this reference form, the moving allocation means 86J has an allocation-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route are allocated to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, and an allocation-disabled state (normal guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route are not allocated to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.
The special game execution process functions as a distribution state switching means that switches the movement distribution means 86J to a specific guidance state when a special game is being executed (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and switches the movement distribution means 86J to a normal guidance state when a special game is not being executed (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a special game execution process that switches the movement allocation means 86J to a specific guidance state when a special game is being played (when the special game in progress flag is set in RAM 44), and switches the movement allocation means 86J to a normal guidance state when a special game is not being played (when the special game in progress flag is not set in RAM 44).This means that players will play in the hope that the movement allocation means 86J will be switched to the specific guidance state during the special game execution process.As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this reference form, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 also function as a specific benefit granting means that grants a benefit to the player based on the game balls that have been allocated to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the moving allocation means 86J before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, after which the moving allocation means 86J allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85.
When the pachinko machine 1 is configured in this manner, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable winning through gate 85 that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and can be anything that can allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. Also, the specific benefit granting means does not have to be the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 that pay out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and can grant useful information to the player, grant a situation that allows the player to play the pachinko machine 1 advantageously, or anything that can grant a benefit to the player.

With this configuration, the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 allocate game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 by the moving allocation means 86J, and then, before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 award a profit to the player based on the game balls allocated to them by the moving allocation means 86J. This allows the player to enjoy the profit awarded by the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this reference form, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as a primary ball entry area that gives the player the primary benefit of starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and the flow path in the crane guidance state functions as a primary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this primary ball entry area.
In addition, the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 function as a secondary ball entry area that provides the player with a secondary benefit (a benefit smaller than the primary benefit) of having 15 prize balls paid out when a ball enters the open winning port 841, and the flow path in the starting port induction state functions as a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this secondary ball entry area.
Furthermore, the lower operating port 26 and the outlet 28 function as a tertiary ball entry area that grants the player a tertiary benefit (a benefit smaller than the secondary benefit) of not paying out prize balls when a ball enters the lower operating port 26, and a tertiary ball entry area that grants the player a tertiary benefit (a benefit smaller than the secondary benefit) of not paying out prize balls when a ball enters the outlet 28, and the flow path in the normal guidance state functions as a tertiary flow path that allows game balls to enter this tertiary ball entry area.
The moving distribution means 86J has an operating state (specific guiding state) that allows the game ball to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state (normal guiding state) that allows the game ball to flow down the tertiary flow path, and functions as an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (the start of a special game).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a specific guidance state that allows game balls to flow down either the crane guidance state flow path or the start port guidance state flow path, and a normal guidance state that allows game balls to flow down the normal guidance state flow path. It is equipped with a movement distribution means 86J that changes from the normal guidance state to the specific guidance state based on the establishment of specified operating conditions, so players play in the hope that the state will change from the normal guidance state to the specific guidance state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the moving and distributing means 86J, in the specific guide state, causes the gaming balls to flow only into either the flow path in the crane guide state or the flow path in the starting port guide state. The proportion of the gaming balls flowing down the flow path in the crane guide state and the flow path in the starting port guide state is the same.
In contrast, the rate at which game balls flow down the flow path in the crane guidance state and the flow path in the starting port guidance state do not have to be the same; for example, the rate at which game balls flow down the flow path in the starting port guidance state may be greater than the rate at which game balls flow down the flow path in the crane guidance state.

With this configuration, the movement distribution means 86J, in the specific guidance state, causes game balls to flow only into either the flow path in the crane guidance state or the flow path in the starting port guidance state. Since the proportion of game balls flowing into the flow path in the starting port guidance state is greater than the proportion of game balls flowing into the flow path in the crane guidance state, the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will flow into the flow path in the crane guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (5), (9), and (14) in the embodiment I, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(15) The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a transfer distribution means 86J that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the transfer distribution means 86J will distribute the game balls to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(16) The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a special game execution process that switches the movement allocation means 86J to the specific guidance state when a special game is being played (when the special game in progress flag is set in the RAM 44), and switches the movement allocation means 86J to the normal guidance state when a special game is not being played (when the special game in progress flag is not set in the RAM 44), so that the player plays the game in the hope that the movement allocation means 86J will be switched to the specific guidance state by the special game execution process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(17) After the moving distribution means 86J distributes game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85, the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 award a profit to the player based on the game balls distributed to the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 by the moving distribution means 86J before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, so the player can enjoy the profit awarded by the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(18) The pachinko machine 1 has a specific guidance state that allows game balls to flow down either the flow path in the crane guidance state or the flow path in the start port guidance state, and a normal guidance state that allows game balls to flow down the flow path in the normal guidance state. It is equipped with a movement distribution means 86J that changes from the normal guidance state to the specific guidance state based on the establishment of predetermined operating conditions. Therefore, players play in the hope that the normal guidance state will change to the specific guidance state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

[Reference form K]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment K of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 95 is an enlarged front view of a gaming board showing the vicinity of the lower right gaming means according to Reference Form K of the present invention. In Figure 95, the vertically upward direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and the two axes perpendicular to this Z-axis are defined as the X- and Y-axes. This also applies to the following drawings.
In the reference form I, the lower right game means 8 is equipped with the variable winning device 27I, cover 29I, and through gate 31I mentioned above, as well as a crane 81, a rotation distribution means 82, an opening start port 83, an opening winning device 84, an outlet 281, and a variable winning through gate 85.
95, the lower right game means 8 is different from the above-mentioned reference mode I in that it is provided with a rotation distribution means 87K instead of the rotation distribution means 82. This rotation distribution means 87K is a windmill attached to the game board 2. Note that the present reference mode is also different from the above-mentioned reference mode I in that the game board 2 does not have a hole 803.

Figure 96 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the crane by the rotation distribution means. Figure 97 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball is guided to the open start port by the rotation distribution means.
As shown in Figure 96, the rotary sorting means 87K receives game balls that have flowed down toward the rotary sorting means 87K, rotates counterclockwise in the figure (in the direction of the arrow in the figure), and guides the game balls that have flowed down toward the rotary sorting means 87K to the guide rail 811 of the crane 81 (see arrow B in the figure).
As shown in Figure 97, the rotary sorting means 87K receives game balls that have flowed down toward the rotary sorting means 87K, rotates clockwise in the figure (in the direction of the arrow in the figure), and guides the game balls that have flowed down toward the rotary sorting means 87K to the open start port 83 (see arrow B in the figure).

In this reference mode, the main control device 4 executes processing differently from that in Reference Mode I. Specifically, in this reference mode, the special game execution processing differs from that in Reference Mode I. The details of the special game execution processing in this reference mode are explained below.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special game execution process.
In the special game execution process, the MPU 42 executes steps S4101 to S4111 as shown in Fig. 98. Note that this reference embodiment differs from the reference embodiment I in that the MPU 42 executes the process of step S4104K instead of the process of step S4104, and executes the process of step S4107K instead of the process of step S4107.

In step S4104K, the MPU 42 sets a special game start command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the special game start command set in step S4104K to the sound and light emission control device 5.
The sound and light emission control device 5 recognizes that a special game has started based on a special game start command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S4107K, the MPU 42 sets a special game stop command. Also, in step S301 of the normal processing, the MPU 42 transmits the special game stop command set in step S4107K to the sound and light-emitting control device 5.
In addition, the sound and light emitting control device 5 recognizes that the special game has been stopped based on the special game stop command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

<Electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 99 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device.
As shown in Figure 99, the audio and light emission control device 5 comprises an audio and light emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio and light emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element that combines the ROM 53 and RAM 54 as well as a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like, all on one chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain the stored information.
The RAM 54 is a volatile memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed, and requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. The RAM 54 has various areas, such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side hold information storage area 543.

The MPU 52 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main control device 4. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, the speaker unit 125, and the display control device 6.
The MPU 52 executes drive control of the various lamp units 124 , 371 to 373 and the speaker unit 125 based on commands sent from the main control device 4 .
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits the commands resulting from the analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. The sound and light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) having connectors on both ends of a signal line.

In this reference embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform processing different from that in Reference Embodiment I. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the performance determination processing differs from that in Reference Embodiment I. The details of the performance determination processing in this reference embodiment are explained below.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 as shown in Fig. 100. Note that this embodiment differs from the embodiment I in that the MPU 52 executes steps S2414K to S2417K instead of steps S2414I to S2417I.

In step S2414K, the MPU 52 determines whether a special game start command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2414K that it has not received a special game start command, it executes the processing from step S2416K onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2414K that it has received a special game start command, it executes a process for determining a special game start effect in step S2415K. In the process for determining a special game start effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of the special game start effect by referring to a table for effects pre-stored in the ROM 53. This special game start effect is an effect for notifying the player that a special game has started. Note that in this reference mode, the special game start effect is the same effect as the rotation distribution start effect in the reference mode I.

In addition, based on the content of the selected effect, the MPU 52 performs the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above, in which it controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a special game start effect command related to the special game start effect determined in the special game start effect determination process of step S2415K. The MPU 52 then stores the special game start effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special game start effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special game start effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the special game start effect command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the special game start effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2415K, or if it is determined in step S2414K that a special game start command has not been received, the MPU 52 determines in step S2416K whether a special game stop command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2416K that it has not received a special game stop command, it executes processing from step S2418I onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2416K that it has received a special game stop command, it executes a process for determining a special game stop effect in step S2417K. In the process for determining a special game stop effect, the MPU 52 selects the content of a special game stop effect by referring to a table for effects pre-stored in the ROM 53. This special game stop effect is an effect for notifying the player that the special game has stopped. Note that in this reference mode, the special game stop effect is the same effect as the rotation distribution stop effect in the reference mode I.

In addition, based on the content of the selected effect, the MPU 52 performs the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above, in which it controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 sets a special game stop effect command related to the special game stop effect determined in the special game stop effect determination process of step S2417K. The MPU 52 then stores the special game stop effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special game stop effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the special game stop effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the special game stop effect command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the special game stop effect selected by the MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5.

After executing the processing of step S2417K, or if it is determined in step S2416K that a special game stop command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processing of step S2418I and subsequent steps, as in Reference Form I above.

In this way, in this reference embodiment, the rotation distribution means 87K functions as a special distribution means that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a rotational distribution means 87K that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so players play in the hope that the rotational distribution means 87K will distribute the game balls to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, a rotational distribution means 87K is used as the special distribution means, but any configuration may be used as long as it can distribute game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

Here, in this reference form, the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 also function as a specific benefit awarding means that awards a benefit to the player based on the game balls that have been allocated to the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 by the rotary allocation means 87K before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, after which the rotary allocation means 87K allocates the game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85.
When the pachinko machine 1 is configured in this manner, the specific ball entry means does not have to be the variable winning through gate 85 that starts a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and can be anything that can allow a game ball flowing down the game area to enter. Also, the specific benefit granting means does not have to be the open start port 83 and the open winning device 84 that pay out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and can grant useful information to the player, grant a situation that allows the player to play the pachinko machine 1 advantageously, or anything that can grant a benefit to the player.

With this configuration, the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84 distribute game balls flowing down the game area to the variable winning through gate 85 using the rotary distribution means 87K, and then, before the game balls enter the variable winning through gate 85, the rotary distribution means 87K awards benefits to the player based on the game balls distributed to the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. This allows the player to enjoy the benefits awarded by the open start opening 83 and the open winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (5) and (9) in the embodiment I, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(19) The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a rotation distribution means 87K that distributes game balls flowing down the right-hand hit route to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the rotation distribution means 87K will distribute the game balls to the special game payout means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

(20) After the rotary distribution means 87K distributes game balls flowing down the game area to the variable prize-winning through gate 85, the open start opening 83 and the open prize-winning device 84 award a profit to the player based on the game balls distributed to the open start opening 83 and the open prize-winning device 84 by the rotary distribution means 87K before the game balls enter the variable prize-winning through gate 85. Therefore, the player can enjoy the profit awarded by the open start opening 83 and the open prize-winning device 84. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

[Reference form L]
Hereinafter, a reference embodiment L of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 101 is a front view of a game board according to reference form L of the present invention.
In the reference form I, the game board 2 was provided with a lower operating port 26, a variable winning device 27I, and a through gate 31I.
In contrast, in this reference embodiment, the game board 2 is different from the reference embodiment I in that it is equipped with an operational winning device 26L, a variable winning device 27L, and a through gate 31L, as shown in Figure 101. In addition, in this reference embodiment, the game board 2 is also different from the reference embodiment I in that it is equipped with an equivalent winning opening 88L provided at the lower left position of the variable winning through gate 85.

Figure 102 is an enlarged front view of the game board, enlarging the vicinity of the lower right gaming means. In Figure 102, the vertical direction is defined as the Z-axis direction, and the two axes perpendicular to this Z-axis are defined as the X- and Y-axes. This also applies to the following figures.
The operational winning device 26L is provided adjacent to the left side of the variable winning device 27L. This operational winning device 26L includes an operational opening 261L that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter the opening, an opening/closing door 262L for opening and closing the operational opening 261L, and an operational winning drive unit 263L that drives the opening/closing door 262L.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotational amount, shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the operating winning device 26L.

Here, the operating winning device 26L has the same configuration as the lower operating port 26 in the reference form I except for its shape and position, and has the same function.
Specifically, the actuation port 261L is provided in an opening formed in the play area by routing so as to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. This actuation port 261L is equipped with a detection sensor 303 and has the same function as the lower actuation port 26 in the reference form I. When a ball enters the actuation port 261L, the pachinko machine 1 pays out three prize balls. Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls in the upper actuation port 25 and the actuation port 261L may be different.

The opening/closing door 262L is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the operating port 261L. The opening/closing door 262L has the same function as the electric accessory 261 in the above-mentioned reference form I.
Specifically, the opening/closing door 262L is connected to an activation winning drive unit 263L mounted on the back side of the game board 2. This opening/closing door 262L is set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the activation winning drive unit 263L. The closed state is a state in which the door advances toward the window panel 123 and protrudes from the game board 2, thereby closing the opening of the activation port 261L. The open state is a state in which the door retreats toward the inside of the game board 2 and is buried in the game board 2, thereby opening the opening of the activation port 261L.

Therefore, when the opening/closing door 262L is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the operating opening 261L, but when it is set to the open state, the game ball can enter the operating opening 261L.

In addition, instead of the closed and open states described above, the actuation winning device 26L may be configured to switch between a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the actuation opening 261L (a state in which game balls can enter, unlike the closed state), and a state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the actuation opening 261L. Furthermore, the actuation winning device 26L may be configured to perform such switching by displacing the actuation opening 261L, rather than by setting the opening/closing door 262L. In this configuration, the actuation winning device 26L does not need to be equipped with an opening/closing door 262L.

Here, similar to Reference Form I, the pachinko machine 1 has multiple support modes that differ in the frequency with which the opening/closing door 262L is set to the open state, allowing game balls to enter the operating port 261L. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the opening/closing door 262L is set to the open state relatively rarely, and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency guide state) in which the opening/closing door 262L is set to the open state relatively frequently.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role release state in the electric role release lottery is the same (for example, 4/5 in both). However, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role release state is won, the opening/closing door 262L is set to the open state more often and the opening time of each opening/closing door 262L is longer than in the low-frequency support mode. Also, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time of the opening/closing door 262L between each opening of the electric role release state is shorter than the opening time of each opening. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum waiting time (the duration of one variable display on the role display unit 35) between the end of the electric role release lottery and the next electric role release lottery is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the gaming ball is more likely to enter the actuation port 261L than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player rotates the launch handle 16 to the left and shifts the position of the gaming ball at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the center, thereby increasing the probability of the gaming ball entering the upper actuation port 25 rather than the actuation port 261L. In the high-frequency support mode, the player rotates the launch handle 16 to the right and shifts the position of the gaming ball at the top of the play area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby increasing the probability of the gaming ball entering the actuation port 261L rather than the upper actuation port 25.
When a winning ball is detected in the operating port 261L, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many game balls.

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a left-hand hitting route (first path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the upper actuation port 25 but makes it harder for game balls to enter the actuation port 261L, and a right-hand hitting route (second path) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the actuation port 261L but makes it harder for game balls to enter the upper actuation port 25.

However, the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role release state in the electric role release lottery compared to the low-frequency support mode. Also, for example, by providing multiple types of retention times, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to make it easier to select a short retention time compared to the low-frequency support mode, or to shorten the average selected retention time. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening/closing door 262L is set to the open state, the opening time, and the retention time, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to relatively increase the frequency with which the opening/closing door 262L is set to the open state compared to the low-frequency support mode.

Except for its size, the variable winning device 27L has the same configuration as the variable winning device 27I in the above-mentioned reference form I. Specifically, the variable winning device 27L has a large winning opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, an opening/closing door 272 for opening and closing the large winning opening 271, and a variable winning drive unit 273 that drives the opening/closing door 272.
Furthermore, the player can hit the launch handle 16 to the right with the maximum rotational amount, thereby shifting the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side, thereby avoiding the variable display unit 33, etc. and guiding the game ball to the variable winning device 27L.

With the exception of its position, the through gate 31L has the same configuration as the through gate 31I in Reference Form I. Specifically, the through gate 31L has a detection sensor 306 (see Figure 103) that detects the entry of game balls, and this detection sensor 306 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters each through gate 31, 31L, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out prize balls, unlike when a ball enters one of the various winning slots.

Here, "entering a ball" refers to a game ball passing through a specified opening, and includes not only a game ball being discharged from the game area after passing through an opening, but also a game ball continuing to flow down the game area after passing through an opening without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, to clearly distinguish game balls entering the various winning openings from game balls entering the outlets 28, 281, the game ball entering the various winning openings will also be referred to as "winning." Furthermore, a game ball entering through gates 31, 31L or variable winning through gate 85 refers to a game ball continuing to flow down the game area after passing through a gate provided in the game area without being discharged. Entry into these through gates 31, 31L and variable winning through gate 85 will also be referred to as "winning," just like entry into various winning openings.

The equivalent winning opening 88L is located in the area to the left of the variable winning device 27L. This equivalent winning opening 88L is equipped with a detection sensor 310L (see Figure 103) that detects the entry of game balls, and this detection sensor 310L is located on the back side of the game board 2. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensor 310L. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 pays out one prize ball when a ball enters the equivalent winning opening 88L. The detection sensor 310L may be any type that can detect the entry of game balls individually, and for example, an electromagnetic induction proximity sensor or the like may be used.

The game board 2 also has a group of nails NL5L planted to the left of the equivalent winning opening 88L. These nails NL5L are planted so that all game balls that move to the left on the surface of the opening and closing door 272 enter the equivalent winning opening 88L.

<Electrical configuration of a pachinko machine>
Figure 103 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in Fig. 103, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main control unit 4, an audio/light emitting control unit 5, and a display control unit 6, which are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 1 also comprises a payout control unit 46 and a power/launch control unit 47, which are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control unit 46 executes payout control to cause the payout device 48 described above to pay out game balls. The power/launch control unit 47 executes launch control to cause the game ball launching mechanism 49 described above to launch game balls.

The main control device 4 includes a main control board 41 that is responsible for the main control of the game (main control), and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply.
The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42. The MPU 42 is a chip-integrated device that includes, in addition to the ROM 43 and RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that serves as a random number generator.
In this embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of the other control devices other than the main control device 4.

The MPU 42 has an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45 provided on the main control unit 4 and to multiple detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I, and 310L. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45, the payout control unit 46, and the audio and light emission control unit 5. The output port of the MPU 42 is also connected to the operation winning drive unit 263L, which opens and closes the opening and closing door 262L of the operation winning device 26L, the variable winning drive unit 273, which opens and closes the opening and closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27L, the open winning drive unit 843, which opens and closes the opening and closing door 842 of the open winning device 84, the main display unit 34, and the gimmick display unit 35.

The main control board 41 also has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 controls the operation of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric release state, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the winning drive unit 263L to open and close the operating port 261L. In the open/close execution mode, the MPU 42 controls the operation of the variable winning drive unit 273 to open and close the large winning port 271. The MPU 42 also controls the operation of the open winning drive unit 843 to open and close the open winning port 841. During each game, the MPU 42 controls the display of the main display unit 34 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at each operating port 25, 261L. The MPU 42 also controls the display of the device display unit 35 to display the results of an internal lottery based on winnings at each through gate 31, 31L.

The power failure monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply and launch control device 47, which has the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 V DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 47. Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power failure monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I, 310L are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the various winning ports, including the general winning port 24, the upper operating port 25, the operating port 261L, the variable winning device 27L, the open winning device 84, and the equivalent winning port 88L, as well as the outlets 28, 281, the through gates 31, 31L, the open start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301-306, 307I-309I, 310L, the MPU 42 determines whether a ball has entered the various winning ports, the outlets 28, 281, the through gates 31, 31L, the open start port 83, and the variable winning through gate 85. The MPU 42 also performs an internal lottery based on the determination of whether a ball has entered the upper operating port 25 or the operating port 261L.

In this reference mode, the main control device 4 executes processing different from that in Reference Mode I. Specifically, in this reference mode, the normal processing differs from that in Reference Mode I. The details of the normal processing in this reference mode are explained below.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing normal processing.
In normal processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in Fig. 104. Note that this embodiment differs from the embodiment I in that the MPU 42 executes the process of step S306L instead of the process of step S306.

In step S306L, the MPU 42 executes an electric role support process to control the operation of the opening/closing door 262L provided in the activation winning device 26L. In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes an electric role opening lottery based on the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443 of the RAM 44, and executes the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 262L if the electric role opening lottery is won. The MPU 42 also executes display control of the role display unit 35 to display the result of the electric role opening lottery.

Figure 105 is a diagram showing the opening amount of the opening/closing door of the operating prize-winning device. Specifically, Figure 105 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the operating prize-winning device 26L viewed from vertically above. Figure 105(A) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening/closing door 262L is set to a closed state, Figure 105(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening/closing door 262L is set to a fully open state, and Figure 105(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening/closing door 262L is set to a half-open state.

If the player does not win the lottery to open the electric device, the opening/closing door 262L of the activation winning device 26L is set to a closed state by being driven by the activation winning drive unit 263L, as shown in Figure 105 (A). If the opening/closing door 262L is set to a closed state, the game ball will pass over the opening/closing door 262L, and will no longer be able to enter the activation opening 261L.

Here, in step S306L, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in RAM 44.

When the MPU 42 determines that the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode, it sets the opening amount when setting the opening/closing door 262L to the fully open state. When the electric role release lottery is won, the opening/closing door 262L of the activation winning device 26L is set to the fully open state by being driven by the activation winning drive unit 263L, as shown in Figure 105 (B). When the opening/closing door 262L is set to the fully open state, the game ball can enter the activation opening 261L.

In contrast, if the MPU 42 determines that the win/lose lottery mode is not the high probability mode (if it determines that the win/lose lottery mode is the low probability mode), it sets the opening amount when setting the opening/closing door 262L to half open. If the electric role release lottery is won, the opening/closing door 262L of the activation winning device 26L is set to a half-open open state by being driven by the activation winning drive unit 263L, as shown in Figure 105 (C). If the opening/closing door 262L is set to a half-open open state, the game ball will pass over the opening/closing door 262L and will not be able to enter the activation opening 261L.

In this way, in this reference form, the variable winning through gate 85 functions as a primary ball entry area that gives the player the primary benefit of starting a game in a specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters, and the flow path in the crane guidance state functions as a primary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this primary ball entry area.
In addition, the open starting port 83 and the open winning device 84 function as a secondary ball entry area that provides the player with a secondary benefit (a benefit smaller than the primary benefit) of having 15 prize balls paid out when a ball enters the open winning port 841, and the flow path in the starting port induction state functions as a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this secondary ball entry area.
Furthermore, the equivalent winning port 88L functions as a tertiary ball entry area that, when a ball enters the equivalent winning port 88L, grants the player a tertiary benefit (a benefit smaller than the secondary benefit) of paying out one prize ball, and the flow path in the normal guidance state functions as a tertiary flow path that allows the game ball to enter this tertiary ball entry area.
The rotary distribution means 82 has an operating state (specific guiding state) that allows game balls to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state (normal guiding state) that allows game balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and functions as an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition (the start of a special game).

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 1 has a specific induction state that allows game balls to flow down either the crane induction state flow path or the start port induction state flow path, and a normal induction state that allows game balls to flow down the normal induction state flow path. It is equipped with a rotation distribution means 82 that changes from the normal induction state to the specific induction state based on the establishment of specified operating conditions, so players play in the hope that the normal induction state will change to the specific induction state based on the start of a special game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

Here, in this reference embodiment, the equivalent winning opening 88L is capable of awarding one or less game balls when one game ball enters.

With this configuration, the equivalent winning opening 88L can award one or fewer game balls when one game ball enters, so when the rotation distribution means 82 is in a specific guidance state, the player will aim the game ball at the rotation distribution means 82 and will not aim the game ball at the rotation distribution means 82 when the rotation distribution means 82 is in a normal guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this reference embodiment, the equivalent winning opening 88L pays out one prize ball when a ball enters the equivalent winning opening 88L. In contrast, the tertiary winning area may, for example, hold a lottery to determine whether or not to pay out prize balls when a game ball enters, and pay out one prize ball if the lottery is won. Furthermore, the tertiary winning area may, for example, have a winning opening that pays out one prize ball and an outlet that does not pay out prize balls, and be equipped with a switch that switches between allowing the game ball to enter one of these openings. In short, it is sufficient for the tertiary winning area to be able to award one or fewer game balls when one game ball enters the area.

Here, in this reference embodiment, the flow path in the normal guidance state allows game balls to enter only the equivalent winning opening 88L in a specified game state (when the win/lose lottery mode is determined to be the low probability mode).

With this configuration, the flow path in the normal guidance state allows game balls to enter only the equivalent winning port 88L in a specified game state, so that in a specified game state, the player will not aim to fire game balls into the flow path in the normal guidance state when the rotation sorting means 82 is in the normal guidance state. Therefore, in a specified game state (normal game state), the pachinko machine 1 can prevent the player from obtaining unfair benefits even if the game ball is fired toward the right-hand hit route.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (14) in the embodiment I, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(21) Since the equivalent winning opening 88L can award one or less game balls when one game ball enters, the player will aim the game ball at the rotation distribution means 82 when the rotation distribution means 82 is in a specific guidance state, and will not aim the game ball at the rotation distribution means 82 when the rotation distribution means 82 is in a normal guidance state. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.
(22) In a predetermined game state, the flow path in the normal guidance state allows game balls to enter only the equivalent winning port 88L, so that in a predetermined game state, the player will not fire game balls aiming at the flow path in the normal guidance state when the rotation sorting means 82 is in the normal guidance state. Therefore, in a predetermined game state, the pachinko machine 1 can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the player fires a game ball toward the right-hand hitting route.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 4 executes processing differently from the reference embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the winning processing for the actuation port differs from that of the reference embodiment. The details of the winning processing for the actuation port in this embodiment are explained below.

<Winning process for operating port>
Figure 106 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 42 executes steps S201 to S208M as shown in Fig. 106. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 42 differs from the above-mentioned reference embodiment in that it executes the process of step S208M instead of the process of step S208.

In step S208M, when the MPU 42 sets the first start hold memory number RaN in step S202, it sets a first hold generation command for recognizing that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, and transmits this set first hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This first hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25. The first hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emitting control device 5 lights up the first reserve lamp unit 371 and executes other predetermined processes based on the first reserve generation command sent from the MPU 42. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the upper operating port 25 is four, and the first reserve lamp unit 371 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, the first pending generation command includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery).
Here, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result).
In addition, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the reach table stored in the reach table memory area 433 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the reach occurrence lottery.

Also, in step S208M, when the MPU 42 sets the second start hold memory number RbN in step S204, it sets a second hold generation command for recognizing that the hold information has been stored in the memory area of the hold area Rb for the second result display section, and transmits this set second hold generation command to the sound and light emission control device 5. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the activation port.
This second hold generation command includes information for making the audio and light emitting control device 5 recognize that hold information has been stored in the memory area of the second result display section hold area Rb based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. The second hold generation command also includes information related to the current support mode.
The sound and light emission control device 5 lights up the second reserve lamp unit 372 and executes other predetermined processes based on the second reserve generation command sent from the MPU 42. As mentioned above, the maximum number of game balls that can be reserved in the lower actuation port 26 is four, and the second reserve lamp unit 372 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of reserved balls.

Furthermore, the second pending generation command includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery).
Here, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (win/lose lottery) for the occurrence of a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table memory area 431 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the win/lose lottery (win/lose result).
In addition, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (reach occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 and the reach table stored in the reach table memory area 433 (see Figure 4) of the ROM 43, and determines the result of the reach occurrence lottery.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processing than in the reference embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the hold generation processing, hold shift processing, and presentation determination processing are different from those in the reference embodiment. The contents of the hold generation processing, hold shift processing, and presentation determination processing in this embodiment are described below.

<Holding process>
FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the hold generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 as shown in Fig. 107. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the sub-side hold information in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold generation command. Note that in this embodiment, after executing the process of step S2204, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2210M before executing the process of step S2205, and differs from the above-described reference embodiment in that it executes the process of step S2207M instead of the process of step S2207.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has received the first hold generation command, it determines the number of holds stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa in step S2202, and sets the number of holds as the first sub-side start hold memory number SRaN in a predetermined memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. Thereafter, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onward.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that it has not received the first hold generation command (if it determines that it has received the second hold generation command), then in step S2203 it determines the number of holds stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb and sets that number as the second sub-side start hold memory number SRbN in a specified memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates the value of the sub-side start pending memory number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 in step S2204.

In step S2210M, the MPU 52 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2210M that there is no advance notice reservation information, it executes a lottery process for advance notice reservation in step S2205. In this lottery process for advance notice reservation, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue an advance notice reservation.
Specifically, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by using the value of the notice hold occurrence counter. The notice hold occurrence counter is provided in the various counter area 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, the advance notice hold is a hold that executes an advance notice display that changes the type of reserved image, etc. to notify the player of the expected level of the hold, or an advance notice display that generates a look-ahead effect to notify the player of the expected level of the hold by utilizing the effect of the number of games based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold. Note that in this embodiment, an advance notice hold that executes an advance notice display that generates a look-ahead effect will be described, and an explanation of advance notice holds that execute other advance notice displays will be omitted.

The advance notice pending occurrence counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and after it reaches its maximum value, returns to 0. The advance notice pending occurrence counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored appropriately in a advance notice pending occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice hold occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold based on the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer and executes a lottery to determine whether or not to issue a notice hold by comparing this value with a notice hold occurrence table. The notice hold occurrence table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of a notice hold, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the advance notice reservation lottery was won in step S2205 (whether or not an advance notice reservation should be made).
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M. In this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating a notice hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.
Here, the notice pending information includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery to determine whether a jackpot will occur (win/lose lottery), and information regarding the result of the lottery to determine whether or not a reach display will occur (reach occurrence lottery).
Based on the first hold generation command and the second hold generation command, the MPU 52 includes information regarding the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) and information regarding the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach generation lottery) in the advance notice hold information.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side reserve area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side reserve area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the advance notice pending information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, or if it determines in step S2210M that notice hold information exists, it executes normal hold generation processing in step S2208. In this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes processing to generate a normal hold. Furthermore, based on the contents of this normal hold generation processing, the MPU 52 executes illumination control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution processing of the aforementioned step S2004.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the sub-side hold area, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the first sub-side hold area SRa, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRa4, which is the memory area corresponding to the first sub-side start-up pending memory number SRaN updated to "4" in step S2204.

Furthermore, for example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the first free memory area in the second sub-side hold area SRb, i.e., the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it stores the normal hold information in the fourth area SRb4, which is the memory area corresponding to the second sub-side start-up pending memory number SRbN updated to "4" in step S2204.

In this way, in this embodiment, the MPU 52 can generate only one advance notice hold in the sub-side hold area that executes an advance notice display that generates a pre-reading effect, and cannot generate multiple advance notice holds in the sub-side hold area.
In this embodiment, the MPU 52 is not configured to allow multiple advance reservations to occur in the sub-side reservation area, but it may be configured to allow this.

After executing the advance hold generation process of step S2207M or the normal hold generation process of step S2208, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. The MPU 52 then stores the hold display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of a notice hold or a normal hold on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the notice hold image or normal hold image on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or normal hold.

<Hold shift processing>
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the hold shift process.
In the hold shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2309M to S2308 as shown in Fig. 108. Note that this embodiment differs from the above-described reference embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2309M before executing the process of step S2301, executes the process of step S2310M after executing the process of step S2304, and executes the process of step S2311M after executing the process of step S2307.

In step S2309M, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur.
The process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur will be described in detail below.

<Pre-reading effect occurrence determination process>
Figure 109 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur.
In the process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur, the MPU 52 executes steps S5001 to S5011 as shown in FIG.
In step S5001, the MPU 52 determines whether or not there is advance notice hold information in the sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5001 that there is no advance notice pending information, it terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S5002 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5001 that there is advance notice pending information, it determines in step S5002 whether or not a look-ahead effect occurring flag is set in the RAM 54. This look-ahead effect occurring flag is a flag for identifying that a look-ahead effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the look-ahead effect occurring flag when a look-ahead effect occurs, and clears the look-ahead effect occurring flag when the look-ahead effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5002 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54, this indicates that the pre-reading effect has already occurred, and therefore terminates the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process without executing the processing from step S5003 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5002 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it acquires the pre-reading pending number PN in step S5003.

Here, the number of advance pending information PN is the total number of advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area that will be executed before the advance pending information.
For example, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

In this case, even if normal hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the normal hold information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa will be executed after the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, so the MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the pre-read hold number PN.

In step S5004, the MPU 52 acquires the notice pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires information on the result (win/lose result) of the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot (win/lose lottery) included in the notice pending information and information on the result of the lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display (reach occurrence lottery).
In step S5005, the MPU 52 determines whether the win/loss result acquired in step S5004, i.e., the win/loss result included in the advance notice reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area, is a "jackpot win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S5005 that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S5006 onward, and if it determines in step S5005 that the win/loss result is not a "jackpot win," it executes the processing from step S5009 onward.

First, the process (the process from step S5006 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5005 that the result is a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S5006, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S5003 is "4" or less.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5006 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "4" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S5007 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5006 that the number of pre-read pending PN is "4" or less, it sets a pre-read effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007.
In step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 by substituting "0" for the number of times. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process.

Next, the process (the process from step S5009 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5005 that the result is not a "jackpot win" will be described.
In step S5009, the MPU 52 determines whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery acquired in step S5004, i.e., the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance notice reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area, is a "win." If the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win," it executes the processing from step S5010 onwards, and if it determines in step S5009 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win," it executes the processing from step S5011 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S5010 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "winning" will be described.
In step S5010, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S5003 is "3" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the pre-read pending number PN is "3" or less, it executes the processes from step S5007 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "3" or less, it terminates the pre-read effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S5007 onwards.

Next, the process (the process from step S5011 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5009 that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" will be described.
In step S5011, the MPU 52 determines whether the pre-read pending number PN acquired in step S5003 is "2" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5011 that the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "2", it executes the processes from step S5007 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5011 that the number of pre-read pending PN is not "2" or less, it terminates the pre-read effect occurrence determination process without executing the processes from step S5007 onwards.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the number of pending pre-reads PN is "4" or less, the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process determines in step S5007 that a pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 and that a pre-reading effect will be generated.
Specifically, the pre-reading effect occurs when the result of the pre-reading held information is a "jackpot win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "4" or less, when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pre-reading held information is a "win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "3" or less, and when the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pre-reading held information is not a "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a "win" and the pre-reading held number PN is "2" or less.

In other words, if the pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN, which is the sum of the number of advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area and the number of sub-side pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area that is executed before the advance pending information, is "4", then the win/loss result contained in the advance pending information is confirmed to be "jackpot win", and if the pre-reading effect occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "3", then the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance pending information is confirmed to be "win".
In this embodiment, the pre-reading effect also occurs when advance notice hold information is executed, so if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "4", it will occur four times in a row, if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "3", it will occur three times in a row, and if it occurs when the pre-reading hold number PN is "2", it will occur two times in a row.

Returning to the explanation of the hold shift process, the process from step S2301 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S2301, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2301 that it has received a first shift command, it executes data setting processing for the first sub-side reserve area SRa in steps S2302 to S2310M, and if it determines in step S2301 that it has not received a first shift command (if it determines that it has received a second shift command), it executes data setting processing for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2311M.

First, the data setting process for the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S2302 to S2310M will be described.
In step S2302, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in the first sub-side pending area SRa to update it.
In step S2303, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S2304, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. This data shift process shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRa1 to SRa4 sequentially to the first area SRa1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRa4 to the third area SRa3.

In step S2310M, the MPU 52 clears the second hold effect flag stored in RAM 54. This second hold effect flag is a flag for identifying that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE. In step S2310M, the MPU 52 clears the second hold effect flag stored in RAM 54, which indicates that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side hold area SRa has been moved to the execution area SAE.

Next, the data setting process for the second sub-side reserve area SRb in steps S2305 to S2311M will be described.
In step S2305, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in the second sub-side pending area SRb to update it.
In step S2306, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reserved information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserved area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S2307, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the second sub-side reserved area SRb. This data shift process sequentially shifts the sub-side reserved information stored in each of the areas SRb1 to SRb4 to the first area SRb1. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reserved information in the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, the sub-side reserved information in the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and the sub-side reserved information in the fourth area SRb4 to the third area SRb3.

In step S2311M, the MPU 52 sets a second hold effect flag in RAM 54. This second hold effect flag is a flag for identifying that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE. In step S2311M, the MPU 52 sets the second hold effect flag in RAM 54, which indicates that the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE.

After executing the processing of step S2310M or step S2311M, the MPU 52 sets a hold display shift command in step S2308. Then, the MPU 52 stores the hold display shift command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the hold display shift command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold display shift command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending processing of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the pattern display device 36 displays and executes normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the display screen G.

<Regarding the performance determination process executed by the audio and light emission control device>
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound and light emission control device 5 executes a presentation determination process to execute presentations for game times, presentations for the open/close execution mode, etc. In this presentation determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 in substantially the same manner as in the above-mentioned reference embodiment. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 52 differs from the above-mentioned reference embodiment in that it executes the process of step S2407M instead of the process of step S2407, as shown in FIG.

In step S2407M, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 selects a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referencing a presentation table pre-stored in the ROM 53. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the presentation duration (presentation duration) and the content of the presentation as the presentation pattern. In step S2407M, the MPU 52 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to display a preview.

Furthermore, the MPU 52 controls the illumination of the display lamp unit 124 and controls the sound of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above, based on the selected performance pattern.
The process of determining the effect pattern will be described in detail below.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process, the MPU 52 executes steps S5101 to S5108 as shown in FIG.

In step S5101, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5101 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S5102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5101 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S5106 onwards.

First, the processing (processing from step S5102 onwards) when it is determined in step S5101 that the MPU 52 has set a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 will be described.
In step S5102, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect has been consumed.
The following describes in detail the process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect will be consumed.

<Prediction performance consumption determination process>
Figure 112 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will be consumed.
In the process of determining whether to consume the advance reading effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S5201 to S5214 as shown in FIG.

In step S5201, the MPU 52 obtains the execution-time prefetch pending number APN.

Here, the execution-time pre-read hold number APN is the total number of advance hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area at the time of execution of the current sub-side hold information, and the number of sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area that will be executed before the advance hold information.
For example, as mentioned above, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Thereafter, when executing the normal hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the two sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.
In this case, if normal hold information is also stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the three sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.

In step S5202, the MPU 52 determines whether the execution time pre-reading pending number APN acquired in step S5201 is less than the pre-reading pending number PN.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, it executes the processes in step S5203 and thereafter.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-reading pending number APN is not less than the pre-reading pending number PN, it executes the processes from step S5210 onwards.

First, the process (the process from step S5203 onward) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN will be described.
In step S5203, "0" is substituted into the pending synthesis notice consumption count CN stored in the RAM 54 to reset it. The pending synthesis notice consumption count CN will be described in detail later.

In step S5204, the MPU 52 executes a pre-reading effect generation process. In this pre-reading effect generation process, the MPU 52 determines whether a pre-reading effect will occur based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54. Specifically, if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "0," the MPU 52 determines whether a first pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "1," the MPU 52 determines whether a second pre-reading effect will occur; if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "2," the MPU 52 determines whether a third pre-reading effect will occur; and if the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN is "3," the MPU 52 determines whether a fourth pre-reading effect will occur.

In step S5205, the MPU 52 sets a pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the pre-reading effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in the RAM 54 is included in the pre-reading effect generation command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This pre-reading effect generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the pre-reading effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect is to be played PRN included in the pre-reading effect generation command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the pre-reading effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the first look-ahead effect has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the second look-ahead effect has occurred; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the third look-ahead effect has occurred; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player that the fourth look-ahead effect has occurred.

In step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.
In step S5207, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.

In step S5208, it is determined whether the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in the RAM 54 is "0" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5208 that the value of the pre-read pending number PN is equal to or less than "0", then in step S5209, the MPU 52 clears the pre-read effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the pre-read effect.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5208 that the value of the number of pre-read pending PN is not "0" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance consumption determination process without executing the processing of step S5209.

Next, the process (the process from step S5210 onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN will be described.
In step S5210, the MPU 52 executes a reserved composite notice generation process. In this reserved composite notice generation process, the MPU 52 determines whether to generate a reserved composite notice based on the number of reserved composite notices CN stored in the RAM 54.

Here, the reserved combination notice is a notice display that combines multiple play times to make it appear to the player as a single play time. This reserved combination notice occurs only while a pre-reading effect is occurring, and the reserved time is consumed without consuming the pre-reading effect. In this embodiment, after the variable display on the symbol display device 36 starts, the reserved combination notice generates a pseudo consecutive effect that executes a pseudo variable display that displays a predetermined stop result over multiple play times, thereby pseudo-combining multiple play times and making it appear to the player as a single play time.
In this embodiment, the reserved combination notice employs a pseudo consecutive effect, but other notice displays may be employed. In short, the reserved combination notice may be a notice display that pseudo-combines multiple game turns and makes it appear to the player as a single game turn.

Specifically, in the hold combination notice generation process of step S5210, if the number of times the hold combination notice has been played, CN, is "0", MPU 52 determines that the first hold combination notice will be played, i.e., the first pseudo consecutive effect will occur; if the number of times the hold combination notice has been played, CN, is "1", MPU 52 determines that the second hold combination notice will be played, i.e., the second pseudo consecutive effect will occur; and if the number of times the hold combination notice has been played, CN, is "N", MPU 52 determines that the N+1th hold combination notice will be played, i.e., the N+1th pseudo consecutive effect will occur.

In step S5211, the MPU 52 sets a hold composite notice generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the hold composite notice generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the value of the number of times CN that the hold composite notice has been consumed stored in the RAM 54 is included in the hold composite notice generation command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold composite notice generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of a reserved composite notification on the symbol display device 36 based on the reserved composite notification generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times the reserved composite notification has been consumed (CN) included in the reserved composite notification generation command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the reserved composite notification on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the reserved composite notification. Specifically, if the number of times the hold combination notification has been used, CN, is "0", the MPU 52 notifies the player of the first hold combination notification, i.e., the first occurrence of a pseudo consecutive effect; if the number of times the hold combination notification has been used, CN, is "1", the MPU 52 notifies the player of the second hold combination notification, i.e., the second occurrence of a pseudo consecutive effect; and if the number of times the hold combination notification has been used, CN, is "N", the MPU 52 notifies the player of the N+1th hold combination notification, i.e., the N+1th occurrence of a pseudo consecutive effect.

In step S5212, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pending synthesis notice has been consumed CN stored in the RAM 54 to update it.
In step S5213, the MPU 52 determines whether the value of the number of times CN that the pending synthesis notice has been consumed, stored in the RAM 54, is "1" or less.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5213 that the value of the number of times CN of the reserved combination notice is consumed is "1" or less (if the first reserved combination notice is generated), it executes the processing from step S5204 onwards. In other words, the MPU 52 executes the generation of the pre-reading effect and the first reserved combination notice, i.e., the generation of the first pseudo consecutive effect, during one game round.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5213 that the value of the number of times the reserved synthesis notice has been consumed CN is not less than "1" (if the second or subsequent reserved synthesis notice has been generated), it determines in step S5214 whether the value of the execution-time pre-read reserve number APN obtained in step S5201 is less than "0".

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5214 that the value of the execution time pre-read pending number APN is "0" or less, it executes the processing from step S5208 onwards.
In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5214 that the value of the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not "0" or less, it terminates the pre-read performance consumption determination process.
In this way, the MPU 52 is configured not to execute the occurrence of the pre-reading effect and the second or subsequent pending synthesis notice, i.e., the second or subsequent pseudo consecutive effect, during one game round.

Returning to the explanation of the effect pattern determination process, the processing from step S5103 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
After executing the pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S5102, the MPU 52 executes the processes from step S5103 onwards described above.

In step S5103, it is determined whether the value of the number of times CN of the reserved synthesis notice stored in RAM 54 is "0" or less.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5103 that the value of the consumption count CN of the reserved composite notice is equal to or less than "0", it executes a process of determining a pseudo consecutive effect in step S5104. In the process of determining a pseudo consecutive effect, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice display that generates a normal pseudo consecutive effect in which the above-mentioned pseudo variable display is executed multiple times during one game.

After executing the process of step S5104, or if it is determined in step S5103 that the value of the consumption count CN of the reserved composite notice is not "0" or less, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining other effect patterns in step S5015. In the process of determining other effect patterns, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice display other than the pre-reading effect and the pseudo consecutive effect. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the process of determining the effect pattern.
In this way, the MPU 52 is configured not to generate the normal pseudo consecutive effects when a pending composite notice occurs.

In contrast, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5101 that the pre-reading effect occurrence flag is not set in RAM 54, it determines in step S5106 whether the second pending effect flag is set in RAM 54.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5106 that the second pending effect flag is not set in the RAM 54, it executes the processing from step S5104 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5106 that the second hold effect flag is set in the RAM 54, it executes a second hold effect generation process in step S5107. In this second hold effect generation process, the MPU 52 generates a second hold effect that is executed only when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE in a state where no pre-reading effect is occurring. This second hold effect will be described in detail later.

In step S5108, the MPU 52 sets a second hold effect generation command. The MPU 52 then stores the second hold effect generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This second hold effect generation command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the second hold effect generation command sent from MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the generation of the second hold effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the second hold effect on the display screen G to notify the player that the second hold effect has occurred.

<About the occurrence of pre-reading effects and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Specifically, FIG. 113(A) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 113(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the first pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 113(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the second pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 113(D) is a diagram showing the state in which the third pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area. Also, FIG. 113(E) is a diagram showing the state in which the fourth pre-reading effect related to this advance notice pending information is consumed after advance notice pending information is stored in the fourth area of the first sub-side reserve area.

As shown in Figure 113(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a variable start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 113(A), the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on a variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 113, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B14.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B14, onto base B13.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 113 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
113A, the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa stores advance notice pending information, and the first, second, and third areas SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa store regular pending information. In this case, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, so in step S5003, the MPU 52 acquires "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "4" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and will set the advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007 only if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win."
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and therefore, if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the third hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 113, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is a "jackpot win."

In the example of Figure 113, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is "jackpot win," so when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
113B, the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the regular pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2. In this case, the two sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB having eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the pattern display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 113(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on base B13) by utilizing the effect of a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 113(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and bases B11 and B12).

In the example of Figure 113 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 113 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 113 (C), the MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 113 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "3".
113C, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution-time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-read performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-read performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 113 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 113 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 113 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 113 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "2".
113(D), only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 113 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to 6 marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 113 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 113 (E), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 113 (E), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the third pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 113 (E), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, in step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-read performance.

In the example of Figure 113 (E), the MPU 62 executes the fourth look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "3," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes the fourth look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB scale having accumulated up to 8 marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 113, the pre-reading effect occurs four times in a row, so it is confirmed that the win/loss result contained in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has accumulated to a maximum of eight marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result contained in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

Figure 114 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Specifically, Figure 114(A) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 114(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 114(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the second pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 114(D) is a diagram showing the state in which the third pre-reading effect related to advance notice pending information has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area.

As shown in Figure 114(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 114(A), the MPU 62 starts the display of symbols based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 114, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B13.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 114 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
In the example of Figure 114 (A), advance notice pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, the two sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, so in step S5003, the MPU 52 will obtain "3" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 114, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 114, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win", and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", so when the MPU 52 executes the first pending shift process after the advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, it obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
114B, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB with eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the symbol display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 114(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on base B12) by utilizing the effect of a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 114(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution base AB and base B11).

In the example of Figure 114 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 114 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 114 (C), the MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 114 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first advance reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the advance reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".
114(C), only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution-time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 114 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 114 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 114 (D), the MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 114 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 114 (D), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, in step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-read performance.

In the example of Figure 114 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to 6 marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 114, the pre-reading effect occurs three times in a row, so it is confirmed that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached six marks, so using this as a guide, the player can know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

Figure 115 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area. Specifically, Figure 115(A) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 115(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area. Figure 115(C) is a diagram showing the state in which the second pre-reading effect related to this advance notice pending information has been completed after advance notice pending information has been stored in the second area of the first sub-side holding area.

As shown in Figure 115(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a variable start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 115(A), the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on a variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 115, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 115 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 115 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
In the example of Figure 115 (A), advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, one sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, so in step S5003, the MPU 52 will obtain "2" as the number of pending read-ahead information PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S5003. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 115, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 115, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win". Therefore, when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
115B, only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 115 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 115 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 115 (C), the MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 115 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first advance reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the advance reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 115 (C), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, in step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-read performance.

In the example of Figure 115 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 115, the pre-read effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has accumulated to four marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

Figure 116 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when normal hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area and before the pre-reading effect occurs. Specifically, Figure 116(A) shows the state in which advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 116(B) shows the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 116(C) shows the state in which the second pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Figure 116(D) shows the state in which the third pre-reading effect related to this advance notice hold information has been completed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area.

As shown in Figure 116(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a variable start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 116(A), the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on a variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 116, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B12 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 116 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
116A, the advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and the regular pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side pending area SRb. In this case, the two sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, so in step S5003, the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", or if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", it will set a advance notice effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.
Furthermore, when the MPU 52 executes the second hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will acquire "2" as the advance notice hold number PN in step S5003, and therefore in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", a advance notice effect occurrence flag will be set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 116, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a "jackpot win" but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win."

In the example of Figure 116, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win", and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", so when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
116B, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-read performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-read performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the MPU 62 places a gauge GB with eight markings on the left edge of the display screen G, and displays an angel character operating a pump connected to this gauge on the symbol display device 36 so that it is positioned to the lower right of the gauge GB, thereby displaying and executing a look-ahead effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. This look-ahead effect is an effect for consuming a pre-notification hold that notifies the player of the expected probability of that hold (in the example of FIG. 116(B), the hold related to the pre-notification hold symbol placed on pedestal B12) by utilizing the effect of a game turn based on the hold that will be consumed before the hold (in the example of FIG. 116(B), the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on execution pedestal AB and on pedestal B11).

In the example of Figure 116 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 116 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 116 (C), the MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the new normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 116 (C), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first advance reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the advance reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "2".
116C, only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect.

In the example of Figure 116 (C), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 116 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 116 (D), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 116 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second pre-reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 116 (D), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.
Thereafter, in step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of pending pre-reads PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in the RAM 54, thereby ending the pre-read performance.

In the example of Figure 116 (D), the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "2," and therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a third look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to 6 marks.

In this way, in the example of Figure 116, the pre-reading effect occurs three times in a row, so the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is confirmed to be a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached six marks, so using this as a guide, the player can know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the pending notice information is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

<About the flow when normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area after the pre-reading effect occurs>
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area after advance notice information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area after a pre-reading effect occurs. Specifically, FIG. 117(A) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area. Also, FIG. 117(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area. Also, FIG. 117(C) is a diagram showing a state in which normal reserved information is stored in the second sub-side reserved area when the first pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area. Also, FIG. 117(D) is a diagram showing a state in which the second pre-reading effect is consumed after advance notice information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area. Also, FIG. 117(E) is a diagram showing a state in which the first pre-reading effect is generated. Also, Figure 117 (F) is a diagram showing the state in which a second pending synthesis notice is generated.

As shown in Figure 117(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a variable start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 117(A), the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on a variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 117, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 117 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the varying display of multiple pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, MPU 62 starts the varying display of the patterns by periodically scrolling the patterns of each pattern column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 117 (B), MPU 62 starts the varying display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
In the example of Figure 117 (A), advance notice pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa. In this case, one sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, so in step S5003, the MPU 52 will obtain "2" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S5003. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag in RAM 54 indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 117, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 117, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win". Therefore, when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
117B, only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, so in step S5203, it resets the number of times the pending composite notice has been consumed CN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and then in step S5204, it executes the pre-reading performance generation process, and in step S5205, it sets the pre-reading performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 117 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Here, after the pre-reading effect occurs, if the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the base B21, as shown in Figure 117 (C).

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 117 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 117 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Here, in the example of Figure 117 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first advance reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the advance reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
117(D), only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5210, executes a pending synthesis notification generation process, and in step S5211, sets a pending synthesis notification generation command.
Then, based on the hold composite notice generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times CN that the hold composite notice has been consumed, which is included in this hold composite notice generation command, the MPU 62 displays the hold composite notice on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the hold composite notice.

Specifically, in step S5203, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the pending combination announcement has been consumed, CN, stored in RAM 54, by substituting "0". Therefore, based on the stop result command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as stop results to notify the result of the win/loss lottery. As shown in FIG. 117(E), the MPU 62 displays a devil character on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and notifies the player of the occurrence of the first pending combination announcement, i.e., the first pseudo-consecutive effect, by having this character say "One more time!"

Thereafter, since the first pseudo consecutive performance has been completed, in step S5212 the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times CN of the reserved composite notice has been consumed stored in the RAM 54, thereby updating it to "1." Therefore, in step S5213 the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of times CN of the reserved composite notice has been consumed stored in the RAM 54 is "1" or less, so in step S5204 it executes a look-ahead performance generation process, and in step S5205 it sets a look-ahead performance generation command.
Then, based on the pre-reading effect generation command sent from MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN contained in this pre-reading effect generation command, MPU 62 displays the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect (see Figures 117 (D) and (E)).

In the examples of Figures 117(D) and (E), the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 executes a second look-ahead effect in which the gauge GB has accumulated up to four marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 117 (F), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 117 (F), the MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 117 (F), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 has completed the second advance reading performance, so in step S5207, it subtracts 1 from the value of the advance reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "0".
Also, in the example of Figure 117 (F), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5210, executes a pending synthesis notification generation process, and in step S5211, sets a pending synthesis notification generation command.
Then, based on the hold composite notice generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times CN that the hold composite notice has been consumed, which is included in this hold composite notice generation command, the MPU 62 displays the hold composite notice on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the hold composite notice.

Specifically, since the first pseudo consecutive display has been completed, in step S5212 the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the reserved combination notification has been completed, CN, stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Therefore, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), the MPU 62 displays "x2" in the upper right corner of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to notify the player of the second reserved combination notification, i.e., the occurrence of the second pseudo consecutive display.

Thereafter, since the second pseudo consecutive performance has been completed, in step S5212 the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times CN of the reserved composite announcement that has been consumed stored in the RAM 54, updating it to "2." Therefore, in step S5213 the MPU 52 determines that the value of the number of times CN of the reserved composite announcement that has been consumed stored in the RAM 54 is not "1" or less, and in step S5214 determines that the value of the execution-time pre-read reserved number APN is "0" or less.
Thereafter, the MPU 52 determines in step S5208 that the value of the read-ahead pending number PN is equal to or less than "0," and therefore clears the read-ahead performance flag stored in the RAM 54 in step S5209 to terminate the read-ahead performance. As a result, the MPU 52 terminates the read-ahead performance without executing the third read-ahead performance.

In this way, in the example of Figure 117, the pre-read effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has accumulated to four marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

<About the flow when normal reserved information is stored in the second sub-side reserved area when no pre-reading performance has occurred>
Figure 118 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when normal reserved information is stored in the second sub-side reserved area when no pre-reading effect has occurred. Specifically, Figure 118 (A) is a diagram showing a state in which normal reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area, and normal reserved information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserved area. Also, Figure 118 (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first reserved shift process has been executed after normal reserved information has been stored in each area. Also, Figure 118 (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the second reserved shift process has been executed after normal reserved information has been stored in each area.

As shown in Figure 118(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a variable start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 118(A), the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on a variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold will not be generated, it executes a normal hold generation process in step S2208 and stores the normal hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 118, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa, and stores the normal hold information in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reserve area SRb.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the normal hold pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player that a normal hold has occurred.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that normal hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the content of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the base B12. Also, when the MPU 62 determines that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the content of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, it places a white sphere image, which is a normal hold image, on the base B21.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it, and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B12 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 118 (B), the MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
Here, in the example of Figure 118 (A), normal hold information is stored in the first area SRa1 and second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after normal hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it determines in step S5001 that there is no advance hold information, and therefore does not set the pre-reading performance occurrence flag in RAM 54.
If the MPU 52 does not set the pre-reading effect occurring flag in the RAM 54, it determines in step S5106 whether the second pending effect flag is set in the RAM 54.

Here, in the example of Figure 118 (B), the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb has been moved to the execution area SAE, so in step S2311M, the second hold effect flag is set in RAM 54.
Therefore, in step S5106, the MPU 52 determines that the second hold effect flag is set in the RAM 54, and therefore in step S5107, executes the second hold effect generation process, and in step S5108, sets the second hold effect generation command.
Then, based on the second hold effect generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the second hold effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the second hold effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the MPU 62 displays the words "If it's a reach, it's your chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and also displays a treasure chest and an angel character about to open the treasure chest in the center of the display screen G, thereby displaying and executing the second pending effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 118 (C), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB, and shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variation period. During this high-speed variation period, the MPU 62 begins displaying the variations of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 118 (C), the MPU 62 has begun displaying the variations based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 118 (C), the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side hold area SRa has been moved to the execution area SAE, so in step S2310M, the second hold effect flag stored in RAM 54 is cleared.
Therefore, in step S5106, the MPU 52 determines that the second pending effect flag is not set in the RAM 54, and therefore in step S5104, executes a process to determine a pseudo consecutive effect, and in step S5105, executes a process to determine other effect patterns.

In this way, in the example of FIG. 118, when a pre-reading effect is not occurring, normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, and therefore when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 generates the second hold effect. Furthermore, the second hold effect is only executed when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE when a pre-reading effect is not occurring, so the player can enjoy an effect that is different from the effect executed when a pre-reading effect is occurring or when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side hold area SRa is moved to the execution area SAE.

In this way, in this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as a performance execution means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a performance.
The process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect in step S5102 functions as a period effect generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect (period effect) for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25 (first starting ball entry means).
In addition, the process of determining the presentation pattern in step S2407M functions as a special presentation generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a second pending presentation (special presentation) different from the pre-reading presentation based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26 (second starting ball entry means), and executes the pre-reading presentation instead of the second pending presentation based on the game ball entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period.

In this embodiment, the first starting ball entry means employs the upper actuation port 25, and the second starting ball entry means employs the lower actuation port 26, but any configuration may be used. For example, the first starting ball entry means may employ a large prize entry port, a V prize entry port, a general prize entry port, each actuation port, or a through gate, and the second starting ball entry means may employ a large prize entry port, a V prize entry port, a general prize entry port, each actuation port, or a through gate. Furthermore, the first starting ball entry means and the second starting ball entry means may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the large prize entry port or inside a special device.

With this configuration, the effect pattern determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a second hold effect, which is different from the look-ahead effect, based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26, and executes a look-ahead effect instead of the second hold effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26 during a predetermined period. In this way, if the pachinko machine 1 has executed a look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25, it can execute a look-ahead effect instead of the second hold effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-side hold information storage area 543 functions as an information storage means for storing multiple hold information (sub-side hold information) based on the entry of a game ball into the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26.
The sub-side pending information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) that stores pending information while the pattern display device 36 is executing a variable display, and a first sub-side pending area SRa and a second sub-side pending area SRb (multiple pending areas) that store pending information in the pending state before the pattern display device 36 executes a variable display.

In addition, the hold determination process of step S2002 functions as an information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which the game balls enter the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26.
Furthermore, the hold determination process of step S2002 includes a process (first hold storage means) of step S2202 in which hold information is stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa (first hold region) based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, a process (second hold storage means) of step S2203 in which hold information is stored in a second sub-side hold area SRb (second hold region) different from the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26, and a hold shift process (hold shift means) of step S2104 in which the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb is shifted toward the execution area SAE.
Then, the hold shift process in step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

With this configuration, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, it can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect instead of the second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.

In this reference embodiment, the hold shift process in step S2104 prioritizes shifting the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, but the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb does not have to prioritize shifting toward the execution area SAE. For example, the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa and the second sub-side hold area SRb may be shifted toward the execution area SAE in the order in which the balls entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, when reserve information is stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa by the first reserve storage means, the period effect is a predictive effect that notifies the player of the expected value of the reserved information by utilizing an effect based on the reserved information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which will be consumed before the reserved information.

Here, since the period effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 were to cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa while causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect would be lost. With this configuration, the effect pattern determination process can execute a look-ahead effect instead of the second hold effect based on the entry of game balls into the lower actuation port 26 during a specified period, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead effect.

In this embodiment, the period effect uses a look-ahead effect, but any effect can be used as long as it is executed by the symbol display device 36 for a predetermined period of time. For example, other effects such as a preview display that changes the type of reserved symbol to notify the player of the expected degree of the reserved symbol may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the predictive effect notifies the player of the expectation level of this predictive effect based on the length of a predetermined period.
Specifically, if the pre-reading effect occurred four times in a row, the result of the win/loss contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "jackpot win," and if it occurred three times in a row, the result of the reach occurrence lottery contained in the advance notice information was confirmed to be a "win."

With this configuration, the predictive effect notifies the player of the expected outcome based on the length of the specified period, so the player will pay attention to the length of the specified period.

In this embodiment, the player is notified of the likelihood of a pre-reading effect based on the number of times it occurs consecutively, but it is sufficient if the player is notified of the likelihood of a pre-reading effect based on the length of a predetermined period of time. For example, the player may be notified of the likelihood of a pre-reading effect based on the length of the effect's duration.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information that is to be consumed preferentially in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during a specified period, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines the effect based on the priority reserve information (first reserve combination notice) with the effect based on the reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb that is to be consumed after the priority reserve information (second reserve combination notice), and functions as an effect combination means that presents the player with the appearance of a single game session.

With this configuration, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines the effect based on this priority reserve information with the effect based on the reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which is consumed after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game session.Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can cause the symbol display device 36 to execute the pre-reading effect in place of the second reserve effect based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

In this embodiment, the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect combines an effect based on priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that will be consumed after the priority hold information, but it may also be possible to combine an effect based on priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that will be consumed before the priority hold information.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect stops the progress of the pre-reading effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo-consecutive effect (special effect) based on priority hold information with a pseudo-consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb, which is consumed after the priority hold information.
The pseudo consecutive performance is a performance different from the pre-reading performance and the second hold performance, and can be executed in overlap with the pre-reading performance.

With this configuration, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process stops the progress of the pre-reading effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo consecutive effect based on priority hold information with a pseudo consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that is consumed after the priority hold information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute the pre-reading effect in place of the second hold effect based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during the specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

In this embodiment, the special effect uses a pseudo-consecutive effect, but it is different from the pre-reading effect and the second hold effect, and any effect that can be executed in conjunction with the pre-reading effect may be used. For example, it may be an effect that displays a specific character or the like as a video on the display screen G, an effect that displays a background by changing it, or an effect that displays a changed form of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect in step S5102 functions as a development effect generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect (development effect) that develops gradually over a predetermined number of game plays based on the establishment of the first trigger (the game ball entering the upper operating port 25).
In addition, the hold shift processing in step S2104 functions as a means for increasing the number of times the advancement performance is played based on the establishment of a second trigger (a game ball entering the lower operating port 26) that is different from the first trigger.
The process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect functions as a means for reducing the number of times of development effect play when the number of times of play of the pre-reading effect is increased by the hold shift process.

With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 are equipped with a hold shift process that increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that decreases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played if the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased by a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can maintain the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the first trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the upper operating port 25, and the second trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the lower operating port 26, but any other element may be used. For example, the first trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the large prize opening, V prize opening, general prize opening, each operating port, or through gate, and the second trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the large prize opening, V prize opening, general prize opening, each operating port, or through gate. Furthermore, the first trigger and the second trigger may be triggered by an element other than a game ball entering the opening.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, so even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, the hold shift process can increase the number of times the pre-reading effect is played based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the development effect is a look-ahead effect, so if the pachinko machine 1 were to cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, and then cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect would be lost. With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 are equipped with a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that reduces the number of times the look-ahead effect is played when the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased by a predetermined number of times based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can maintain the predetermined number of times it is played.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the predictive effect notifies the player of the expected outcome based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

Furthermore, with this configuration, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a predetermined number of play rounds, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines the effect based on this priority reserve information with the effect based on reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which is consumed after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single play round.Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the number of play rounds of the pre-reading effect through reserve shift processing based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a predetermined number of play rounds, without changing the number of play rounds.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the look-ahead effect consumption determination process stops the progress of the look-ahead effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo consecutive effect based on priority hold information with a pseudo consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that is consumed after the priority hold information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the number of play times of the look-ahead effect through the hold shift process based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during the predetermined number of play times, without changing the number of play times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of determining whether to consume the advance reading effect in step S5102 functions as a first game round effect generation means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect (game round effect) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25.
In addition, the process of determining whether to consume the advance-reading effect also functions as a second game turn effect generating means that causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26.
The process of determining whether to consume the advance-reading effects also functions as a game-round effect synthesis means that synthesizes the pseudo consecutive effects of the first game-round effect generation means and the pseudo consecutive effects of the second game-round effect generation means, and presents the result to the player as a single game-round effect.

With this configuration, the first game turn effect generation means causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the game ball entering the upper actuation port 25, and the second game turn effect generation means causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the game ball entering the lower actuation port 26. The game turn effect synthesis means then synthesizes the pseudo consecutive effect of the first game turn effect generation means and the pseudo consecutive effect of the second game turn effect generation means, making it appear to the player as a single pseudo consecutive effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the player's attention to the game.

In this embodiment, the game round effect uses a pseudo consecutive effect, but any effect that occurs over one game round may be used. For example, it may be an effect in which a specific character is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G, an effect in which the background is changed, or an effect in which the shape of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is changed and displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the actuation ports 25, 26 both open upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and are arranged side by side vertically, with the upper actuation port 25 positioned at the top and the lower actuation port 26 positioned at the bottom. In contrast, the actuation ports 25, 26 may be arranged, for example, on both sides in the horizontal left and right directions, or in any other positional relationship. Furthermore, while the actuation ports 25, 26 are configured to allow game balls that have passed through separate flow paths to enter, they may also be configured, for example, to distribute game balls that have passed through a common flow path to one of the actuation ports 25, 26, allowing the distributed game balls to enter.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of determining the presentation pattern in step S2407M functions as a continuous presentation generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a series of pseudo consecutive presentations (continuous presentations) that connect multiple presentations based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (the game ball entering the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26).
The pseudo consecutive performances include a reserved composite notice (composite consecutive performance) that executes a series of pseudo consecutive performances by combining multiple game plays, and a normal pseudo consecutive performance (normal consecutive performance) that executes a series of pseudo consecutive performances during one game play.

With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 are equipped with a presentation pattern determination process in step S2407M that causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a series of pseudo consecutive presentations that consecutively execute multiple presentations based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger. The pseudo consecutive presentations include a hold combination notice that executes a series of pseudo consecutive presentations by combining multiple play rounds, and a regular pseudo consecutive presentation that executes a series of pseudo consecutive presentations during a single play round. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can diversify the types of pseudo consecutive presentations.

In this embodiment, the continuous effects employ pseudo-continuous effects, but any effect can be used as long as it involves multiple effects being performed in succession. For example, it can be an effect in which a specific character is displayed as a moving image on the display screen G, an effect in which the background is changed, or an effect in which the shape of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is changed and displayed.

In this embodiment, the specified trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the upper actuation port 25 or the lower actuation port 26, but any other trigger may be used. For example, the specified trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the big prize port, V prize port, general prize port, each actuation port, or through gate. Furthermore, the specified trigger may be triggered by a different trigger than a game ball entering the port.

According to this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.
(1) The process of determining the effect pattern causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a second hold effect that is different from the look-ahead effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26, and causes the look-ahead effect to be executed in place of the second hold effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26 during a predetermined period. According to this, when the pachinko machine 1 causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect for a predetermined period based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25, it can execute a look-ahead effect in place of the second hold effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

(2) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, it can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect instead of the second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.

(3) Because the period effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb while the symbol display device 36 is executing the look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, the continuity of the look-ahead effect will be lost. With this configuration, the effect pattern determination process can execute the look-ahead effect instead of the second hold effect based on the entry of game balls into the lower actuation port 26 during a predetermined period, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead effect.
(4) The predictive effect notifies the player of the expectation level of this predictive effect based on the length of the predetermined period, so the player will pay attention to the length of the predetermined period.

(5) When the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines an effect based on this priority reserve information with an effect based on reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which is consumed after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game session.Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in place of the second reserve effect based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

(6) The process for determining whether to complete the look-ahead effect stops the progress of the look-ahead effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo consecutive effect based on priority hold information with a pseudo consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that is consumed after the priority hold information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute the look-ahead effect in place of the second hold effect based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during the specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

(7) The audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a hold shift process that increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that decreases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played if the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased to a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can maintain the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

(8) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, the hold shift process can increase the number of times the pre-reading effect is played based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.

(9) Since the development effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect will be lost. According to this configuration, the sound and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that reduces the number of times the look-ahead effect is played when the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased by a predetermined number of times based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can maintain the predetermined number of times.
(10) The predictive effect notifies the player of the expectation of the predictive effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

(11) When the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second sub-side reserve area SRb based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a predetermined number of play rounds, the pre-reading effect consumption determination process combines the effect based on this priority reserve information with the effect based on reserve information stored in the first sub-side reserve area SRa or the second sub-side reserve area SRb, which is consumed after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single play round.Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the number of play rounds of the pre-reading effect through reserve shift processing based on game balls entering the lower operating port 26 during a predetermined number of play rounds, without changing the number of play rounds.

(12) The process for determining whether to complete the look-ahead effect stops the progress of the look-ahead effect based on the priority hold information when combining a pseudo consecutive effect based on priority hold information with a pseudo consecutive effect based on hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa or the second sub-side hold area SRb that is consumed after the priority hold information. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the number of play times of the look-ahead effect through the hold shift process based on the entry of game balls into the lower operating port 26 during the specified number of play times, without changing the specified number of play times.

(13) The first game turn effect generating means causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the game ball entering the upper actuation port 25, and the second game turn effect generating means causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a pseudo consecutive effect based on the game ball entering the lower actuation port 26. The game turn effect combining means combines the pseudo consecutive effect of the first game turn effect generating means and the pseudo consecutive effect of the second game turn effect generating means, and presents the result to the player as a single pseudo consecutive effect. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

(14) The audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a process for determining a presentation pattern in step S2407M, which causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a series of pseudo consecutive presentations that consecutively execute multiple presentations based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger. The pseudo consecutive presentations include a hold combination notice that executes a series of pseudo consecutive presentations by combining multiple play rounds, and a regular pseudo consecutive presentation that executes a series of pseudo consecutive presentations during a single play round. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can make a series of multiple types of pseudo consecutive presentations appear to the player as the same series of pseudo consecutive presentations, thereby diversifying the types of pseudo consecutive presentations and allowing the player to play comfortably.

Second Embodiment
A second embodiment of the present invention will now be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the pending combination notice is executed by generating a pseudo consecutive effect in which a pseudo-variable display showing a predetermined stop result is executed over multiple game rounds after the variable display has started on the pattern display device 36, thereby pseudo-combining multiple game rounds and making it appear to the player as a single game round.
In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the hold synthesis effect occurs only while the pre-reading effect is occurring, and one pre-reading effect is consumed by synthesizing multiple play times from the start to the end of the hold synthesis effect, which differs from the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processing than in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur and the process for determining the effect pattern are different from those in the first embodiment. The details of the process for determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur and the process for determining the effect pattern in this embodiment are described below.

<Pre-reading effect occurrence determination process>
Figure 119 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the pre-reading effect occurrence determination process related to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the process of determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will occur, the MPU 52 executes steps S5001 to S5012N as shown in Fig. 119. Note that this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S5008 and then executes the process of step S5012N.

In step S5012N, the MPU 52 clears and resets the pending composite effect occurrence flag stored in RAM 54. This pending composite effect occurrence flag will be explained in detail later.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining an effect pattern.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a performance pattern to select a performance duration (performance duration period) and a performance content as a performance pattern. In this process for determining a performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S5101 to S5108 as shown in FIG. 120. Note that this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the process of step S5102N instead of the process of step S5102, and does not execute the process of step S5103.

In step S5102N, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect has been consumed.
The following describes in detail the process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect will be consumed.

<Prediction performance consumption determination process>
Figure 121 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will be consumed.
In the process of determining whether to consume the advance reading effect, the MPU 52 executes steps S5201 to S5224N as shown in FIG.

In step S5201, the MPU 52 obtains the execution-time prefetch pending number APN.

Here, the execution-time pre-read hold number APN is the total number of advance hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area at the time of execution of the current sub-side hold information, and the number of sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area that will be executed before the advance hold information.
For example, as mentioned above, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Thereafter, when executing the normal hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the two sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.
In this case, if normal hold information is also stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the three sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.

In step S5202, the MPU 52 determines whether the execution time pre-reading pending number APN acquired in step S5201 is less than the pre-reading pending number PN.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, it executes the processing of step S5215N and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, it executes the processing of step S5216N and subsequent steps.

First, the process (the process from step S5215N onward) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN will be described.
In step S5215N, it is determined whether a pending composite effect flag is set in the RAM 54. This pending composite effect flag is a flag for identifying that a pending composite effect has occurred. The MPU 52 sets the pending composite effect flag when a pending composite effect occurs, and clears the pending composite effect flag when the pending composite effect ends.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite effect occurrence flag is not set in RAM 54, this indicates that a pending composite effect is not occurring, and so executes the processing from step S5204 onwards, as in the first embodiment, to generate a pre-reading effect.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite effect generation flag is set in the RAM 54, this indicates that pending composite effect is occurring, and therefore executes the processing from step S5222N onward. The processing from step S5222N onward will be described in detail later.

Next, the process (the process after step S5216N) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN will be described.
In step S5216N, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, similarly to step S5215N.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S5216N that the pending composite effect occurring flag is not set in RAM 54, this indicates that a pending composite effect is not occurring, and therefore executes a pending composite effect start process in step S5217N. In this pending composite effect start process, the MPU 52 determines the start of a pending composite effect based on the number of times the pre-reading effect has been played PRN stored in RAM 54.

Here, the reserved combination effect is a notice display that consumes one read-ahead effect by combining multiple game times. This reserved combination effect occurs only while the read-ahead effect is occurring, and by combining multiple game times from the start to the end of the reserved combination effect, one read-ahead effect is consumed.
Specifically, in the pending combination effect start processing of step S5217N, the MPU 52 determines the start of a pending combination effect that consumes half of one pre-reading effect based on the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been consumed, which is stored in the RAM 54.

In step S5218N, the MPU 52 sets a hold compositing effect start command. Here, the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been used PRN stored in RAM 54 is included in the hold compositing effect start command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. The MPU 52 then stores the hold compositing effect start command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This hold compositing effect start command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the start of the reserved composite effect on the symbol display device 36 based on the reserved composite effect start command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect will be consumed PRN included in this reserved composite effect start command. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or by processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the reserved composite effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the start of the reserved composite effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combination effect that will use up half of the first look-ahead effect; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combination effect that will use up half of the second look-ahead effect; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combination effect that will use up half of the third look-ahead effect; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combination effect that will use up half of the fourth look-ahead effect.

In step S5219N, the MPU 52 sets a pending composite effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54. The MPU 52 then terminates the pre-reading effect consumption determination process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5216N that the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, this indicates that a pending composite effect is occurring, and therefore executes a pending composite effect digestion process in step S5220N. In this pending composite effect digestion process, the MPU 52 determines whether to digest the pending composite effect.
Specifically, in the pending composite effect consumption process of step S5220N, the MPU 52 determines to consume the pending composite effect by extending and prolonging one pre-reading effect without progressing it.

In step S5221N, the MPU 52 sets a pending composite effect consumption command. The MPU 52 then stores the pending composite effect consumption command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. The MPU 52 then terminates the pre-reading effect consumption determination process. This pending composite effect consumption command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the reserved composite effect consumption command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the consumption of the reserved composite effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table at each predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec). Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. This causes the symbol display device 36 to display the reserved composite effect on the display screen G and notify the player that the reserved composite effect has been consumed. Specifically, the MPU 62 notifies the player that the reserved composite effect, which is extended without progressing one look-ahead effect, has been consumed.

Next, the processing (processing from step S5222N onwards) when the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54 will be described.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54, this indicates that a pending composite effect is occurring, and therefore executes pending composite effect termination processing in step S5222N. In this pending composite effect termination processing, the MPU 52 determines the termination of the pending composite effect based on the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been consumed, which is stored in the RAM 54.

Here, the reserved combination effect is a notice display that consumes one read-ahead effect by combining multiple game times. This reserved combination effect occurs only while the read-ahead effect is occurring, and by combining multiple game times from the start to the end of the reserved combination effect, one read-ahead effect is consumed.
Specifically, in the pending composite effect termination process of step S5222N, the MPU 52 determines the termination of the pending composite effect, which consumes half of one pre-reading effect, based on the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been consumed, stored in the RAM 54.

In step S5223N, the MPU 52 sets a pending composite effect end command. Here, the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been used PRN stored in RAM 54 is included in the pending composite effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. The MPU 52 then stores the pending composite effect end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of RAM 54. This pending composite effect end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the pending composite effect end command sent from MPU 52 and the number of times the pre-reading effect has been used (PRN) included in the pending composite effect end command, the MPU 62 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing the end of the pending composite effect on the symbol display device 36. The MPU 62 then outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (e.g., every 20 msec) occurs. Based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 62, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. The VDP 65 also creates drawing data in the frame buffer 69 using (or processing) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the pending composite effect on the display screen G to notify the player of the end of the pending composite effect. Specifically, if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "0", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the reserved composite effect, which consumes half of the first look-ahead effect; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "1", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the reserved composite effect, which consumes half of the second look-ahead effect; if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "2", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the reserved composite effect, which consumes half of the third look-ahead effect; and if the number of times the look-ahead effect has been used PRN is "3", the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the reserved composite effect, which consumes half of the fourth look-ahead effect.

In step S5224N, the MPU 52 clears the pending composite effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. The MPU 52 then executes the processing from step S5206 onwards, as in the first embodiment.

<About the flow when normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area after the pre-reading effect occurs>
FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area, and then normal hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area after a pre-reading effect occurs. Specifically, FIG. 122(A) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 122(B) is a diagram showing a state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 122(C) is a diagram showing a state in which normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area when the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area. Also, FIG. 122(D) is a diagram showing a state in which advance notice hold information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side hold area, and then a pre-reading effect related to the second pre-reading effect has been started. 122(E) is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved composite effect related to the second pre-reading effect is consumed after the advance notice reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area. Also, FIG. 122(F) is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved composite effect related to the second pre-reading effect is terminated after the advance notice reserved information is stored in the second area of the first sub-side reserved area.

As shown in Figure 122 (A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the display of symbol fluctuations by periodically scrolling the symbols in each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 122 (A), the MPU 62 starts the display of symbols based on a fluctuation start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 122, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B12.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 122 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 122 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
122A, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "2" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S5003. Therefore, in any of the cases where the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win", the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", or the win/loss result is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win", the advance notice effect occurrence flag is set in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets a flag indicating that a pre-reading effect is occurring in the RAM 54, the MPU 52 causes the pre-reading effect to occur continuously until the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is consumed.
In the example of Figure 122, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a ``jackpot win'' and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not a ``win.''

In the example of Figure 122, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win" and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is not "win". Therefore, when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
122B, only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5215N, determines whether the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
Here, in step S5012N, the MPU 52 clears and resets the pending composite effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54. In other words, when the MPU 52 generates a pre-reading effect, the MPU 52 clears and resets the pending composite effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54.

Therefore, if the pending composite performance has not started, the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the pending composite performance occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, and therefore executes a pre-reading performance generation process in step S5204 and sets a pre-reading performance generation command in step S5205.
Then, the MPU 62 displays the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect generation command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect generation command, to notify the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect.

In the example of Figure 122 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserve information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserve area contains advance notice reserve information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Here, after the pre-reading effect occurs, if the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 and the second area SRb2 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the bases B21 and B22, as shown in Figure 122 (C).

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 122 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B22, onto base B21, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 122 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 122 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
122(D), advance notice pending information is stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side pending area SRb. In this case, one sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution-time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5216N, determines whether the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the reserved combination effect has not started, the MPU 52 determines in step S5216N that the reserved combination effect occurrence flag is not set in the RAM 54, and therefore executes the reserved combination effect start process in step S5217N and sets the reserved combination effect start command in step S5218N. Thereafter, the MPU 52 sets the reserved combination effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5219N.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of the hold composite performance by displaying the hold composite performance on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold composite performance start command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-read performance has been consumed, which is included in this hold composite performance start command.

Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Based on this number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the start of a reserved combined effect in which the gauge GB has reached three marks in order to perform half of the second pre-reading effect.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 122 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 122 (E), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 122 (E), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
122(E), only the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa stores the advance notice pending information. In this case, other sub-side reservation information will not be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, so in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "1" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5216N, determines whether the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the pending composite effect has started, the MPU 52 determines in step S5216N that the pending composite effect occurring flag is set in RAM 54, and therefore executes the pending composite effect digestion process in step S5220N, and sets the pending composite effect digestion command in step S5221N.
Then, based on the reserved composite effect consumption command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the reserved composite effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player that the reserved composite effect has been consumed.

Specifically, the MPU 62 notifies the player that the pending composite effect has been extended without progressing the second look-ahead effect. In other words, the MPU 62 keeps the gauge GB at three marks.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 122 (F), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 122 (F), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Here, in the example of Figure 122 (F), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first advance reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the advance reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "1".
Also, in the example of Figure 122 (F), since only advance notice hold information is stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 52 will obtain "0" as the execution time pre-read hold number APN in step S5201.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5215N, determines whether the pending composite effect occurrence flag is set in the RAM 54.
If the reserved combination effect has started, the MPU 52 determines in step S5215N that the reserved combination effect in progress flag is set in the RAM 54, and then executes a reserved combination effect end process in step S5222N and sets a reserved combination effect end command in step S5223N. Thereafter, the MPU 52 clears the reserved combination effect in progress flag stored in the RAM 54 in step S5224N.
Then, based on the pending composite effect end command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in this pending composite effect end command, the MPU 62 displays the pending composite effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the end of the pending composite effect.

Specifically, in step S5206, the MPU 52 adds 1 to the value of the number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54, updating it to "1." Based on this number of times the pre-reading effect has been performed PRN, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the end of the pending combined effect, which has accumulated up to four marks on the gauge GB in order to perform half of the second pre-reading effect.

Then, in step S5207, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-read pending number PN stored in RAM 54 to update it to "0." In step S5208, the MPU 52 determines that the value of the pre-read pending number PN is "0" or less, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in RAM 54 to end the pre-read performance. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the pre-read performance without executing a third pre-read performance.

In this way, in the example of Figure 122, the pre-read effect occurs twice in a row, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has accumulated to four marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing display of the patterns to stop.

In this way, in this embodiment, the predictive performance generation process functions as a first development performance generation means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a predictive performance (development performance) that develops gradually over a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25.
In addition, the pending composite effect start process functions as a second development effect generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26.
The pending synthesis effect consumption process and the pending synthesis effect end process function as an advanced effect synthesis means that synthesizes the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effect of the pending synthesis effect start process to execute a series of look-ahead effects.

With this configuration, the look-ahead effect generation process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect that develops in stages over a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper operating port 25, and the hold combination effect start process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower operating port 26. The hold combination effect consumption process and hold combination effect end process can then execute a series of look-ahead effects by combining the look-ahead effects of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effects of the hold combination effect start process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In addition, in this embodiment, the actuation ports 25, 26 both open upward to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter, and are arranged side by side vertically, with the upper actuation port 25 positioned at the top and the lower actuation port 26 positioned at the bottom. In contrast, the actuation ports 25, 26 may be arranged, for example, on both sides in the horizontal left and right directions, or in any other positional relationship. Furthermore, while the actuation ports 25, 26 are configured to allow game balls that have passed through separate flow paths to enter, they may also be configured, for example, to distribute game balls that have passed through a common flow path to one of the actuation ports 25, 26, allowing the distributed game balls to enter.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, so even if the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where it is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect generation process based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, it can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the hold composite effect start process based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb.The hold composite effect consumption process and hold composite effect end process can then execute a series of pre-reading effects by combining the pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect generation process and the pre-reading effect in the hold composite effect start process.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the development effect is a look-ahead effect, so if the pachinko machine 1 were to cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area while causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect would be lost. With this configuration, the hold composite effect consumption process and the hold composite effect end process execute a series of look-ahead effects by combining the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effect of the hold composite effect start process, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead effects.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (1) to (11) in the first embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(15) The look-ahead effect generation process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect that develops stepwise over a predetermined period based on the entry of a gaming ball into the upper actuation port 25, and the hold combination effect start process causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the lower actuation port 26. The hold combination effect consumption process and the hold combination effect end process can execute a series of look-ahead effects by combining the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effect of the hold combination effect start process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows the player to play comfortably.

(16) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 1 is causing the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect generation process based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, it can cause the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect in the hold composite effect start process based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb. The hold composite effect consumption process and the hold composite effect end process can execute a series of pre-reading effects by combining the pre-reading effect in the pre-reading effect generation process and the pre-reading effect in the hold composite effect start process.

(17) Because the development effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 were to cause the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area while causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the continuity of the look-ahead effect would be lost. With this configuration, the hold composite effect consumption process and the hold composite effect end process execute a series of look-ahead effects by combining the look-ahead effect of the look-ahead effect generation process and the look-ahead effect of the hold composite effect start process, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the look-ahead effect.

Third Embodiment
A third embodiment of the present invention will now be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described will be given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the number of times of play of the look-ahead effect is increased in the reserved shift process, the MPU 52 causes the symbol display device 36 to continue to execute the look-ahead effect.
In contrast, in this embodiment, the MPU 52 differs from the first embodiment in that when the number of times the pre-reading performance is played is increased by the hold shift processing, the MPU 52 causes the pattern display device 36 to stop executing the pre-reading performance.

In this embodiment, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 perform different processing than in the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the processing for determining the effect pattern differs from that in the first embodiment. The details of the processing for determining the effect pattern in this embodiment are described below.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process of determining an effect pattern according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the audio and light emission control device 5 executes a process for determining a presentation pattern to select a presentation duration (presentation duration) and a presentation content as a presentation pattern. In this process for determining a presentation pattern, the MPU 52 executes steps S5101 to S5108 as shown in FIG. 123. Note that in this embodiment, the MPU 52 executes a pre-reading presentation completion determination process of step S5102O instead of the pre-reading presentation completion determination process of step S5102, and differs from the first embodiment in that it does not execute the process of step S5103.
The following describes in detail the process for determining whether or not the advance reading effect will be consumed.

<Prediction performance consumption determination process>
Figure 124 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process for determining whether or not a pre-reading effect will be consumed.
In the pre-reading effect consumption determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S5201 to S5209 as shown in Fig. 124. Note that this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the MPU 52 does not execute the process of step S5203 and the processes of steps S5210 to S5214.

In step S5201, the MPU 52 obtains the execution-time prefetch pending number APN.

Here, the execution-time pre-read hold number APN is the total number of advance hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area at the time of execution of the current sub-side hold information, and the number of sub-side hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area that will be executed before the advance hold information.
For example, as mentioned above, if advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and normal pending information is stored in the first area SRa1, the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side holding area SRb, the three sub-side pending information stored in each area will be executed before the advance pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 obtains "4" as the pre-read pending number PN.

Thereafter, when executing the normal hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the two sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.
In this case, if normal hold information is also stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, the three sub-side hold information stored in each area will be executed before the advance hold information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and therefore MPU 52 will obtain "4" as the execution-time pre-read hold number APN.

In step S5202, the MPU 52 determines whether the execution time pre-reading pending number APN acquired in step S5201 is less than the pre-reading pending number PN.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, it executes the processes from step S5204 onwards, as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S5202 that the execution-time pre-reading pending number APN is not less than the pre-reading pending number PN, it executes the processes in and after step S5209.

<About the flow when normal hold information is stored in the second sub-side hold area after the pre-reading effect occurs>
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device when advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area, and then normal pending information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reserve area after the occurrence of a pre-reading effect. Specifically, FIG. 125(A) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. FIG. 125(B) is a diagram showing the state in which the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. FIG. 125(C) is a diagram showing the state in which normal pending information is stored in the second sub-side reserve area when the first pre-reading effect has been completed after advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area. FIG. 125(D) is a diagram showing the state in which advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reserve area, and the pre-reading effect has ended. FIG. 125(E) is a diagram showing the state in which the first variable display has started after the pre-reading effect has ended. Also, Figure 125 (F) shows the state in which the second variable display has started after the pre-reading performance has ended.

As shown in Figure 125(A), the MPU 62 transitions to a high-speed fluctuation period by starting the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on a variable start command sent from the MPU 52. During this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the variable display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 125(A), the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on a variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

Furthermore, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that a notice hold should be generated, it executes a notice hold generation process in step S2207M and stores the notice hold information in the first free storage area in the sub-side reserve area, i.e., the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold memory number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of Fig. 125, the MPU 52 stores the notice hold information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserve area SRa.
Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the advance hold image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that advance hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it places a flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image, on the base B13.

After announcing the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, the MPU 62 executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 125 (B), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, shifts and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11, and shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B13, onto base B12.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 125 (B), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Then, based on the stop result command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 notifies the result of the lottery by displaying various combinations of symbols stopped on the pay line L as the stop result (not shown).

In addition, when executing a shift of normal hold and notice hold, the MPU 52 executes a process of determining whether a pre-reading effect will occur in step S2309M.
125A, the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa has the regular pending information stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2. In this case, the two sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa, so the MPU 52 acquires "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003.

Therefore, when the MPU 52 executes the first hold shift process after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, it will obtain "3" as the pre-read hold number PN in step S5003. Therefore, if the win/loss result included in the advance notice hold information stored in the memory area of the sub-side hold area is "jackpot win," and if the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win," it will set a pre-read effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

Then, in step S5007, when the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54, the pre-reading effect will be continuously generated until the pre-reading effect occurrence flag stored in the RAM 54 is cleared.
In the example of Figure 125, we will explain the case where the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not a "jackpot win" but the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win."

In the example of Figure 125, the win/loss result included in the advance pending information stored in the memory area of the sub-side pending area is not "jackpot win", and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win", so when the first pending shift process is executed after the advance pending information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side pending area SRa, the MPU 52 obtains "3" as the pre-read pending number PN in step S5003, and sets a pre-reading effect occurrence flag in RAM 54 in step S5007.

When the MPU 52 sets the pre-reading effect occurrence flag in the RAM 54 in step S5007, it executes a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102.
125B, the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5204, executes a pre-read performance generation process, and in step S5205, sets a pre-read performance generation command.
Then, the MPU 62 notifies the player of the occurrence of the pre-reading effect by displaying the pre-reading effect on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the pre-reading effect occurrence command sent from the MPU 52 and the number of times PRN the pre-reading effect has been used, which is included in the pre-reading effect occurrence command.

In the example of Figure 125 (B), the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect after determining that the sub-side reserved information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reserved area contains advance notice reserved information. Specifically, in step S5008, the MPU 52 resets the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN stored in RAM 54 by substituting "0", and therefore the MPU 62 executes the first look-ahead effect, with the gauge GB reaching two marks, based on the number of times the look-ahead effect has been performed PRN.

Here, after the pre-reading effect occurs, if the MPU 62 determines, based on the contents of the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, that normal hold information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb, it places a white sphere image, which is the normal hold image, on the base B21, as shown in Figure 125 (C).

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 125 (D), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B21, onto the execution base AB, places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B12 without shifting it, and places the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto base B11 without shifting it.
In this way, the hold shift process of step S2104 shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 125 (D), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

Here, in the example of Figure 125 (D), after the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, the MPU 52 completes the first pre-reading performance, and therefore in step S5207, subtracts 1 from the value of the pre-reading hold number PN stored in RAM 54 and updates it to "2".
125(D), the first sub-side reserved area SRa stores the advance notice pending information, and the first sub-side reserved area SRa1 stores the regular pending information. In this case, the one sub-side reserved information stored in each area will be executed before the advance notice pending information stored in the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side reserved area SRa. Therefore, in step S5201, the MPU 52 acquires "2" as the execution-time read-ahead pending number APN.

Therefore, in step S5202, the MPU 52 determines that the execution-time pre-read pending number APN is not less than the pre-read pending number PN, and therefore in step S5209, clears the pre-read performance in progress flag stored in RAM 54. As a result, the MPU 52 ends the pre-read performance without executing a second pre-read performance.

As such, in the example of Figure 125, the pre-read effect occurs only once, so it is not confirmed that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win". Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached two marks, so using this as a guide, the player can understand that the win/loss result included in the pending notice information is a "jackpot win" and that the result of the reach occurrence lottery is a "win" without waiting for the changing pattern display to stop.

In this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is ended, the MPU 52 does not generate the second hold effect even when the sub-side hold information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side hold area SRb is moved to the execution area SAE, but the second hold effect may also be generated.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 125 (E), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts the white sphere image, which is the normal hold image that was placed on base B11, onto the execution base AB, and shifts the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B12, onto base B11.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 125 (E), MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

If the look-ahead effect had continued without ending it, it would have occurred three times in a row, and the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in this normal pending information would have been confirmed as a "win." Also, in this case, as mentioned above, the gauge GB has reached six marks, so using this as a guide, the player would know that the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in the advance pending information was a "win" without waiting for the changing symbol display to stop.

However, since the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in this normal pending information is "winning" or not is predetermined regardless of the number of consecutive pre-reading effects, there may be a contradiction with the number of consecutive pre-reading effects.
In this embodiment, the MPU 52 ends the look-ahead performance without executing the look-ahead performance a second time, thereby avoiding such a contradiction.

In this embodiment, the MPU 52 ends the look-ahead performance without executing a second look-ahead performance, but if there is no contradiction between whether the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in this normal pending information is a "win" or not and the number of consecutive look-ahead performances, in other words, if the result of the reach occurrence lottery included in this normal pending information is a "win," the look-ahead performance may be continued.
In addition, in this embodiment, the MPU 52 ends the look-ahead performance without executing the look-ahead performance a second time, but if the win/loss result included in the advance notice information is a "jackpot win," the look-ahead performance will always be executed four or more times, so the look-ahead performance may be continued.

Next, the MPU 62 announces the result of the lottery for the regular hold information stored in the execution area SAE, and then executes the shift of the regular hold and the notice hold by displaying them on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 125 (F), based on the hold display shift command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 shifts and places the flashing white sphere image, which is the advance hold image that was placed on base B11, onto execution base AB.

Then, based on the variation start command sent from MPU 52, MPU 62 starts the variable display of multiple symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, thereby transitioning to a high-speed variable display period. During this high-speed variable display period, MPU 62 starts the variable display of symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols of each symbol column Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this embodiment). In Figure 125 (F), MPU 62 has started the variable display based on the variation start command related to the advance pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE as a result of executing the pending shift process.

In the example of Figure 125, the win/loss result included in the advance reservation information stored in the memory area of the sub-side reservation area is not "jackpot win," and the result of the reach occurrence lottery is "win," so the MPU 62 will generate a reach display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of determining whether to consume the pre-reading effect in step S5102O functions as a development effect generating means that causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a pre-reading effect (development effect) that develops gradually over a predetermined number of game plays based on the establishment of the first trigger (the game ball entering the upper operating port 25).
In addition, the hold shift processing in step S2104 functions as a means for increasing the number of times the advancement performance is played based on the establishment of a second trigger (a game ball entering the lower operating port 26) that is different from the first trigger.
The pre-reading performance consumption determination process functions as a development performance stopping means that causes the pattern display device 36 to stop the execution of the pre-reading performance when the number of times the pre-reading performance is played is increased by the hold shift process.

With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a hold shift process that increases the number of times the pre-reading effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and a hold shift process that causes the pattern display device 36 to stop the execution of the pre-reading effect if the hold shift process increases the number of times the pre-reading effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the pre-reading effect is played is increased by a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the pre-reading effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In this embodiment, the first trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the upper operating port 25, and the second trigger is triggered by a game ball entering the lower operating port 26, but any other element may be used. For example, the first trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the large prize opening, V prize opening, general prize opening, each operating port, or through gate, and the second trigger may be triggered by a game ball entering the large prize opening, V prize opening, general prize opening, each operating port, or through gate. Furthermore, the first trigger and the second trigger may be triggered by an element other than a game ball entering the opening.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the development effect is a look-ahead effect. Therefore, if the pachinko machine 1 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the look-ahead effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. With this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6 are equipped with a look-ahead effect completion determination process that causes the pattern display device 36 to stop executing the look-ahead effect when the hold shift process increases the number of play times for the look-ahead effect. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of play times.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same functions and effects as those (4), (8), and (10) in the first embodiment, the following functions and effects can be achieved.
(18) The audio and light-emitting control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a hold shift process that increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and a look-ahead effect completion determination process that causes the symbol display device 36 to stop executing the look-ahead effect if the hold shift process increases the number of times the look-ahead effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the look-ahead effect is played is increased by a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

(19) Because the development effect is a look-ahead effect, if the pachinko machine 1 causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a look-ahead effect based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa, and then causes the pattern display device 36 to execute a second hold effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb, the look-ahead effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to this configuration, the audio and light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 are equipped with a look-ahead effect consumption determination process that causes the pattern display device 36 to stop executing the look-ahead effect when the hold shift process increases the number of play times for the look-ahead effect. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the look-ahead effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of play times.

[Inventions extracted from each embodiment and each reference form]
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments and reference forms. Although the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments and reference forms are shown in parentheses, the features of the inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments and reference forms, and any modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of features within the scope of achieving the objectives of the features of the inventions are also included in the features of the inventions.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A first effect means (notice pending effect determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first effect (pre-reading effect) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
A second effect means (special hold effect determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second effect (effect for consuming special reserve) different from the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect means continues to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended.

According to Feature A1 of the present invention, the second presentation means, based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, causes the variable display means to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation during a predetermined period of time, overlapping with the first presentation, and the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. This allows the gaming machine to execute the second presentation even when the variable display means is executing the first presentation for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first trigger, and to continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature A1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to Feature A2 of this invention, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended and the second presentation can be executed, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature A1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to Feature A3 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A3 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
The first performance means stores data relating to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
The second performance means causes the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry means as the second trigger;
An image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first performance layer and the second performance layer in order of priority;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature A4 of the present invention, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying multiple layers including a first presentation layer and a second presentation layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second presentation layer in which data relating to a second presentation based on a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means is stored by the second presentation means on a first presentation layer in which data relating to a first presentation based on a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is stored by the first presentation means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer. Therefore, even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature A4 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to Feature A5 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when a first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on a game ball entering the first start ball entry means, a second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in Feature A5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect is a predictive effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area that is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature A6 of the present invention, the first effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the first effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the first pending area based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means, and the second effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the second pending area based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even when the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in Feature A5 or Feature A6 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved picture associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means displays the reserved pattern on the variable display means by storing data related to the reserved pattern in a reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the second performance layer.

According to Feature A7 of the present invention, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved image in a reserved image layer that has a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved image. Therefore, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in Feature A5 or Feature A6 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved picture associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means stores data related to the reserved pattern in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved pattern.

According to Feature A8 of the present invention, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved image in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved image. Therefore, when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means. Furthermore, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved image on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A8 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out.

According to Feature A9 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out, so that the second presentation can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine described in Feature A9 of the present invention,
The second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation after the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation.

According to Feature A10 of this invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation via the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to terminate the second presentation, thereby enabling the second presentation to be terminated and the first presentation to be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A8 of the present invention,
The second effect means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once.

According to Feature A11 of the present invention, the second effect means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once, thereby enabling the second effect to be ended quickly.

Feature Group A of the present invention allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature Group B>
Feature B1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A specific performance means (pre-reading performance and special reserved performance determination process) that stores data related to a specific performance (pre-reading performance and special reserved performance) in a specific performance layer (second layer L2 and third layer L3) based on the establishment of a specific opportunity, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the specific performance;
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying the common image on the variable display means by storing data relating to a common image different from the specific effect in a common layer (first layer L1) having a higher priority than the specific effect layer;
A gaming machine characterized by having an image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) that displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying multiple layers including the specific performance layer in order of priority.

According to feature B1 of the present invention, the information notification means stores data relating to a common image that is different from the specific effect in a common layer that has a higher priority than the specific effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the common image. Therefore, when a specific effect is executed, the common image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the common image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
an information storage means (reservation determination process) for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having an information notification means that displays a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information as the common image on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means.

According to Feature B2 of the present invention, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved image in a common layer, which has a higher priority than the specific effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved image. Therefore, when a specific effect is to be executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B1 or Feature B2 of the present invention,
The specific performance means is
A first effect means (notice pending effect determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first effect (pre-reading effect) as the specific effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first trigger as the specific trigger;
A second effect means (special hold effect determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second effect (effect for consuming special hold) as the specific effect different from the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity as the specific effect different from the first opportunity,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect means continues to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended.

According to Feature B3 of this invention, the second presentation means, based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, causes the variable display means to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation during a predetermined period of time, overlapping with the first presentation, and the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. This allows the gaming machine to execute the second presentation even when the variable display means is executing the first presentation for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first trigger, and to continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to Feature B4 of this group of inventions, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended and the second presentation can be executed, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to Feature B5 of this invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features B3 to B5 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The specific performance means is
The first performance means stores data relating to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) as the specific performance layer, when the game ball enters the first starting ball entry means as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
a second performance means for causing the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) as the specific performance layer having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry means as the second trigger;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature B6 of the present invention, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying multiple layers including a first presentation layer and a second presentation layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second presentation layer in which data relating to a second presentation based on a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means is stored by the second presentation means on a first presentation layer in which data relating to a first presentation based on a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is stored by the first presentation means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer. Therefore, even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B6 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature B7 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when a first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on a game ball entering the first start ball entry means, a second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in Feature B7 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect is a predictive effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area that is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature B8 of the present invention, the first effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the first effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the first pending area based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means, and the second effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the second pending area based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even when the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features B3 to B8 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out.

According to Feature B9 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out, so that the second presentation can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in feature B9 of the present invention,
The second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation after the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation.

According to Feature B10 of this invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation via the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to terminate the second presentation, thereby enabling the second presentation to be terminated and the first presentation to be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features B3 to B8 of the present invention,
The second effect means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once.

According to Feature B11 of the present invention, the second effect means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once, thereby enabling the second effect to be ended quickly.

Feature B of the present invention allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
In this type of gaming machine, the information storage means stores reserved information in the order in which the gaming balls enter the operating port, and the variable display means displays a common image such as a reserved pattern associated with the reserved information based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means. After starting to display the patterns in a variable manner, the gaming machine executes a number of different effects that make the player expect the gaming state to transition to a specific control state.

However, because multiple types of effects are executed in a disorderly manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, they can affect the common image displayed on the variable display means, which can make it difficult for players to enjoy playing the game.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A first effect means (notice pending effect determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first effect (pre-reading effect) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
A second effect means (special hold effect determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second effect (effect for consuming special reserve) different from the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out.

According to Feature C1 of the present invention, the second presentation means, upon the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, causes the variable display means to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation during a predetermined period of time, overlapping with the first presentation. The second presentation means then causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading it out, thereby allowing the second presentation to end without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the present invention,
The second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation after the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation.

According to Feature C2 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation via the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to terminate the second presentation, thereby making it possible to terminate the second presentation and execute the first presentation without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature C3.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A first effect means (notice pending effect determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first effect (pre-reading effect) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
A second effect means (special hold effect determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second effect (effect for consuming special reserve) different from the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once.

According to Feature C3 of the present invention, the second presentation means, upon the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, causes the variable display means to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation during a predetermined period, overlapping with the first presentation. The second presentation means then causes the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once, thereby enabling the second presentation to be ended quickly.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect means continues to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended.

According to Feature C4 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. This allows the gaming machine to execute the second presentation even when the variable display means has been executing the first presentation for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first trigger, and to continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to Feature C5 of this group of inventions, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended and the second presentation can be executed, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to Feature C6 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features C4 to C6 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
The first performance means stores data relating to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
The second performance means causes the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry means as the second trigger;
An image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first performance layer and the second performance layer in order of priority;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature C7 of the present invention, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying multiple layers including a first presentation layer and a second presentation layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second presentation layer in which data relating to a second presentation based on a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means is stored by the second presentation means on a first presentation layer in which data relating to a first presentation based on a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is stored by the first presentation means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer. Therefore, even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in feature C7 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature C8 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when a first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on a game ball entering the first start ball entry means, a second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect is a predictive effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area that is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature C9 of the present invention, the first effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the first effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the first pending area based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means, and the second effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the second pending area based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even when the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in Feature C8 or Feature C9 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved picture associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means displays the reserved pattern on the variable display means by storing data related to the reserved pattern in a reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the second performance layer.

According to feature C10 of the present invention, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved image in a reserved image layer that has a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved image. Therefore, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine described in Feature C8 or Feature C9 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved picture associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means stores data related to the reserved pattern in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved pattern.

According to feature C11 of the present invention, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved image in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved image. Therefore, when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means. Furthermore, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved image on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature C of the present invention allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A first effect means (notice pending effect determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first effect (pre-reading effect) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
A second effect means (special hold effect determination process) is provided for causing the variable display means to execute a second effect (effect for consuming special reserve) different from the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect is more useful to a player than the first effect.

According to Feature D1 of this invention, the second presentation means, upon the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, causes the variable display means to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation during a predetermined period of time, overlapping with the first presentation. Since the second presentation is more useful to the player than the first presentation, the player will pay attention to whether or not the second presentation will be executed during the predetermined period of time. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's level of attention to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature D1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect means continues to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended.

According to Feature D2 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. This allows the gaming machine to execute the second presentation even when the variable display means has been executing the first presentation for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first trigger, and to continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature D2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to Feature D3 of this invention, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended and the second presentation can be executed, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature D2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to Feature D4 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features D2 to D4 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
The first performance means stores data relating to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
The second performance means causes the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry means as the second trigger;
An image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first performance layer and the second performance layer in order of priority;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature D5 of the present invention, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying multiple layers including a first presentation layer and a second presentation layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second presentation layer in which a second presentation means stores data relating to a second presentation based on a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means on a first presentation layer in which a first presentation means stores data relating to a first presentation based on a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer. Therefore, even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in Feature D5 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature D6 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when a first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on a game ball entering the first start ball entry means, a second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect is a predictive effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area that is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature D7 of the present invention, the first effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the first effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the first pending area based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means, and the second effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the second pending area based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even when the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in Feature D6 or Feature D7 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved picture associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means displays the reserved pattern on the variable display means by storing data related to the reserved pattern in a reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the second performance layer.

According to feature D8 of the present invention, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved image in a reserved image layer that has a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved image. Therefore, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in Feature D6 or Feature D7 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved picture associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means stores data related to the reserved pattern in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved pattern.

According to feature D9 of the present invention, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved image in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved image. Therefore, when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means. Furthermore, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved image on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features D2 to D9 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out.

According to Feature D10 of the present invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out, thereby allowing the second presentation to end without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature D11.
In the gaming machine described in Feature D10 of the present invention group,
The second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation after the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation.

According to Feature D11 of this invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation via the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to terminate the second presentation, thereby enabling the second presentation to be terminated and the first presentation to be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature D12.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features D2 to D9 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once.

According to feature D12 of the present invention, the second effect means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once, thereby enabling the second effect to be ended quickly.

By virtue of Feature Group D of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, because multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem in that the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
a first effect means (pre-announcement pending effect determination process) for causing the variable display means to execute a first effect (pre-reading effect) having a plurality of expectancies over a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
The gaming machine includes:
A second effect means (special hold effect determination process) is provided for executing a second effect (effect for consuming special reserve) different from the first effect in overlap with the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means changes the expectation level of the first presentation during an overlap period in which the second presentation means is executing the second presentation.

According to Feature E1 of the present invention, the second presentation means executes a second presentation different from the first presentation overlapping with the first presentation during a predetermined period based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and the first presentation means changes the expected degree of the first presentation during the overlapping period during which the second presentation means is executing the second presentation. This allows the gaming machine to execute the second presentation even when the variable display means is executing the first presentation for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and to change the expected degree of the first presentation during the overlapping period during which the second presentation means is executing the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature E1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
The second effect means (special hold effect determination process) is provided, which causes the variable display means to execute a second effect (effect for consuming special hold) different from the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect means continues to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended.

According to Feature E2 of the present invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. This allows the gaming machine to execute the second presentation even when the variable display means has been executing the first presentation for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the first trigger, and to continue to execute the first presentation after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature E2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation.

According to Feature E3 of this invention, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to suspend the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, and causes the variable display means to resume the first presentation when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation. Therefore, even when the first presentation is being executed, the first presentation can be suspended and the second presentation can be executed, and the first presentation can be resumed after the second presentation has ended. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first presentation.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature E2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during an overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation.

According to Feature E4 of this invention, the first presentation means continues to execute the first presentation during the overlap period in which the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, so the first presentation can be continued regardless of the second presentation. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first presentation.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E4 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
The first performance means stores data relating to the first performance in a first performance layer (third layer L3) when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means as the first trigger, thereby causing the variable display means to execute the first performance;
The second performance means causes the variable display means to execute the second performance by storing data relating to the second performance in a second performance layer (second layer L2) having a higher priority than the first performance layer, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entry means as the second trigger;
An image synthesis means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first performance layer and the second performance layer in order of priority;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer.

According to feature E5 of the present invention, the image synthesis means displays an image on the variable display means by overlaying multiple layers including a first presentation layer and a second presentation layer in order of priority, so that an image can be displayed on the variable display means by overlaying a second presentation layer in which data relating to a second presentation based on a game ball entering the second starting ball entry means is stored by the second presentation means on a first presentation layer in which data relating to a first presentation based on a game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is stored by the first presentation means. The second presentation means stores data relating to the second presentation in the second presentation layer so as to overwrite the data relating to the first presentation stored in the first presentation layer. Therefore, even when the first presentation based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is being executed, the second presentation based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means can be overwritten and executed, and after the second presentation ends, the data relating to the second presentation stored in the second presentation layer can be erased, allowing the first presentation means to continue executing the first presentation.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in Feature E5 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when a first effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area is being executed based on a game ball entering the first start ball entry means, a second effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area can be executed based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in Feature E6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first effect is a predictive effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area that is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature E7 of the present invention, the first effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the first effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the first pending area based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means, and the second effect is being executed based on the pending information stored in the second pending area based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means, the continuity of the first effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can execute the second effect even when the variable display means is executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first trigger, and can continue to execute the first effect after the second effect has ended, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the first effect.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in Feature E6 or Feature E7 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved picture associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means displays the reserved pattern on the variable display means by storing data related to the reserved pattern in a reserved pattern layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the second performance layer.

According to Feature E8 of the present invention, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved image in a reserved image layer that has a higher priority than the second effect layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved image. Therefore, when the first effect and the second effect are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in Feature E6 or Feature E7 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information notification means (hold occurrence processing) for displaying a reserved picture associated with the reserved information on the variable display means based on the reserved information stored in the information storage means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information notification means stores data related to the reserved pattern in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved pattern.

According to Feature E9 of the present invention group, the information notification means stores data relating to the reserved image in both the first performance layer and the second performance layer, thereby causing the variable display means to display the reserved image. Therefore, when the first performance and the second performance are executed, the reserved image can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the reserved image displayed on the variable display means. Furthermore, the information notification means can reliably display the reserved image on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E9 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out.

According to Feature E10 of this invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation by fading out, so that the second presentation can be ended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature E11.
In the gaming machine described in Feature E10 of the present invention,
The second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation after the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation.

According to Feature E11 of this invention, the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation via the first presentation means, and then causes the variable display means to terminate the second presentation, so that the second presentation can be terminated and the first presentation can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature E12.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features E2 to E9 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second presentation all at once.

According to Feature E12 of the present invention, the second effect means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once, thereby enabling the second effect to be ended quickly.

By virtue of Feature Group E of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a stage (two-stage stage 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) having a rolling surface for rolling gaming balls flowing down the gaming area and causing the gaming balls to temporarily roll and fall on the rolling surface; and a ball entry means (upper operating port 25) for allowing the gaming balls that have fallen from the stage to enter the game machine;
The stage is
Guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 74) of the stage (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a blocking means (second plate 783) that, when the guiding means has guided at least one gaming ball to the rolling surface of the stage, prevents the guiding means from guiding a subsequent gaming ball to the rolling surface of the stage.

According to Feature F1 of this invention group, when the guiding means has guided at least one gaming ball to the rolling surface of the stage, the blocking means prevents the guiding means from guiding subsequent gaming balls to the rolling surface of the stage. Therefore, gaming balls guided to the stage by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the stage without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the present invention,
The stage is
a first stage (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F);
a second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage,
The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 74) of the first stage,
The blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 76) of the second stage, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage.

According to Feature F2 of the present invention, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the second stage, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage. Therefore, even if the blocking means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the first stage, the player can still enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball guided to the rolling surface of the second stage.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature F2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first stage is a stage that is more advantageous to a player than the second stage.

According to Feature F3 of the present invention, a gaming ball guided to the first stage by the guidance means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. Since the first stage is more advantageous to the player than the second stage, the player can enjoy the movement of the gaming ball guided to the rolling surface of the first stage with peace of mind.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F3 of the present invention,
The blocking means is
A blocking state in which the guiding means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage;
and a non-blocking state in which the guiding means does not block the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage,
The stage is
a switching means (stage allocation mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the blocking means between a blocking state and a non-blocking state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the switching means switches the blocking means to a blocking state when the guiding means has guided at least one gaming ball to the rolling surface of the stage.

According to Feature F4 of this invention group, the stage is equipped with a switching means for switching the blocking means between a blocking state and a non-blocking state, and the switching means switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding means has guided at least one gaming ball to the rolling surface of the stage, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the present invention,
The switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to Feature F5 of this invention, the switching means cooperates with the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means to switch the blocking means to a non-blocking state, allowing the player to further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the present invention,
The switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to Feature F6 of the present invention, the switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent gaming ball that is different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, allowing the player to further enjoy the movement of the subsequent gaming ball that is different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guidance means.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in feature F6 of the present invention,
The switching means
a contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786) for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guide means;
The contact means is disposed at a position where it will come into contact with some of the subsequent game balls that are different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means.

According to Feature F7 of this invention group, the switching means includes contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, and the contact means is disposed in a position where it will contact some of the subsequent gaming balls different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guidance means. As a result, the player will pay attention to whether or not the subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the stage by the guidance means will contact the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in feature F6 of the present invention,
The switching means
A contact means (fourth plate 789G) is provided which switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guide means,
The contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent game balls other than the game ball guided to the stage by the guide means.

According to Feature F8 of this invention group, the switching means includes contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, and the contact means is positioned so that it will contact all of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guidance means, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage with peace of mind.

By virtue of Feature Group F of the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
The gaming machine also includes a stage that temporarily rolls and drops gaming balls flowing down the gaming area, and the starting ball entry means allows gaming balls that have fallen from this stage to enter the game.

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball rolling on the stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move in a way that is disadvantageous to the player, posing a problem in that the gaming machine will no longer allow the player to enjoy playing comfortably.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a stage (two-stage stage 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) having a rolling surface for rolling gaming balls flowing down the gaming area and causing the gaming balls to temporarily roll and fall on the rolling surface; and a ball entry means (upper operating port 25) for allowing the gaming balls that have fallen from the stage to enter the game machine;
The stage is
a first stage (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F);
a second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage;
The game machine has a first guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the first stage, and a second guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the second stage, and is provided with stage guidance means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding the game ball to either the first stage or the second stage;
The stage guide means
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a switching means (stage allocation mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the stage guidance means to either a first guidance state or a second guidance state.

According to Feature G1 of this invention group, the stage guiding means includes a switching means for switching the stage guiding means between a first guiding state and a second guiding state. The switching means switches between the first guiding state, which guides game balls only to the first stage, and the second guiding state, which guides game balls only to the second stage, so that the player focuses their attention on the state of the stage guiding means. Furthermore, by switching to the second guiding state (first guiding state), the switching means prevents the stage guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls onto the rolling surface of the first stage (second stage). Therefore, a game ball guided to the first stage (second stage) by the stage guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage (second stage) without being obstructed by subsequent game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the switching means switches the stage guiding means to a second guiding state when the stage guiding means guides at least one gaming ball to the rolling surface of the first stage.

According to Feature G2 of this invention group, the switching means switches the stage guiding means to the second guiding state when the stage guiding means has guided at least one gaming ball to the rolling surface of the first stage. This allows the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means to roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. This allows the gaming machine to allow players to play comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first stage is a stage that is more advantageous to a player than the second stage.

According to Feature G3 of the present invention, a game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being obstructed by subsequent game balls. Since the first stage is more advantageous to the player than the second stage, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the first stage with peace of mind.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature G2 or Feature G3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the switching means switches the stage guiding means to a first guiding state by cooperating with the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

According to Feature G4 of this invention, the switching means cooperates with the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guide means to switch the stage guide means to the first guide state, allowing the player to further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guide means.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature G2 or Feature G3 of the present invention group,
The switching means switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

According to Feature G5 of this invention, the switching means switches the stage guidance means to the first guidance state by cooperating with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means, allowing the player to further enjoy the movement of the subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the present invention,
The switching means
a contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786) for switching the stage guiding means to a first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means;
The contact means is disposed at a position where it will come into contact with some of the subsequent game balls that are different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means.

According to Feature G6 of this invention group, the switching means includes contact means that switches the stage guidance means to the first guidance state by contacting a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means, and the contact means is disposed in a position where it will contact some of the subsequent gaming balls different from the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means. As a result, the player will pay attention to whether or not the subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first stage by the stage guidance means will contact the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the present invention,
The switching means
a contact means (fourth plate 789G) for switching the stage guiding means to a first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means;
The contact means is disposed at a position where it contacts all of the subsequent game balls other than the game ball guided to the first stage by the guide means.

According to Feature G7 of this invention group, the switching means includes contact means that switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by coming into contact with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means, and the contact means is positioned so that it will come into contact with all of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls guided to the rolling surface of the first stage with peace of mind.

By virtue of this feature group G of the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
The gaming machine also includes a stage that temporarily rolls and drops gaming balls flowing down the gaming area, and the starting ball entry means allows gaming balls that have fallen from this stage to enter the game.

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball rolling on the stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move in a way that is disadvantageous to the player, posing a problem in that the gaming machine will no longer allow the player to enjoy playing comfortably.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a launching means (launching handle 16) that launches gaming balls toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board, and a flow path (two-stage stage 7, 7E) that allows gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to flow in,
The flow path is
a first flow path (upper stage 71, 71E);
a second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path;
The device has a first guidance state in which the gaming ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guidance state in which the gaming ball is guided only to the second flow path, and is provided with flow path guidance means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) that guides the gaming ball to either the first flow path or the second flow path;
The flow path guide means
a switching means (stage sorting mechanism 73, 73E, 73H) for switching the flow path guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state;
The switching means switches to the first guidance state by cooperating with the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means.

According to Feature H1 of the present invention, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means between a first guiding state, in which the gaming ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guiding state, in which the gaming ball is guided only to the second flow path, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the flow path guiding means. Furthermore, by switching to the second guiding state, the switching means prevents the flow path guiding means from guiding subsequent gaming balls to the first flow path, so that a gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. Furthermore, because the switching means switches to the first guiding state in cooperation with the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, the player can further enjoy the movement of the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature H2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature H1 of the present invention,
The switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state when the flow path guiding means guides at least one game ball to the first flow path.

According to Feature H2 of the present invention, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state when the flow path guiding means has guided at least one gaming ball to the first flow path. This allows the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means to roll through the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. This allows the gaming machine to allow the player to play comfortably.

Feature H3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature H2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first flow path is a flow path that is more advantageous to a player than the second flow path.

According to Feature H3 of the present invention, a gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. Since the first flow path is more advantageous to the player than the second flow path, the player can enjoy the movement of the gaming ball guided to the first flow path with peace of mind.

By virtue of Feature Group H of the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
The gaming machine also has a flow path such as a stage that temporarily rolls and drops gaming balls flowing down the gaming area, and the starting ball entry means allows gaming balls that have fallen from this stage to enter the game.

However, if a subsequent gaming ball comes into contact with a gaming ball rolling on a flow path such as a stage, the gaming ball rolling on the stage may move in a way that is disadvantageous to the player, posing a problem in that the gaming machine will no longer allow the player to enjoy playing comfortably.

<Feature Group I>
Feature I1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching game balls toward a game area formed in front of a game board; and a flow path (two-stage stages 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to flow in;
The flow path is
a first flow path (upper stages 71, 71E, 71F);
a second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path;
The device has a first guidance state in which the gaming ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guidance state in which the gaming ball is guided only to the second flow path, and is provided with flow path guidance means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) that guides the gaming ball to either the first flow path or the second flow path;
The flow path guide means
a switching means (stage sorting mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the flow path guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state;
The switching means switches to the first guidance state by cooperating with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means.

According to Feature I1 of the present invention, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means between a first guiding state, in which gaming balls are guided only to the first flow path, and a second guiding state, in which gaming balls are guided only to the second flow path, so that the player will pay attention to the state of the flow path guiding means. Furthermore, by switching to the second guiding state, the switching means prevents the flow path guiding means from guiding subsequent gaming balls to the first flow path, so that a gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. Furthermore, the switching means switches to the first guiding state in cooperation with a subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, so that the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent gaming ball different from the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature I1 of the present invention,
The switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state when the flow path guiding means guides at least one game ball to the first flow path.

According to Feature I2 of this invention group, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state when the flow path guiding means has guided at least one gaming ball to the first flow path. This allows the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means to roll through the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. This allows the gaming machine to allow the player to play comfortably.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature I2 of the present invention,
The switching means
a contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786) for switching the flow path guiding means to a first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with some of the subsequent gaming balls that are different from the gaming balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means.

According to Feature I3 of this invention group, the switching means includes contact means that switches the flow path guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, and the contact means is disposed in a position where it will contact some of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. As a result, the player will pay attention to whether or not the subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means will contact the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature I4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature I2 of the present invention,
The switching means
A contact means (fourth plate 789G) is provided for switching the flow path guiding means to a first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with all of the subsequent gaming balls other than the gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means.

According to Feature I4 of this invention group, the switching means includes contact means that switches the flow path guiding means to the first guiding state by coming into contact with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, and the contact means is positioned so that it will come into contact with all of the subsequent game balls different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls guided to the first flow path with peace of mind.

Feature I5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features I2 to I4 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first flow path is a flow path that is more advantageous to a player than the second flow path.

According to Feature I5 of the present invention, a gaming ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent gaming balls. Since the first flow path is more advantageous to the player than the second flow path, the player can enjoy the movement of the gaming ball guided to the first flow path with peace of mind.

Based on Group I of Features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
The gaming machine also has a flow path such as a stage that temporarily rolls and drops gaming balls flowing down the gaming area, and the starting ball entry means allows gaming balls that have fallen from this stage to enter the game.

However, if a subsequent gaming ball comes into contact with a gaming ball rolling on a flow path such as a stage, the gaming ball rolling on the stage may move in a way that is disadvantageous to the player, posing a problem in that the gaming machine will no longer allow the player to enjoy playing comfortably.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with a launching means (launching handle 16) that launches a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board,
a first gaming state;
Only game balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can enter a first ball entry area (upper introduction section 751), creating a second game state different from the first game state;
A guide means (guide paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a player with a benefit;
a second game state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and a second plate 783) for generating the second game state based on the first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state;
a first game state generating means (the second plate-shaped portion 786 or the fourth plate 789G) that generates the first game state when a second game ball that is launched by the launching means after the first game ball during the generation of the second game state satisfies a specific condition;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a limiting means (second plate 783) that limits the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

According to Feature J1 of this invention, while the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area are allowed to enter the first entry area, and the guiding means guides the game ball that has entered the first entry area to the second entry area that will provide a benefit to the player, allowing the player to enjoy the benefit when the second game state occurs. Furthermore, the restricting means restricts the second game state generation means from generating the second game state based on the second game ball passing through a specified area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature J2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature J1 of the present invention,
The restricting means allows the second game ball to pass through another area in the game area that is different from the predetermined area while the second game state is occurring.

According to Feature J2 of this invention, the restriction means causes the second game ball to pass through an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, thereby reliably restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generating means.

Feature J3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature J1 or Feature J2 of the present invention group,
The second game state generating means generates the second game state when a state generating lottery executed based on the first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring is won, and does not generate the second game state when the state generating lottery is not won.

According to Feature J3 of this group of inventions, the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state if the state generating lottery is won, and does not generate the second gaming state if the state generating lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature J4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J3 of the present invention group,
The limiting means is
a limiting state that limits the second game state generation means from generating the second game state;
a non-restricted state in which the second game state generating means is not restricted from generating the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the limited state, and when the first gaming state is generated by the first gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the non-limited state.

According to Feature J4 of this invention group, the restriction means switches to the restricted state when the second game state is generated by the second game state generation means, and switches to the non-restricted state when the first game state is generated by the first game state generation means. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the second game state from being generated by the second game state generation means while the second game state is being generated, without restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generation means while the first game state is being generated.

Feature J5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J4 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means establishes the specific condition based on only a portion of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to Feature J5 of this invention, the first gaming state generating means establishes a specific condition based only on a portion of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so the player focuses on whether the second gaming balls satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature J6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J5 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

According to Feature J6 of this invention group, the first gaming state has a first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on a second probability higher than the first probability. Therefore, the player focuses on the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and plays in the hope that the second probability state will be reached. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature J7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state.

According to Feature J7 of this invention, the second game state generating means generates the second game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the first game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the second game state generating means.

Feature J8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J7 of the present invention,
The first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball.

According to Feature J8 of this invention, the first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the first game state generating means.

By virtue of Feature J of the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine increases the player's attention to the game by switching between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that provides a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

However, if the game state switches to the first game state without awarding any profits while the second game state is occurring, the gaming machine will no longer be able to provide a comfortable gaming experience to the player.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with a launching means (launching handle 16) that launches a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board,
a first gaming state;
Only game balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can enter a first ball entry area (upper introduction section 751), creating a second game state different from the first game state;
A guide means (guide paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a player with a benefit;
a second game state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and a second plate 783) for generating the second game state based on the first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state;
a first game state generating means (the second plate-shaped portion 786 or the fourth plate 789G) that generates the first game state when a second game ball that is launched by the launching means after the first game ball during the generation of the second game state satisfies a specific condition;
A gaming machine characterized by having a gaming ball guiding means (second plate 783) that guides the second gaming ball to another area different from the specified area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring.

According to Feature K1 of the present invention, when the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the first ball entry area, and the guide means guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area that will provide a benefit to the player, allowing the player to enjoy the benefit when the second game state occurs. Furthermore, the game ball guide means guides the game ball launched by the launch means during the second game state to an area other than the specified area in the game area, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature K2.
In the gaming machine described in feature K1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first game state generating means generates the first game state based on the second game ball passing through another area different from a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring.

According to Feature K2 of this invention, the first game state generating means generates the first game state based on the second game ball passing through an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so that the first game state can be generated using the second game ball.

Feature K3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature K1 or Feature K2 of the present invention,
The second game state generating means generates the second game state when a state generating lottery executed based on the first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the first game state is occurring is won, and does not generate the second game state when the state generating lottery is not won.

According to Feature K3 of this group of inventions, the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state if the state generating lottery is won, and does not generate the second gaming state if the state generating lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generating lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature K4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K3 of the present invention,
The game ball guiding means is
a game ball guiding state in which the second game ball is guided to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state;
a game ball non-guiding state in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the gaming ball guiding state, and when the first gaming state is generated by the first gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the gaming ball non-guiding state.

According to feature K4 of the present invention, the game ball guiding means switches to a game ball guiding state when the second game state generation means generates a second game state, and switches to a game ball non-guiding state when the first game state generation means generates a first game state. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the second game state generation means from generating the second game state while the second game state is occurring, without restricting the second game state generation means from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring.

Feature K5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K4 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means establishes the specific condition based on only a portion of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to Feature K5 of this invention, the first gaming state generating means establishes a specific condition based only on a portion of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so the player focuses on whether the second gaming balls satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature K6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K5 of the present invention,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

According to Feature K6 of this invention, the first gaming state has a first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on a second probability higher than the first probability. Therefore, the player focuses on the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and plays in the hope that the second probability state will be reached. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature K7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state.

According to Feature K7 of this invention, the second game state generating means generates the second game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the first game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the second game state generating means.

Feature K8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K7 of the present invention,
The first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball.

According to Feature K8 of this invention, the first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the first game state generating means.

By virtue of this feature group K of the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine increases the player's attention to the game by switching between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that provides a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

However, if the game state switches to the first game state without awarding any profits while the second game state is occurring, the gaming machine will no longer be able to provide a comfortable gaming experience to the player.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with a launching means (launching handle 16) that launches a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board,
a first gaming state;
Only game balls present in a specific area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can enter a first ball entry area (upper introduction section 751), creating a second game state different from the first game state;
a guide means (guide path 75) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a player with a benefit;
a second game state generating means (a first plate 782 and a second plate 783) for generating the second game state based on the first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state;
a first game state generating means (second plate-shaped portion 786) for generating the first game state when a second game ball, which is launched by the launching means after the first game ball during the generation of the second game state, satisfies a specific condition;
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

According to Feature L1 of this invention, while the second game state is occurring, only game balls present in a specific area in the game area can enter the first entry area, and the guiding means guides the game ball that entered the first entry area to the second entry area that will grant the player a benefit, allowing the player to enjoy a benefit when the second game state occurs. Furthermore, the first game state has a first probability state that causes the second game state generation means to generate the second game state based on a first probability, and a second probability state that causes the second game state generation means to generate the second game state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability. Therefore, the player focuses on the probability state of the second game state generation means and plays in the hope that the second probability state will be reached. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature L2.
In the gaming machine described in feature L1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by having a restriction means for restricting the second gaming state from being generated by the second gaming state generating means based on the second gaming ball passing through a predetermined area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring.

According to Feature L2 of this invention, the restriction means restricts the second game state generation means from generating the second game state based on the second game ball passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, allowing the player to enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature L3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature L2 of the present invention,
The restricting means allows the second game ball to pass through another area in the game area that is different from the predetermined area while the second game state is occurring.

According to Feature L3 of this invention, the restriction means causes the second game ball to pass through an area other than the predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, thereby reliably restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generating means.

Feature L4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature L2 or Feature L3 of the present invention,
The limiting means is
a limiting state that limits the second game state generation means from generating the second game state;
a non-restricted state in which the second game state generating means is not restricted from generating the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the limited state, and when the first gaming state is generated by the first gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the non-limited state.

According to Feature L4 of this invention group, the restriction means switches to the restricted state when the second game state is generated by the second game state generation means, and switches to the non-restricted state when the first game state is generated by the first game state generation means. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the second game state from being generated by the second game state generation means while the second game state is being generated, without restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generation means while the first game state is being generated.

Feature L5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L4 of the present invention,
The second game state generating means generates the second game state when a state generating lottery executed based on the first game ball launched by the launching means passing through a specified area in the game area while the first game state is occurring is won, and does not generate the second game state when the state generating lottery is not won.

According to Feature L5 of this group of inventions, the second gaming state generation means generates the second gaming state if the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the second gaming state if the state generation lottery is not won, so the player will pay attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature L6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L5 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means establishes the specific condition based on only a portion of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to Feature L6 of this invention, the first gaming state generating means establishes a specific condition based only on a portion of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition, so the player focuses on whether the second gaming balls satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature L7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second game state generating means displaces the second game state generating means with the first game ball to generate the second game state.

According to Feature L7 of this invention, the second game state generating means generates the second game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the first game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the second game state generating means.

Feature L8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L7 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first gaming state generating means displaces the second gaming state generating means with the second gaming ball to generate the first gaming state.

According to Feature L8 of this invention, the first game state generating means generates the first game state by displacing the second game state generating means with the second game ball, thereby simplifying the configuration of the first game state generating means.

By virtue of this feature group L of the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine increases the player's attention to the game by switching between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that provides a benefit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

However, if the game state switches to the first game state without awarding any profits while the second game state is occurring, the gaming machine will no longer be able to provide a comfortable gaming experience to the player.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) equipped with a launching means (launching handle 16) that launches a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board,
a first gaming state;
a second gaming state different from the first gaming state;
a second game state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and a second plate 783) that generates the second game state when a first game ball launched by the launching means passes through a predetermined area in the game area and comes into contact with and is displaced by the first game ball during the generation of the first game state;
a first game state generating means (stage allocation mechanisms 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) that generates the first game state when a second game ball, which is launched by the launching means after the first game ball during the generation of the second game state, passes through a predetermined area in the game area and comes into contact with and is displaced by the second game ball;
and a limiting means (second plate 783) for limiting the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means based on the second game ball passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the second game state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second game state generating means guides the first game ball that has generated the second game state to a first benefit awarding area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) that awards a first benefit to the player, and the first game state generating means guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to a second benefit awarding area (lower stage 72) that awards a second benefit different from the first benefit to the player.

According to Feature M1 of this invention, the second game state generation means guides the first game ball that generated the second game state to a first benefit awarding area that awards the player a first benefit, and the first game state generation means guides the second game ball that generated the first game state to a second benefit awarding area that awards the player a second benefit different from the first benefit, so the player will pay attention to the destination of the game ball. Furthermore, the restriction means restricts the second game state generation means from generating the second game state based on the second game ball passing through a predetermined area in the game area while the second game state is occurring, so the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature M2.
In the gaming machine described in feature M1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming ball guided to the first benefit awarding area by the second gaming state generating means enters a first benefit entry area (upper introduction section 751) that awards the first benefit when a first condition is satisfied, and the second gaming ball guided to the second benefit awarding area by the first gaming state generating means enters a second benefit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that awards the second benefit when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

According to feature M2 of the present invention, a first gaming ball guided to a first benefit awarding area by the second gaming state generating means will land in a first benefit landing area that awards a first benefit if a first condition is met, and a second gaming ball guided to a second benefit awarding area by the first gaming state generating means will land in a second benefit landing area that awards a second benefit if a second condition different from the first condition is met, so the player will pay attention to whether the first and second conditions are met.

Feature M3.
In the gaming machine described in feature M2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second gaming ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged to an area other than both the first profit ball area and the second profit ball area.

According to feature M3 of the present invention, a first gaming ball that does not satisfy the first condition and a second gaming ball that does not satisfy the second condition are discharged into an area other than both the first profitable ball area and the second profitable ball area, so the player will pay attention to whether the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball are discharged into another area.

Feature M4.
In the gaming machine described in Features M1 to M3 of the present invention,
The limiting means is
a limiting state that limits the second game state generation means from generating the second game state;
a non-restricted state in which the second game state generating means is not restricted from generating the second game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second gaming state is generated by the second gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the limited state, and when the first gaming state is generated by the first gaming state generating means, the gaming machine switches to the non-limited state.

According to feature M4 of this invention group, the restriction means switches to the restricted state when the second game state is generated by the second game state generation means, and switches to the non-restricted state when the first game state is generated by the first game state generation means. This makes it possible to reliably restrict the second game state from being generated by the second game state generation means while the second game state is being generated, without restricting the second game state from being generated by the second game state generation means while the first game state is being generated.

Feature M5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features M1 to M4 of the present invention,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
A gaming machine characterized by having a second probability state (low frequency interference mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability.

According to Feature M5 of this invention, the first gaming state has a first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state based on a second probability higher than the first probability. Therefore, the player focuses on the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and plays in the hope that the second probability state will be reached. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By utilizing this feature group M of the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine increases the player's attention to the game by switching between a first gaming state and a second gaming state that provides a player with a profit and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

However, if the game state switches to the first game state without awarding any profits while the second game state is occurring, the gaming machine will no longer be able to provide a comfortable gaming experience to the player.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows the game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that grants a first benefit to the player;
a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that provides the player with a secondary benefit that is smaller than the primary benefit;
a third flow path that allows the game ball to enter a third ball entry area (equivalent winning hole 88L) that provides the player with a third benefit that is smaller than the second benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82) that has an operating state that allows game balls to flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and an inactive state that allows game balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the inactive state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary flow path allows gaming balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined gaming state.

According to Feature N1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state that allows gaming balls to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state that allows gaming balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Furthermore, since the tertiary flow path allows game balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined game state, a player will not aim a game ball at the tertiary flow path when the actuating member is in an inoperative state in the predetermined game state. Therefore, the gaming machine can prevent a player from obtaining an unfair advantage in the predetermined game state even if the game ball is fired toward the tertiary flow path.

Feature N2.
In the gaming machine described in feature N1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different surfaces that form the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to Feature N2 of the present invention, the primary flow path, secondary flow path, and tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the flow of gaming balls. Furthermore, even in cases where three flow paths (primary, secondary, and tertiary) must be formed in the flow path when a gaming ball is launched toward one route, the gaming machine can effectively utilize the limited space on the gaming board to efficiently form the flow paths.

Feature N3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature N1 or Feature N2 of the present invention,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delay the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the second entry area before the gaming ball guided to the first entry area by the entry delay means enters the first entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the second benefit.

According to Feature N3 of the present invention, if a gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path lands in the secondary entry area while a gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means lands in the primary entry area, the gaming machine performs a granting process to immediately grant a secondary benefit. This allows the player to instantly enjoy the secondary benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means to land in the primary entry area. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature N4.
In the gaming machine described in feature N3 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit awarding means for awarding a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to a player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means, after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature N4 of this invention, the specific benefit awarding means awards a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit awarding means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the benefit awarded by the specific benefit awarding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature N5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features N1 to N4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area can award one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to Feature N5 of the present invention, the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or fewer game balls when one game ball enters the area. This allows the player to aim the game ball at the operating member when the operating member is in an activated state, and not aim the game ball at the operating member when the operating member is in an inactivated state. This allows the gaming machine to increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature N6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features N1 to N5 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the operating state, the operating member causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the rate at which game balls flow into the secondary flow path is greater than the rate at which game balls flow into the primary flow path.

According to Feature N6 of the present invention, when the operating member is activated, it causes gaming balls to flow only down either the primary or secondary flow path, and the proportion of gaming balls flowing down the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of gaming balls flowing down the primary flow path, so the player will pay attention to whether or not gaming balls are flowing down the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By virtue of these N features of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with variable display means that variably display multiple images are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and begins the variable display of images. For example, if a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to ultimately display a specific combination of images in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state where gaming balls can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, it transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable prize-winning device to a state where gaming balls can enter, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This creates a problem in that the process of awarding benefits to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature O group>
Feature O1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows the game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that grants a first benefit to the player;
a tertiary flow path that allows game balls to enter a tertiary ball entry area (the lower operating port 26, the outlet 28, and the equivalent winning port 88L) that provides the player with a tertiary benefit that is smaller than the first benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82 or moving distribution means 86J) that has an operating state that allows game balls to flow down the primary flow path and an inactive state that allows game balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the inactive state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path and the tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to Feature O1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state that allows gaming balls to flow down the primary flow path and an inactive state that allows gaming balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays the game in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Furthermore, since the primary flow path and the tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board, the gaming machine can diversify the flow of gaming balls. Furthermore, even if two flow paths, the primary flow path and the tertiary flow path, must be formed in the flow path when a gaming ball is launched toward one route, the gaming machine can effectively use the limited space of the gaming board to efficiently form the flow paths.

Feature O2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature O1 of the present invention,
The game board is
a secondary flow path that allows a game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that provides a player with a secondary benefit that is smaller than the first benefit and larger than the third benefit;
the actuating member has an actuated state in which the game balls can flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and an inactive state in which the game balls can flow down the tertiary flow path, and is changed from the inactive state to the actuated state based on the establishment of a predetermined actuating condition;
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different surfaces that form the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to Feature O2 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state that allows gaming balls to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state that allows gaming balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Furthermore, since the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board, the gaming machine can diversify the flow of gaming balls. Furthermore, even if three flow paths, the primary flow path and the tertiary flow path, must be formed in the flow path when a gaming ball is launched toward one route, the gaming machine can effectively use the limited space of the gaming board to efficiently form the flow paths.

Feature O3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature O2 of the present invention,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delay the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the second entry area before the gaming ball guided to the first entry area by the entry delay means enters the first entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the second benefit.

According to Feature O3 of the present invention, if a gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path lands in the secondary entry area while a gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means lands in the primary entry area, the gaming machine performs a granting process to immediately grant a secondary benefit. This allows the player to instantly enjoy the secondary benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means to land in the primary entry area. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature O4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature O2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the operating state, the operating member causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the rate at which game balls flow into the secondary flow path is greater than the rate at which game balls flow into the primary flow path.

According to Feature O4 of the present invention, when the operating member is activated, it causes gaming balls to flow only down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the proportion of gaming balls flowing down the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of gaming balls flowing down the primary flow path, so the player will pay attention to whether or not gaming balls are flowing down the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature O5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature O2 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit awarding means for awarding a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to a player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means, after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature O5 of the present invention, the specific benefit awarding means awards a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit awarding means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the benefit awarded by the specific benefit awarding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature O6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features O1 to O5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary flow path allows gaming balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined gaming state.

According to Feature O6 of the present invention, the tertiary flow path allows game balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a specified game state, so that in a specified game state, a player will not aim a game ball at the tertiary flow path when the operating member is in a non-operated state. Therefore, in a specified game state, the gaming machine can prevent a player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the game ball is fired toward the tertiary flow path.

Feature O7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features O1 to O6 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area can award one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to Feature O7 of the present invention, the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or fewer game balls when one game ball enters the area. This allows the player to aim the game ball at the operating member when the operating member is in an activated state, and not aim the game ball at the operating member when the operating member is in an inactivated state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By virtue of this feature group O of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with variable display means that variably display multiple images are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and begins the variable display of images. For example, if a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to ultimately display a specific combination of images in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state where gaming balls can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, it transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable prize-winning device to a state where gaming balls can enter, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This creates a problem in that the process of awarding benefits to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows the game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that grants a first benefit to the player;
a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that provides the player with a secondary benefit that is smaller than the primary benefit;
a tertiary flow path that allows game balls to enter a tertiary ball entry area (the lower operating port 26, the outlet 28, and the equivalent winning port 88L) that provides the player with a tertiary benefit that is smaller than the second benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82 or moving distribution means 86J) that has an operating state that allows game balls to flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and an inactive state that allows game balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the inactive state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delay the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the second entry area before the gaming ball guided to the first entry area by the entry delay means enters the first entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the second benefit.

According to Feature P1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state that allows gaming balls to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state that allows gaming balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Furthermore, if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path lands in the second entry area before the gaming ball guided to the first entry area by the entry delay means lands in the first entry area, the gaming machine immediately performs a granting process to grant the second benefit, so that the player can immediately enjoy the second benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the first entry area by the entry delay means to land in the first entry area. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature P2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature P1 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit awarding means for awarding a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to a player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means, after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature P2 of this invention, the specific benefit awarding means awards a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit awarding means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the benefit awarded by the specific benefit awarding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature P3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature P1 or Feature P2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary flow path allows gaming balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined gaming state.

According to Feature P3 of the present invention, the tertiary flow path allows game balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a specified game state, so that in a specified game state, the player will not aim the game ball at the tertiary flow path when the operating member is in a non-operated state. Therefore, in a specified game state, the gaming machine can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the game ball is fired toward the tertiary flow path.

Feature P4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features P1 to P3 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different surfaces that form the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to Feature P4 of the present invention, the primary flow path, secondary flow path, and tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the flow of gaming balls. Furthermore, even in cases where three flow paths (primary, secondary, and tertiary) must be formed in the flow path when a gaming ball is launched toward one route, the gaming machine can efficiently form the flow paths by effectively utilizing the limited space on the gaming board.

Feature P5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features P1 to P4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area can award one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to Feature P5 of the present invention, the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or fewer game balls when one game ball enters the area. This allows the player to aim the game ball at the operating member when the operating member is in an activated state, and not aim the game ball at the operating member when the operating member is in an inactivated state. This allows the gaming machine to increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature P6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features P1 to P5 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the operating state, the operating member causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the rate at which game balls flow into the secondary flow path is greater than the rate at which game balls flow into the primary flow path.

According to Feature P6 of the present invention, when the operating member is activated, it causes gaming balls to flow only into either the primary or secondary flow path, and the proportion of gaming balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of gaming balls flowing into the primary flow path, so the player will pay attention to whether or not gaming balls are flowing into the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By utilizing this feature group P of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with variable display means that variably display multiple images are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and begins the variable display of images. For example, if a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to ultimately display a specific combination of images in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state where gaming balls can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, it transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable prize-winning device to a state where gaming balls can enter, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This creates a problem in that the process of awarding benefits to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature Q group>
Feature Q1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows the game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that grants a first benefit to the player;
a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that provides the player with a secondary benefit that is smaller than the primary benefit;
a third flow path that allows the game ball to enter a third ball entry area (equivalent winning hole 88L) that provides the player with a third benefit that is smaller than the second benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82) that has an operating state that allows game balls to flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and an inactive state that allows game balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the inactive state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area can award one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to Feature Q1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state that allows gaming balls to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state that allows gaming balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Furthermore, since the tertiary ball entry area can award one or less game balls when one game ball enters, the player will aim the operating member to fire the game ball when the operating member is in an activated state, and will not aim the operating member to fire the game ball when the operating member is in an inactivated state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature Q2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Q1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary flow path allows gaming balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined gaming state.

According to Feature Q2 of the present invention, the tertiary flow path allows game balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a specified game state, so that in a specified game state, the player will not aim the game ball at the tertiary flow path when the operating member is in a non-operated state. Therefore, in a specified game state, the gaming machine can prevent the player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the game ball is fired toward the tertiary flow path.

Feature Q3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Q1 or Feature Q2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different surfaces that form the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to Feature Q3 of the present invention, the primary flow path, secondary flow path, and tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the flow of gaming balls. Furthermore, even in cases where three flow paths (primary, secondary, and tertiary) must be formed in the flow path when a gaming ball is launched toward one route, the gaming machine can efficiently form the flow paths by effectively utilizing the limited space on the gaming board.

Feature Q4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features Q1 to Q3 of the present invention,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delay the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the second entry area before the gaming ball guided to the first entry area by the entry delay means enters the first entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the second benefit.

According to Feature Q4 of the present invention, if a gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path lands in the secondary entry area while a gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means lands in the primary entry area, the gaming machine performs a granting process to immediately grant a secondary benefit.This allows the player to instantly enjoy the secondary benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means to land in the primary entry area.As a result, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature Q5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Q4 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit awarding means for awarding a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to a player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means, after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature Q5 of the present invention, the specific benefit awarding means awards a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit awarding means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the benefit awarded by the specific benefit awarding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature Q6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features Q1 to Q5 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the operating state, the operating member causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the rate at which game balls flow into the secondary flow path is greater than the rate at which game balls flow into the primary flow path.

According to Feature Q6 of the present invention, when the operating member is activated, it causes gaming balls to flow only down either the primary or secondary flow path, and the proportion of gaming balls flowing down the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of gaming balls flowing down the primary flow path, so the player will pay attention to whether or not gaming balls are flowing down the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By virtue of this feature group Q of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with variable display means that variably display multiple images are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and begins the variable display of images. For example, if a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to ultimately display a specific combination of images in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state where gaming balls can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, it transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable prize-winning device to a state where gaming balls can enter, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This creates a problem in that the process of awarding benefits to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
The game board is
a first flow path that allows the game ball to enter a first ball entry area (variable winning through gate 85) that grants a first benefit to the player;
a secondary flow path that allows the game ball to enter a secondary ball entry area (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) that provides the player with a secondary benefit that is smaller than the primary benefit;
a tertiary flow path that allows game balls to enter a tertiary ball entry area (the lower operating port 26, the outlet 28, and the equivalent winning port 88L) that provides the player with a tertiary benefit that is smaller than the second benefit;
an operating member (rotational distribution means 82 or moving distribution means 86J) that has an operating state that allows game balls to flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path, and an inactive state that allows game balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and that changes from the inactive state to the operating state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the operating state, the operating member causes game balls to flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the rate at which game balls flow into the secondary flow path is greater than the rate at which game balls flow into the primary flow path.

According to Feature R1 of the present invention, the gaming machine has an operating state that allows gaming balls to flow down either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and an inactive state that allows gaming balls to flow down the tertiary flow path, and is equipped with an operating member that changes from the inactive state to the active state based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, so that the player plays in the hope that the inactive state will change to the active state based on the establishment of the predetermined operating condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
Furthermore, when the actuating member is in an actuated state, the gaming balls flow only into either the primary flow path or the secondary flow path, and the proportion of gaming balls flowing into the secondary flow path is greater than the proportion of gaming balls flowing into the primary flow path, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the gaming balls flow into the primary flow path. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature R2.
In the gaming machine described in feature R1 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary flow path allows gaming balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a predetermined gaming state.

According to Feature R2 of the present invention, the tertiary flow path allows gaming balls to enter only the tertiary ball entry area in a specified gaming state, so that in a specified gaming state, a player will not aim a gaming ball at the tertiary flow path when the operating member is in a non-operating state. Therefore, in a specified gaming state, the gaming machine can prevent a player from obtaining an unfair advantage even if the gaming ball is fired toward the tertiary flow path.

Feature R3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature R1 or Feature R2 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that the primary flow path, the secondary flow path, and the tertiary flow path have different surfaces that form the flow paths in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board.

According to Feature R3 of the present invention, the primary flow path, secondary flow path, and tertiary flow path are formed on different surfaces in the front-to-back direction of the gaming board, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the flow of gaming balls. Furthermore, even in cases where three flow paths (primary, secondary, and tertiary) must be formed in the flow path when a gaming ball is launched toward one route, the gaming machine can efficiently form the flow paths by effectively utilizing the limited space on the gaming board.

Feature R4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features R1 to R3 of the present invention,
The primary flow path is
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the first ball entry area and delay the time until the game ball enters the first ball entry area,
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that if another gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path enters the second entry area before the gaming ball guided to the first entry area by the entry delay means enters the first entry area, an awarding process is performed to immediately award the second benefit.

According to feature R4 of the present invention, if a gaming ball flowing down the secondary flow path lands in the secondary entry area while a gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means lands in the primary entry area, the gaming machine performs a granting process to immediately grant a secondary benefit. This allows the player to instantly enjoy the secondary benefit even while waiting for the gaming ball guided to the primary entry area by the entry delay means to land in the primary entry area. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature R5.
In the gaming machine described in feature R4 of the present invention,
The first ball entry area as a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the ball;
the secondary winning area as a specific benefit awarding means for awarding a benefit to a player;
The operating member serves as a special distribution means for distributing game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit providing means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to a player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means, after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature R5 of this invention group, the specific benefit awarding means awards a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit awarding means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the benefit awarded by the specific benefit awarding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature R6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features R1 to R5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the tertiary ball entry area can award one or less gaming balls when one gaming ball enters the area.

According to Feature R6 of the present invention, the tertiary ball entry area is capable of awarding one or fewer game balls when one game ball enters the area. This allows the player to aim the game ball at the operating member when the operating member is in an activated state, and not aim the game ball at the operating member when the operating member is in an inactivated state. This allows the gaming machine to increase the player's attention to the game.

By using this feature group R of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with variable display means that variably display multiple images are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and begins the variable display of images. For example, if a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to ultimately display a specific combination of images in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state where gaming balls can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, it transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable prize-winning device to a state where gaming balls can enter, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This creates a problem in that the process of awarding benefits to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature S group>
Feature S1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball;
A specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts a game in the specific control state when a ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the specific control state by the game state transfer means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) that executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state.

According to Feature S1 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a special game execution means that executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state, allowing the player to enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S1 of the present invention,
The special game execution means
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for paying out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area;
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delay the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by having a special game path (right-hit route) that leads to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to feature S2 of the present invention, the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
In addition, the special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until game play in the specific control state is started.
Therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature S3.
In the gaming machine described in feature S2 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) is provided to pay out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game balls,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set to be able to accept gaming balls flowing down the gaming area when the gaming balls enter the special gaming ball entry means.

According to Feature S3 of the present invention, the game ball payout means is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entry means, so that the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the setting of allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entry means is not restricted when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates setting of a game ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game ball when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) that switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature S4 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played.This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is not being played.As a result, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period, which is a period after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means, and which is a period longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized by having a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and that switches the gaming ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature S5 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to a first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to a second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played. This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features S2 to S5 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
A crane (crane 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) that turns the game ball is provided,
The said croon
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guidable holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature S6 of the present invention, the crane is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball rotating on the rotating surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and an unguidable hole that prevents a game ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until game play in the specific control state begins, thereby simplifying the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Feature S7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features S2 to S6 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) that distributes game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to Feature S7 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a special distribution means that distributes gaming balls flowing down the special gaming path to either the special gaming payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays in the hope that the special distribution means will distribute the gaming ball to the special gaming payout means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature S7 of the present invention,
The special allocation means
A distribution-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
A distribution-disabled state (normal guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means,
The gaming machine is characterized by having an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) that switches the special allocation means to the allocation-enabled state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation-disabled state when the special game is not being executed.

According to Feature S8 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means that switches the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special distribution means to a distribution-disabled state when a special game is not being played. This means that players will play in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature S9.
In the gaming machine described in feature S8 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the allocation-enabled state, the special allocation means allocates game balls flowing down the special game path by passing them through the front surface of the game board so as not to allocate the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, and in the allocation-disabled state, by passing them through the back surface of the game board so as not to allocate the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to feature S9 of the present invention, the special distribution means is configured to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front side of the game board when distribution is possible, and to not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back side of the game board when distribution is not possible, thereby allowing the gaming machine to diversify the flow of game balls.

By virtue of this group of features S of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with variable display means that variably display multiple images are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and begins the variable display of images. For example, if a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to ultimately display a specific combination of images in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state where gaming balls can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, it transitions the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, which creates the problem that the game flow becomes monotonous and reduces the player's attention to the game.

<Feature T group>
Feature T1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for paying out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area;
a first route (left-handed route) leading to the starting ball entry means;
A second route (right-hit route) that leads to the special game payout means and is different from the first route,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) that pays out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game ball;
and a launch suppression means for suppressing the launch of the game ball toward the second path by switching the state of the special game payout means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set to be able to accept gaming balls flowing down the gaming area when the gaming balls enter the special gaming ball entry means.

According to Feature T1 of the present invention, the launch suppression means switches the state of the special game payout means to suppress the launch of game balls toward the second path, so that players will not launch game balls toward the second path aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature T2.
In the gaming machine described in feature T1 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the setting of allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entry means is not restricted when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates setting of a game ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game ball when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the launch suppression means is equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) that switches the game ball payout means to either the non-regulated state or the regulated state.

According to Feature T2 of the present invention, the launch suppression means includes a restricted state switching means for switching the game ball payout means between an unrestricted state and a restricted state. Therefore, when the restricted state switching means switches the game ball payout means to a restricted state, the player will not launch game balls toward the second path aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T3.
In the gaming machine described in feature T1 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period, which is a period after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means, and which is a period longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the launch suppression means includes a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the game ball payout means to either the first ball entry waiting period or the second ball entry waiting period.

According to Feature T3 of the present invention, the launch suppression means includes a ball entry waiting period switching means for switching the game ball payout means between the first ball entry waiting period and the second ball entry waiting period. Therefore, when the ball entry waiting period switching means switches to the second ball entry waiting period, the player will not launch the game ball toward the second path aiming at the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features T1 to T3 of the present invention,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball;
A specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts a game in the specific control state when a ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the specific control state by the game state transfer means;
and a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state;
The special game execution means is provided with the special game payout means.

According to Feature T4 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a special game execution means that executes a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state, allowing the player to enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T5.
In the gaming machine described in feature T4 of the present invention,
The special game execution means
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delay the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that it is provided with the second path (right-hit route) that leads to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to feature T5 of the present invention, the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
In addition, the special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the time until the specific control start means starts game in the specific control state can be delayed, allowing the player to enjoy a special game that is different from game in the specific control state.
Therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the second path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature T6.
In the gaming machine described in feature T5 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
A crane (crane 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) that turns the game ball is provided,
The said croon
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guidable holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature T6 of the present invention, the crane is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball rotating on the rotating surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and an unguidable hole that prevents a game ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until game play in the specific control state begins, thereby simplifying the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Feature T7.
In the gaming machine described in Feature T5 or Feature T6 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by having a special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, moving distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) that distributes gaming balls flowing down the second path to either the special gaming payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to Feature T7 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a special distribution means that distributes gaming balls flowing down the second path to either the special gaming payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays in the hope that the special distribution means will distribute the gaming balls to the special gaming payout means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T8.
In the gaming machine described in feature T7 of the present invention,
The special allocation means
A distribution-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which the game balls flowing down the second path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
a distribution-disabled state (normal guidance state) in which the game balls flowing down the second path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
The gaming machine is characterized by having an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) that switches the special allocation means to the allocation-enabled state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation-disabled state when the special game is not being executed.

According to Feature T8 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means that switches the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special distribution means to a distribution-disabled state when a special game is not being played. This means that players will play in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature T9.
In the gaming machine described in feature T8 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the allocation-enabled state, the special allocation means allocates game balls flowing down the second path by passing them through the front surface of the game board so as not to allocate game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, and in the allocation-disabled state, by passing them through the back surface of the game board so as not to allocate game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to Feature T9 of the present invention group, the special distribution means is configured to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front side of the game board when distribution is possible, and to not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back side of the game board when distribution is not possible, thereby allowing the gaming machine to diversify the flow of game balls.

By virtue of these features T of the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Such a gaming machine has a first path (left-hand hit route) and a second path (right-hand hit route) different from the first path, and the player shoots the gaming ball toward either the first path or the second path.

However, if either the first path or the second path is designated as the path that is advantageous to the player, the player will shoot the game ball toward the path that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine, which will result in the player being unable to enjoy the game.

<Feature U group>
Feature U1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball;
A specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts a game in the specific control state when a ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the specific control state by the game state transfer means;
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means;
and periodic benefit awarding means (opening start opening 83 and opening winning device 84) for awarding a benefit to a player according to the length of the period from when the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state until when the specific control start means starts a game in the specific control state,
The gaming machine is characterized by having a special gaming path (right-hand hitting route) that leads to both the periodic profit granting means and the ball entry delay means.

According to feature U1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry delay means that guides a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the gaming ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the gaming state is transitioned to a specific control state by the gaming state transition means, the time until game play in the specific control state is started by the specific control start means can be delayed.
The periodic profit awarding means can award a profit to the player according to the length of the period from when the game state transitioning means transitions the game state to the specific control state until when the specific control starting means starts the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U2.
In the gaming machine described in feature U1 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
A crane (crane 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) that turns the game ball is provided,
The said croon
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guidable holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature U2 of the present invention, the crane is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball rotating on the rotating surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and an unguidable hole that prevents a game ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until game play in the specific control state begins, thereby simplifying the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Feature U3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature U1 or Feature U2 of the present invention group,
a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state;
The special game execution means
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) as the periodic profit granting means for paying out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising the ball entry delay means.

According to feature U3 of the present invention, the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
In addition, the special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until game play in the specific control state is started.
Therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature U4.
In the gaming machine described in feature U3 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) is provided to pay out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game balls,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set to be able to accept gaming balls flowing down the gaming area when the gaming balls enter the special gaming ball entry means.

According to Feature U4 of the present invention, the game ball payout means is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U5.
In the gaming machine described in feature U4 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the setting of allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entry means is not restricted when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates setting of a game ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game ball when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) that switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature U5 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played.This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is not being played.As a result, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U6.
In the gaming machine described in feature U4 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period, which is a period after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means, and which is a period longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized by having a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and that switches the gaming ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature U6 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to a first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to a second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played. This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features U3 to U6 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) that distributes game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to Feature U7 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a special distribution means that distributes gaming balls flowing down the special gaming path to either the special gaming payout means or the ball entry delay means, so that the player plays in the hope that the special distribution means will distribute the gaming ball to the special gaming payout means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U8.
In the gaming machine described in feature U7 of the present invention,
The special allocation means
A distribution-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
A distribution-disabled state (normal guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means,
The gaming machine is characterized by having an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) that switches the special allocation means to the allocation-enabled state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation-disabled state when the special game is not being executed.

According to Feature U8 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means that switches the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special distribution means to a distribution-disabled state when a special game is not being played. This means that players will play in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature U9.
In the gaming machine described in feature U8 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the allocation-enabled state, the special allocation means allocates game balls flowing down the special game path by passing them through the front surface of the game board so as not to allocate the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, and in the allocation-disabled state, by passing them through the back surface of the game board so as not to allocate the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to feature U9 of the present invention, the special distribution means is configured to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front side of the game board when distribution is possible, and to not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back side of the game board when distribution is not possible, thereby allowing the gaming machine to diversify the flow of game balls.

By virtue of this feature group U of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with variable display means that variably display multiple images are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and begins the variable display of images. For example, if a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to ultimately display a specific combination of images in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state where gaming balls can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, it transitions the game state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player, which creates the problem that the game flow becomes monotonous and reduces the player's attention to the game.

<Feature Group V>
Feature V1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A specific benefit awarding means (an opening start opening 83 and an opening winning device 84) for awarding a benefit to a player;
A special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82, movement distribution means 86J, or rotation distribution means 87K) is provided to distribute game balls flowing down the game area to either the specific ball entry means or the specific benefit granting means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific benefit granting means grants a benefit to a player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit granting means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means, after the special allocation means allocates the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature V1 of this invention group, the specific benefit awarding means awards a benefit to the player based on the gaming balls allocated to the specific benefit awarding means by the special allocation means before the gaming balls enter the specific ball entry means after the special allocation means allocates gaming balls flowing down the gaming area to the specific ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the benefit awarded by the specific benefit awarding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature V1 of the present invention,
The specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball;
A specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts a game in the specific control state when a ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the specific control state by the game state transfer means;
and a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state;
The special game execution means
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) as the specific benefit providing means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area;
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delay the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by having a special game path (right-hit route) that leads to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means.

According to feature V2 of the present invention, the special game execution means is equipped with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when executing a special game.
In addition, the special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means that guides a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to a specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until game play in the specific control state is started.
Therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature V3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature V2 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) is provided to pay out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game balls,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set so as to be able to receive a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area when the gaming ball enters the special gaming ball entry means.

According to Feature V3 of the present invention, the game ball payout means is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature V3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the setting of allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entry means is not restricted when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates setting of a game ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game ball when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) that switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature V4 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played.This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is not being played.As a result, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature V3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period, which is a period after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means, and which is a period longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized by having a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and that switches the gaming ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature V5 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to a first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to a second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played. This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features V2 to V5 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
A crane (crane 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) that turns the game ball is provided,
The said croon
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guidable holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature V6 of the present invention, the crane is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball rotating on the rotating surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and an unguidable hole that prevents a game ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until game play in the specific control state begins, thereby simplifying the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Feature V7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features V2 to V6 of the present invention,
The special allocation means
A distribution-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
A distribution-disabled state (normal guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means,
The gaming machine is characterized by having an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) that switches the special allocation means to the allocation-enabled state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation-disabled state when the special game is not being executed.

According to Feature V7 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means that switches the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special distribution means to a distribution-disabled state when a special game is not being played. This means that players will play in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature V8.
In the gaming machine described in Feature V7 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the allocation-enabled state, the special allocation means allocates game balls flowing down the special game path by passing them through the front surface of the game board so as not to allocate the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means, and in the allocation-disabled state, by passing them through the back surface of the game board so as not to allocate the game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means.

According to Feature V8 of the present invention, the special distribution means is configured to distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the front side of the game board when distribution is possible, and to not distribute game balls to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means by passing them through the back side of the game board when distribution is not possible, thereby allowing the gaming machine to diversify the flow of game balls.

By virtue of Feature Group V of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with variable display means that variably display multiple images are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and begins the variable display of images. For example, if a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to ultimately display a specific combination of images in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state where gaming balls can enter.

However, when a gaming machine wins a jackpot, it transitions the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine shifts the variable prize-winning device to a state where gaming balls can enter, thereby paying out a large number of gaming balls. This creates a problem in that the process of awarding benefits to the player becomes monotonous, and the player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature W group>
Feature W1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A special distribution means (rotary distribution means 82) is provided to distribute game balls flowing down the game area to either a first distribution flow path or a second distribution flow path,
The special distribution means distributes game balls to the first distribution flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board, and distributes game balls to the second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board.

According to Feature W1 of the present invention, the special distribution means distributes gaming balls to a first distribution path by passing them through the front surface of the gaming board, and distributes gaming balls to a second distribution path by passing them through the back surface of the gaming board, allowing the gaming machine to diversify the flow of gaming balls.

Feature W2.
In the gaming machine described in feature W1 of the present invention,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball;
A specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts a game in the specific control state when a ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the specific control state by the game state transfer means;
and a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state;
The special game execution means
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for paying out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area;
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delay the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine is provided with a special game path (right-hit route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the special distribution means distributes game balls flowing down the special game path to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means via the first distribution flow path.

According to Feature W2 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a special game execution means for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state, so that the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
In addition, the special game execution means is provided with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when the special game is executed.
The special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until the game in the specific control state is started.
Therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature W3.
In the gaming machine described in feature W2 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) is provided to pay out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game balls,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set so as to be able to receive a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area when the gaming ball enters the special gaming ball entry means.

According to Feature W3 of the present invention, the game ball payout means is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature W4.
In the gaming machine described in feature W3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the setting of allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entry means is not restricted when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates setting of a game ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game ball when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) that switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature W4 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played.This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is not being played.As a result, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature W5.
In the gaming machine described in feature W3 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period, which is a period after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means, and which is a period longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized by having a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and that switches the gaming ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature W5 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played. This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature W6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features W2 to W5 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
A crane (crane 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) that turns the game ball is provided,
The said croon
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guidable holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to feature W6 of the present invention, the crane is equipped with a guideable hole that allows a game ball rotating on the rotating surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and an unguidable hole that prevents a game ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until game play in the specific control state begins, thereby simplifying the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

Feature W7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features W2 to W6 of the present invention,
The special allocation means
A distribution-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means;
A distribution-disabled state (normal guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the special game path are not distributed to either the special game payout means or the ball entry delay means,
The gaming machine is characterized by having an allocation state switching means (special game execution processing) that switches the special allocation means to the allocation-enabled state when the special game is being executed, and switches the special allocation means to the allocation-disabled state when the special game is not being executed.

According to Feature W7 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means that switches the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state when a special game is being played, and switches the special distribution means to a distribution-disabled state when a special game is not being played. This means that players will play in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

By using this feature group W of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines have various components (appearances) in the gaming area, such as numerous nails planted in order to appropriately disperse the directions in which gaming balls fall, and windmills.

However, because gaming machines distribute game balls by passing them over the surface of the game board, the process can become monotonous, which can reduce players' interest in the game.

<Feature X group>
Feature X1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed on a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25, lower actuation port 26, and actuation port 261L) for executing an internal lottery when a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area enters the game; and a gaming state transition means (main control device 4) for transitioning the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to a player based on the result of the internal lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the starting ball entry means,
A special distribution means (rotation distribution means 82 or movement distribution means 86J) is provided to distribute game balls flowing down the game area to either a first distribution flow path or a second distribution flow path,
The special allocation means
A distribution-enabled state (specific guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are distributed to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path;
A distribution-disabled state (normal guidance state) in which game balls flowing down the game area are not distributed to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a distribution state switching means (special game execution process) that switches the special distribution means to either the distribution-enabled state or the distribution-disabled state.

According to Feature X1 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a distribution state switching means that switches the special distribution means between a distribution-enabled state and a distribution-disabled state, so that the player plays in the hope that the distribution state switching means will switch the special distribution means to a distribution-enabled state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature X2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X1 of the present invention,
The special distribution means distributes game balls to either the first distribution flow path or the second distribution flow path by passing them through the front surface of the game board, and distributes game balls to another flow path different from the first distribution flow path and the second distribution flow path by passing them through the back surface of the game board.

According to Feature X2 of the present invention, gaming balls are distributed to either the first distribution path or the second distribution path by passing through the front surface of the gaming board, and are distributed to a path other than the first distribution path or the second distribution path by passing through the back surface of the gaming board, so the gaming machine can diversify the flow of gaming balls.

Feature X3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature X1 or Feature X2 of the present invention,
A specific ball entry means (variable winning through gate 85) that starts a game in the specific control state when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the ball;
A specific control start means (special game execution process) that starts a game in the specific control state when a ball enters the specific ball entry means after the game state is transferred to the specific control state by the game state transfer means;
and a special game execution means (lower right game means 8) for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state;
The special game execution means
A special game payout means (an opening start port 83 and an opening winning device 84) for paying out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game area;
A ball entry delay means (Kroon 81) is provided to guide the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delay the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means,
The gaming machine is provided with a special game path (right-hit route) leading to both the special game payout means and the ball entry delay means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the special distribution means distributes game balls flowing down the special game path to the special game payout means via the first distribution flow path, and distributes them to the ball entry delay means via the second distribution flow path.

According to Feature X3 of the present invention, the gaming machine includes a special game execution means for executing a special game different from the game in the specific control state after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state and before the specific control start means starts the game in the specific control state, so that the player can enjoy a special game different from the game in the specific control state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.
In addition, the special game execution means is provided with a special game payout means for paying out game balls when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, so that the player can increase the number of game balls when the special game is executed.
The special game execution means is equipped with a ball entry delay means that guides the game ball flowing down the game area to the specific ball entry means and delays the time until the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until the game in the specific control state is started.
Therefore, by shooting the game ball toward the special game path, the player can enjoy a special game that is different from the game in the specific control state.

Feature X4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X3 of the present invention,
The special game payout means is
A special game ball entry means (open start port 83) for allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter;
A game ball payout means (open winning device 84) is provided to pay out game balls when game balls flowing down the game area enter the game balls,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming ball payout means is set to be able to accept gaming balls flowing down the gaming area when the gaming balls enter the special gaming ball entry means.

According to Feature X4 of the present invention, the game ball payout means is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to enter when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means, so the player will pay attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the special game ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature X5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X4 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
A non-restricted state in which the setting of allowing a game ball flowing down the game area to enter the special game ball entry means is not restricted when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means;
A regulation state that regulates setting of a game ball flowing down the game area as being unable to enter the game ball when the game ball enters the special game ball entry means,
The gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a regulated state switching means (winning process for open winning) that switches the game ball payout means to the non-regulated state when the special game is being played, and switches the game ball payout means to the regulated state when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature X5 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a regulated state switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to a non-regulated state when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to a regulated state when a special game is not being played.This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entrance means when a special game is not being played.As a result, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature X6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature X4 of the present invention,
The game ball payout means is
a first ball entry waiting period, which is a predetermined period from when a game ball enters the special game ball entry means until when a game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means;
a second ball entry waiting period, which is a period after the game ball has entered the special game ball entry means until the game ball flowing down the game area is set to be able to enter the special game ball entry means, and which is a period longer than the predetermined period;
The gaming machine is characterized by having a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to the first ball entry waiting period when the special game is being played, and that switches the gaming ball payout means to the second ball entry waiting period when the special game is not being played.

According to Feature X6 of the present invention, the gaming machine is equipped with a ball entry waiting period switching means that switches the gaming ball payout means to a first ball entry waiting period when a special game is being played, and switches the gaming ball payout means to a second ball entry waiting period when a special game is not being played. This allows the player to fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is being played, and not fire gaming balls at the special game ball entry means when a special game is not being played. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature X7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of the features X3 to X6 of the present invention,
The ball entry delay means is
A crane (crane 81) having a turning surface (turning surface 812) that turns the game ball is provided,
The said croon
A guide hole (hole 814) that can guide the game ball rotating on the rotating surface to the specific ball entry means;
A gaming machine characterized by having non-guidable holes (holes 815, 816) that prevent a gaming ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means.

According to Feature X7 of the present invention, the crane is equipped with a guide hole that allows a game ball rotating on the rotating surface to be guided to the specific ball entry means, and an unguidable hole that prevents a game ball rotating on the rotating surface from being guided to the specific ball entry means. Therefore, after the game state transition means transitions the game state to the specific control state, the specific control start means can delay the time until game play in the specific control state begins, thereby simplifying the configuration of the ball entry delay means.

By virtue of this feature group X of the present invention, the gaming machine can increase the player's attention to the game, thereby solving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines have various components (appearances) in the gaming area, such as numerous nails planted in order to appropriately disperse the directions in which gaming balls fall, and windmills.

However, because gaming machines constantly distribute game balls using various components such as nails and windmills, the flow can become monotonous, which can lead to a decrease in players' interest in the game.

<Characteristic Group Y>
Feature Y1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
A period effect generating means (step S5102 of determining whether to execute the pre-reading effect) for a predetermined period of time on the basis of the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means,
and a special effect generating means (a process for determining an effect pattern in step S2407M) for causing the variable display means to execute a special effect (a second reserved effect) different from the period effect based on the game ball entering the second start ball entering means,
The special effect generating means executes the period effect instead of the special effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified period.

According to feature Y1 of the present invention, the special effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a special effect different from the period effect based on a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means, and causes the variable display means to execute a period effect in place of the special effect based on a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined period. According to this, when the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a period effect for a predetermined period based on a gaming ball entering the first start ball entry means, it can execute a period effect in place of a special effect based on a gaming ball entering the second start ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature Y2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature Y2 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when the gaming machine is causing the variable display means to execute a period effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, it can cause the variable display means to execute a period effect instead of a special effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature Y3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the period effect is a predictive effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by using an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature Y3 of the present invention, the periodic effect is a predictive effect, so if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a periodic effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a special effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the continuity of the periodic effect will be lost. According to the present invention, the special effect generation means can execute a periodic effect instead of a special effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means during a specified period, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the periodic effect.

Feature Y4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the periodic effect notifies the player of the expectation level of the periodic effect based on the length of the predetermined period.

According to Feature Y4 of the present invention, the period effect notifies the player of the expected probability of this period effect based on the length of the specified period, so the player will pay attention to the length of the specified period.

Feature Y5.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y4 of the present invention,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an effect synthesis means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102) that, when priority hold information to be consumed preferentially in the second hold area is stored in the second hold storage means based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified period, combines an effect based on the priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information, and makes it appear to the player as one game round.

According to feature Y5 of this invention group, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information to be consumed preferentially in the second reserve area based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a specified period, the effect synthesis means combines an effect based on this priority reserve information with an effect based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game session.Therefore, the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute a period effect instead of a special effect based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

Feature Y6.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y5 of the present invention,
The effect synthesis means stops the progress of the period effect based on the priority reservation information when synthesizing the special effect (pseudo consecutive effect) based on the priority reservation information and the special effect based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area or the second reservation area that is consumed before or after the priority reservation information,
The special effect is a different effect from the period effect and the special effect, and is an effect that can be executed in overlap with the period effect.

According to feature Y6 of the present invention, the effect synthesis means stops the progress of the period effect based on the priority hold information when synthesizing a special effect based on priority hold information with a special effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute the period effect instead of the special effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means during the specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

Feature Y7.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Y5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect synthesis means synthesizes the period effect based on the priority hold information with the period effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information.

According to feature Y7 of the present invention, the effect synthesis means synthesizes a period effect based on priority hold information with a period effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information, so that the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute a period effect instead of a special effect based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means during a specified period without changing the length of the specified period.

These feature groups of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following problems:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), this gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature Z group>
Feature Z1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A development effect generating means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S5102) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined number of game times based on the establishment of the first trigger;
A development performance number increasing means (a reserve shift process in step S2104) for increasing the number of times the development performance is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a development effect count reduction means (a process for determining whether to consume a predictive effect in step S5102) that reduces the number of times the development effect is played when the number of times the development effect is played is increased by the development effect count increase means.

According to Feature Z1 of the present invention group, the effect execution means is equipped with an advanced effect count increase means for increasing the number of times the advanced effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and an advanced effect count decrease means for decreasing the number of times the advanced effect is played when the advanced effect count increase means has increased the number of times the advanced effect is played.Therefore, even when the predetermined number of times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the advanced effect can maintain the predetermined number of times it is played.This allows the gaming machine to allow players to play comfortably.

Feature Z2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z1 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means as the first trigger being established;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) as the development performance count increasing means for storing reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means as the establishment of the second trigger;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to Feature Z2 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when the gaming machine is causing the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, the development effect count increase means can increase the number of times the development effect is played based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature Z3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a pre-reading effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature Z3 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the development effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to the present invention, the effect execution means is equipped with development effect count reduction means that reduces the number of play times of the development effect when the development effect count increase means increases the number of play times. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the development effect can maintain the predetermined number of play times.

Feature Z4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expectation of the development effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to Feature Z4 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected outcome of the development effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

Feature Z5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features Z2 to Z4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the second hold storage means stores priority hold information that is to be consumed preferentially in the second hold area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified number of play rounds, the means for reducing the number of times the advanced effect is played combines a presentation based on the priority hold information with a presentation based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information, and presents the result to the player as one play round, thereby reducing the number of play rounds of the advanced effect.

According to Feature Z5 of the present invention, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information for preferential consumption in the second reserve area based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game plays, the advanced effect count reduction means combines the effect based on this priority reserve information with the effect based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game play.Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of game plays of advanced effects using the advanced effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game plays without changing the number of game plays.

Feature Z6.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z5 of the present invention,
The development performance frequency reduction means stops the progress of the development performance based on the priority reservation information when a special performance (pseudo consecutive performance) based on the priority reservation information is combined with the special performance based on reservation information stored in the first reservation area or the second reservation area that is consumed before or after the priority reservation information,
The special effect is a different effect from the development effect and can be executed in overlap with the development effect.

According to Feature Z6 of the present invention, the advanced effect count reduction means stops the progress of the advanced effect based on the priority hold information when combining a special effect based on priority hold information with a special effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of times an advanced effect is played by the advanced effect count increase means based on the entry of game balls into the second start ball entry means during the predetermined number of play times, without changing the number of play times.

Feature Z7.
In the gaming machine described in Feature Z5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the means for reducing the number of development effects combines the development effect based on the priority hold information with the development effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information.

According to feature Z7 of the present invention, the development effect count reduction means combines development effects based on priority hold information with development effects based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of development effect play times using the development effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during the predetermined number of play times, without changing the number of play times.

These feature groups Z of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristics AA group>
Feature AA1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
A first development effect generating means (pre-reading effect generating process) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means;
A second development effect generating means (hold synthesis effect start processing) that causes the variable display means to execute the development effect based on the game ball entering the second start ball entering means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a development effect synthesis means (hold synthesis effect consumption processing and hold synthesis effect termination processing) that synthesizes the development effect of the first development effect generation means and the development effect of the second development effect generation means to execute a series of development effects.

According to Feature AA1 of the present invention, the first development effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a development effect that develops gradually over a predetermined period of time based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means, and the second development effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means. The development effect synthesis means can then synthesize the development effect of the first development effect generation means and the development effect of the second development effect generation means to execute a series of development effects. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature AA2.
In the gaming machine described in feature AA1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to Feature AA2 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when the first development effect generation means is causing the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, the gaming machine can cause the second development effect generation means to cause the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.The development effect synthesis means can then synthesize the development effect of the first development effect generation means and the development effect of the second development effect generation means to execute a series of development effects.

Feature AA3.
In the gaming machine described in feature AA2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a predictive effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature AA3 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect, so if the gaming machine were to cause the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the pending information stored in the second pending area while the variable display means was executing a development effect based on the pending information stored in the first pending area, the continuity of the development effect would be lost. According to the present invention, the development effect synthesis means synthesizes the development effect of the first development effect generation means and the development effect of the second development effect generation means to execute a series of development effects, allowing the player to play comfortably without losing the continuity of the development effects.

Feature AA4.
In the gaming machine described in feature AA3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expected degree of the development effect based on the length of the predetermined period.

According to feature AA4 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected level of the development effect based on the length of the specified period, so the player will pay attention to the length of the specified period.

These features of the present invention, group AA, allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature BB group>
Feature BB1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
A first game turn effect generating means (step S5102) for causing the variable display means to execute a game turn effect (pseudo consecutive effect) that occurs over one game turn based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second game play effect generating means (step S5102) for causing the variable display means to execute the game play effect based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entering means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game round effect synthesis means (a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102) that synthesizes the game round effect of the first game round effect generation means and the game round effect of the second game round effect generation means, and makes it appear to the player as a single game round effect.

According to Feature BB1 of the present invention, the first game round effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a game round effect based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means, and the second game round effect generation means causes the variable display means to execute a game round effect based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means. The game round effect synthesis means then synthesizes the game round effect of the first game round effect generation means and the game round effect of the second game round effect generation means, and presents the result to the player as a single game round effect. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to play comfortably.

Feature BB2.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB1 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
A development effect generating means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined number of game times based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means;
A development performance number increasing means (a reserve shift process in step S2104) for increasing the number of times the development performance is played based on the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means;
When the number of times of play of the development performance is increased by the development performance number increasing means, the number of times of play of the development performance is decreased by the development performance number decreasing means (pre-reading performance consumption determination process of step S5102),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect count reduction means is a game round effect synthesis means that combines the game round effect of the first game round effect generation means and the game round effect of the second game round effect generation means, and makes it appear to the player as a single game round effect, thereby reducing the number of game rounds of the development effect.

According to feature BB2 of the present invention, the effect execution means includes an advanced effect count increase means for increasing the number of times the advanced effect is played based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means, and an advanced effect count decrease means for decreasing the number of times the advanced effect is played when the advanced effect count increase means has increased the number of times the advanced effect is played. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of times is increased based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means, the advanced effect can maintain the predetermined number of times it is played. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature BB3.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB2 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature BB3 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area. Therefore, even when the hold information stored in the first hold area is being used by the hold information generating means to cause the variable display means to execute a hold information display, the gaming machine can increase the number of times the hold information display is played by the hold information increasing means based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature BB4.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a pre-reading effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature BB4 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the development effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to the present invention, the effect execution means is equipped with a development effect count reduction means that reduces the number of play times of the development effect when the development effect count increase means increases the number of play times. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means, the development effect can maintain the predetermined number of play times.

Feature BB5.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expectation of the development effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to feature BB5 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected outcome of the development effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

Feature BB6.
In a gaming machine described in any one of features BB3 to BB5 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the second reserve storage means stores priority reserve information that is to be consumed preferentially in the second reserve area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified number of game rounds, the means for reducing the number of times the advanced performance is played reduces the number of game rounds of the advanced performance by combining the game round presentation based on the priority reserve information with the game round presentation based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or the second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and making it appear to the player as one game round.

According to feature BB6 of the present invention, when the second reserve storage means stores reserve information for preferential consumption in the second reserve area based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game rounds, the advanced effect count reduction means combines the game round presentation based on this priority reserve information with the game round presentation based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game round.Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of game rounds of advanced effects using the advanced effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game rounds, without changing the number of game rounds.

Feature BB7.
In the gaming machine described in feature BB6 of the present invention,
The development performance number reduction means stops the progress of the development performance based on the priority reservation information when combining the game round performance (pseudo consecutive performance) based on the priority reservation information with the game round performance based on reservation information stored in the first reservation area or the second reservation area that is consumed before or after the priority reservation information,
The game machine is characterized in that the game round presentation is a presentation different from the development presentation and can be executed in overlap with the development presentation.

According to feature BB7 of the present invention, the development effect count reduction means stops the progress of the development effect based on the priority hold information when combining a game turn effect based on priority hold information with a game turn effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of game turns of the development effect using the development effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during the predetermined number of game turns, without changing the number of game turns.

These feature BB groups of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Characteristic CC group>
Feature CC1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A continuous effect generating means (a process for determining an effect pattern in step S2407M) is provided to cause the variable display means to execute a series of continuous effects (pseudo-continuous effects) that consecutively perform a plurality of effects based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger,
The continuous performance is as follows:
A composite continuous performance (hold composite notice) that executes the series of continuous performances by combining multiple game times;
The gaming machine is characterized by being provided with a normal consecutive performance (normal pseudo consecutive performance) that executes the series of consecutive performances during one game.

According to feature CC1 of the present invention, the effect execution means includes continuous effect generation means that causes the variable display means to execute a series of continuous effects that connect multiple effects based on the establishment of a predetermined trigger. The continuous effects include a composite continuous effect that executes a series of continuous effects by combining multiple game turns, and a normal continuous effect that executes a series of continuous effects during a single game turn. Therefore, the gaming machine can make multiple types of continuous effects appear to the player as the same series of continuous effects, thereby diversifying the types of effects and allowing the player to play comfortably.

Feature CC2.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC1 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
A development effect generating means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined number of game times based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means;
A development performance number increasing means (a reserve shift process in step S2104) for increasing the number of times the development performance is played based on the entry of a game ball into the second start ball entry means;
When the number of times of play of the development performance is increased by the development performance number increasing means, the number of times of play of the development performance is decreased by the development performance number decreasing means (pre-reading performance consumption determination process of step S5102),
The development performance count reduction means is the continuous performance generation means that reduces the number of times the development performance is played by having the variable display means execute the composite continuous performance.

According to feature CC2 of the present invention, the effect execution means includes an advanced effect count increase means for increasing the number of times the advanced effect is played based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means, and an advanced effect count decrease means for decreasing the number of times the advanced effect is played when the advanced effect count increase means has increased the number of times the advanced effect is played. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of times is increased based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start ball entry means, the advanced effect can maintain the predetermined number of times it is played. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature CC3.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC2 of the present invention,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) stores reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second start ball entry means;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to Feature CC3 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area. Therefore, even when the hold information stored in the first hold area is being used by the hold information generating means to cause the variable display means to execute a hold information, the gaming machine can increase the number of times the hold information is played by the hold information increasing means based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature CC4.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a pre-reading effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature CC4 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the specific hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the development effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to the present invention, the effect execution means is equipped with a development effect count reduction means that reduces the number of play times of the development effect when the development effect count increase means increases the number of play times. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on a game ball entering the second start ball entry means, the development effect can maintain the predetermined number of play times.

Feature CC5.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC4 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expectation of the development effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to feature CC5 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected degree of success of the development effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

Feature CC6.
In a gaming machine described in any one of Features CC3 to CC5 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the second hold storage means stores priority hold information that is to be consumed preferentially in the second hold area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means during the specified number of play times, the means for reducing the number of play times of the advanced effect reduces the number of play times of the advanced effect by having the variable display means execute the composite continuous effect that combines an effect based on the priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information, thereby making it appear to the player as one play time.

According to Feature CC6 of the present invention, when the second reserve storage means stores reserve information for preferential consumption in the second reserve area based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game rounds, the advanced effect count reduction means causes the variable display means to execute a composite continuous presentation that combines a game round presentation based on this priority reserve information with a game round presentation based on reserve information stored in the first reserve area or second reserve area that is consumed before or after the priority reserve information, and presents this to the player as a single game round.Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of game rounds of advanced effects using the advanced effect count increase means based on game balls entering the second start ball entry means during a predetermined number of game rounds without changing the number of game rounds.

Feature CC7.
In the gaming machine described in feature CC6 of the present invention,
The development performance count reduction means stops the progress of the development performance based on the priority reservation information when combining a performance based on the priority reservation information (pseudo consecutive performance) with a performance based on reservation information stored in the first reservation area or the second reservation area that is consumed before or after the priority reservation information,
The composite continuous performance is a performance different from the development performance and can be executed in overlap with the development performance.

According to feature CC7 of the present invention, the development effect count reduction means stops the progress of the development effect based on the priority hold information when combining an effect based on priority hold information with an effect based on hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area that is consumed before or after the priority hold information. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the number of times the development effect is played by the development effect count increase means based on the entry of game balls into the second start ball entry means during the predetermined number of play times, without changing the number of play times.

These feature CCs of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

<Feature DD group>
Feature DD1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising: a launching means (launching handle 16) for launching a gaming ball toward a gaming area formed in front of a gaming board; a starting ball entry means (upper actuation port 25 and lower actuation port 26) for causing a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the gaming area and for executing an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the gaming area; a variable display means (pattern display device 36) for executing a variable display based on the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entry means; and an effect execution means (sound and light emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to execute an effect,
The performance execution means
A development effect generating means (pre-reading effect consumption determination process of step S5102O) that causes the variable display means to execute a development effect (pre-reading effect) that develops stepwise over a predetermined number of game times based on the establishment of the first trigger;
A development performance number increasing means (a reserve shift process in step S2104) for increasing the number of times the development performance is played based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a development effect stopping means (a pre-reading effect consumption determination process in step S5102O) that causes the variable display means to stop the execution of the development effect when the number of times the development effect is played is increased by the development effect count increasing means.

According to feature DD1 of the present invention, the effect execution means includes an advanced effect count increase means for increasing the number of times the advanced effect is played based on the establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger, and an advanced effect stop means for causing the variable display means to stop the execution of the advanced effect when the advanced effect count increase means has increased the number of times the advanced effect is played. Therefore, even if the number of times the advanced effect is played is increased by a predetermined number based on the establishment of the second trigger, the advanced effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of times. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play comfortably.

Feature DD2.
In the gaming machine described in Feature DD1 of the present invention,
The starting ball entry means is
First starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry means (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry means is provided,
The performance execution means
An information storage means (sub-side reserved information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of reserved information (sub-side reserved information) based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting ball entrance means;
An information storage means (reservation determination process) is provided for storing reserved information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means,
The information storage means
An execution area (execution area SAE) that stores pending information during execution of variable display by the variable display means;
A plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information of a holding state before the variable display is executed by the variable display means,
The information storage means
A first reserve storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing reserve information in a first reserve area (first sub-side reserve area SRa) based on the game ball entering the first start ball entry means as the first trigger being established;
A second reserve storage means (processing of step S2203) as the development performance count increasing means for storing reserve information in a second reserve area (second sub-side reserve area SRb) different from the first reserve area based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means as the establishment of the second trigger;
a reservation shift means (reservation shift process) for shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The hold shift means shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area with priority.

According to feature DD2 of the present invention, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that even when the gaming machine is causing the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, the development effect count increase means can increase the number of times the development effect is played based on the hold information stored in the second hold area.

Feature DD3.
In the gaming machine described in Feature DD2 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect is a pre-reading effect that, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, notifies the player of the expected value of the hold information by utilizing an effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area or the second hold area, which is consumed before the hold information.

According to Feature DD3 of the present invention, the development effect is a predictive effect. Therefore, if the gaming machine causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the first hold area, and then causes the variable display means to execute a development effect based on the hold information stored in the second hold area, the development effect will no longer be able to maintain the predetermined number of play times. According to the present invention, the effect execution means is equipped with development effect cancellation means that causes the variable display means to cancel the execution of the development effect when the development effect count increase means increases the number of play times of the development effect. Therefore, even if the predetermined number of play times is increased based on the establishment of the second trigger, the development effect can be prevented from exceeding the predetermined number of play times.

Feature DD4.
In the gaming machine described in Feature DD3 of the present invention,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the development effect notifies the player of the expectation of the development effect based on the number of times the predetermined number of games have been played.

According to feature DD4 of the present invention, the development effect notifies the player of the expected degree of the development effect based on the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played, so the player will pay attention to the number of times a predetermined number of games have been played.

These feature DDs of the present invention allow players to play comfortably, thereby resolving the following issues:

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying multiple symbols are known. When a gaming ball enters an actuation port (initial ball entry means), the gaming machine executes an internal lottery, such as a jackpot lottery, and starts displaying the symbols variably. For example, when a jackpot lottery is won, the gaming machine causes the variable display means to finally display a specific symbol combination, etc., in a static state, and transitions the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large number of gaming balls, for example, by transitioning the variable entry device to a state in which a gaming ball can enter.
Incidentally, such gaming machines, after starting to display the varying patterns, execute a number of different effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will transition to a specific control state.

However, the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, which can sometimes make it difficult for players to enjoy the game.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used in gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

1... Pachinko machine, 24... General winning opening, 25... Upper operating opening, 26... Lower operating opening, 27... Variable winning device, 271... Large winning opening, 272... Opening and closing door, 273... Variable winning drive unit, 28... Outlet opening, 35... Pattern display device, 4... Main control device, 42... MPU, 5... Audio and light emission control device, 52... MPU, 6... Display control device, 62... MPU.

Claims (1)

a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board;
A display means is arranged corresponding to the game board and is capable of displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner ;
A performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance during the period when the variable display is executed;
A gaming machine comprising:
This gaming machine is
A first starting ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and which triggers a predetermined lottery to be executed based on the game ball entering the game area;
A second starting ball entry means, which is different from the first starting ball entry means, into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and which triggers a specific lottery to be executed based on the game ball entering the game area;
A reserved display means for displaying a number of reserved images for effect corresponding to the reserved number of the variable display rights reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number when a game ball enters at least the first starting ball entry means;
Equipped with
The variable display that can be displayed on the variable display is:
A first variable display that is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means;
A second variable display that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means,
This gaming machine is
The system is configured so that a specific game state advantageous to the player is more likely to occur thereafter if the result of the specific lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entry means is a specific advantageous result than if the result of the predetermined lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting ball entry means is a specific advantageous result,
The performance execution means is configured to display a predetermined suggestion information image at least in a plurality of first variable displays that are displayed consecutively,
In a situation where the predetermined suggestive information image is displayed on the display means with predetermined display contents based on a ball entering the second starting ball entering means in a predetermined game state, the display means is configured to be able to execute the display of a specific effect image corresponding to the second variable display, overlapping with the predetermined suggestive information image;
In a situation where the predetermined suggestive information image is displayed with the predetermined display content on the display means, when a predetermined condition is met, the display of the specific effect image being executed on the display means can be terminated,
The display content of the predetermined suggestive information image can be changed from the predetermined display content to a specific display content while the display means is executing the display of the specific effect image,
This gaming machine is
The predetermined suggestion information image displayed overlapping with the second variable display in which the specific effect image is displayed is configured to be displayed so as not to interfere with the visibility of the predetermined variable display of the pattern in the second variable display,
When the predetermined suggestion information image and the specific effect image are displayed on the display means, they are drawn and displayed so that their display priorities are different from each other.
When a specific condition is met, a special effect image can be displayed following the specific effect image after the specific effect image is displayed .
When the special effect image is displayed, the value to the player is likely to be higher than when the special effect image is not displayed after the specific effect image is displayed ,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the specified suggestive information image is displayed overlapping with the specific performance image, the gaming machine is configured to be able to maintain the display of the specified suggestive information image for a specified period of time.